dotnetCHARTING

Specifies a background drawing mode.

Draws a solid color.

Draws a centered image on the background surface.

Stretches an image across the background surface.

Tiles an image on a background surface.

Draws a 2 color gradient.

Uses the Background.Brush object to fill the surface.

Specifies the available box cap styles. These caps can be used with box header StartCap and EndCap properties.

Specifies a box cap.

Specifies a triangle cap.

Specifies an inverted triangle cap.

Specifies a downward cut cap.

Specifies an upward cut cap.

Specifies an arrow cap.

Specifies a rounded cap.

Specifies an inverted rounded cap.

Specifies a cap rounded up.

Specifies a cap rounded down.

Specifies a torn cap.

Specifies a box edge style.

The edge is a corner.

The edge is cut.

The edge is rounded.

Specifies a calculation to be performed on a series or series collection.

Calculates the sum of a series or series collection.

Calculates the mean of a series or series collection.

Calculates the median of a series or series collection.

Calculates the mode of a series or series collection.

Calculates the average of a series or series collection.

Calculates the minimum of a series or series collection.

Calculates the maximum of a series or series collection.

Calculates a running sum of a series or series collection.

Calculates a running mean of a series or series collection.

Calculates a running median of a series or series collection.

Calculates a running mode of a series or series collection.

Calculates a running average of a series or series collection.

Calculates a running minimum of a series or series collection.

Calculates a running maximum of a series or series collection.

Calculates the linear regression of y values within a series collection.

Calculates the linear regression of x and y values within a series collection.

Specifies the positioning behavior of multiple chart areas on a single chart image.

Specifies that chart areas layout will be based on axis relationships where x axes will be matched before chart areas are added based on y axis relationships. ChartAreaLayoutRules.EnforceOppositeAxisAlignment affects this setting.

Specifies that chart areas layout will be based on axis relationships where y axes will be matched before chart areas are added based on x axis relationships. ChartAreaLayoutRules.EnforceOppositeAxisAlignment affects this setting.

Specifies that chart areas will be laid out vertically in a single column and arranged based on x axis relationships.

Specifies that chart areas will be laid out horizontally in a single row and arranged based on x axis relationships.

Specifies that chart areas will be laid out vertically in a single column in the order they were added.

Specifies that chart areas will be laid out horizontally in a single row in the order they were added.

Specifies that chart areas will be laid out in a grid matrix based on ChartArea.GridPosition.

Specifies the navigation options of chart areas in the navigator.

Enables drag scrolling of the chart area

Enables arbitrary selection in the chart area. Meaning, a new area can be selected to zoom into.

Enables zooming with the scrollwheel.

Represents the chart type of a chart.

The combo chart supports virtually every feature. This chart is capable of being every chart you want it to be based on settings of other objects like series and axes. The x axis is a label axis and the y axis is a value axis. Element values used YValue, YValueStart, YDateTime, YDateTimeStart, Complete

Each series is drawn side by side. This chart doesn't support stacked axis scales and unclustered columns. The x axis is a label axis and the y axis is a value axis. Element values used YValue, YValueStart, YDateTime, YDateTimeStart, Complete

This chart supports the bar and cylinder series types. The y axis is a label axis and the x axis is a value axis. Element values used YValue, YValueStart, YDateTime, YDateTimeStart, Complete

The pie chart draws a single pie where each slice represents a series. Most applications would use Pies rather than Pie Element values used YValue

Multiple pies where each pie is a series and each slice is an element (suitable for most applications). Pies may also be drawn as donuts. Most applications would use Pies rather than Pie. Pies does not support Series.Palette. Element values used YValue

See Pie.

See Pies.

Draws a single radar. The time scale is not supported by the radar graph. Element values used YValue

Draws multiple radars where each radar is a series. The time scale is not supported by radar graph. Element values used YValue

Draws scattered data. Markers, lines, and splines are supported. Element values used YValue, YDateTime, XValue, XDateTime

Draws scattered data. Markers, lines, and splines are supported. Data Used: YValue, YDateTime, XValue, XDateTime

Only 3 axes exist for this chart, price, volume and x axis. No more axes can be bound to series but you can calculate as many axes as you would like. HLC Charts can be achieved by providing a high, low, and close but leaving open equal double.NaN. Element values used Open, High, Low, Close, Volume

See ComboHorizontal.

Draws a gauge for each series. Each element represents a needle. Element values used YValue

Draws a map from a shapefile or ecw image.

Draws multiple type series that are laid out on the chart similar to Pie.

Draws multiple type series that are laid out on the chart similar to gauges or radars.

Draws pies that are nested or stacked.

Draws an organization chart.

Specifies a database type.

MS SQL database.

OleDb database.

Microsoft Access database.

Specifies a DataSource type to split the parent DataSource into.

Specifies no type

Specifies an Element data source type.

Specifies a Series data source type.

Specifies an SeriesCollection data source type.

Specifies an Element Group data source type. Element groups are elements in the same SeriesCollection that share a name.

Specifies an AxisMarker data source type.

Specifies a ScaleRange data source type.

Specifies the alignment of an object in relation to an objects side.

Specifies inside placement.

Specifies placement in the middle of the edge.

Specifies inside placement.

Built in element marker icons.

Does not draw a marker

Markers is drawn as a square.

Markers is drawn as a triangle.

Markers is drawn as a circle.

Markers is drawn as a diamond.

Markers is drawn as a four point star.

Markers is drawn as a five point star.

Markers is drawn as a six point star.

Markers is drawn as a seven point star.

Markers is drawn as a financial split.

Markers is drawn as a financial reverse split.

Markers is drawn as a financial merger.

Markers is drawn as a financial dividend paid indicator.

Markers is drawn as a financial spinoff.

Specifies a value of an element.

The name of an element.

Y value of an element.

Initial y value of an element.

X value of an element.

Initial x value of an element.

Y DateTime value of an element.

Initial y DateTime value of an element.

X DateTime value of an element.

Initial x DateTime value of an element.

Bubble size value of an element.

Percent completed value of an element.

Financial open price value of an element.

Financial close price value of an element.

Financial high price value of an element.

Financial low price value of an element.

Financial trade volumn value of an element.

Element's length, refers to a pie slice's length.

Element's height, refers to a pie slice's height.

Specifies how empty elements are handled.

Empty elements are not shown or marked leaving gaps.

Completes empty areas by filling the line, or area. Columns will behave the same as EmptyElementMode.None.

Fills the empty area with EmptyElement properties of a series.

Empty elements will have the value of 0 and not be marked as empty.

Specifies a database field data type.

String data type.

Date data type.

Number data type.

Currency data type.

Double data type.

Bool data type.

LongNumber data type.

BigInt data type.

Specifies the gauge border shape used on gauges.

The border shape is determined automatically.

The Series.GaugeBorderBox is used as the shape of the gauge border.

Specifies the circular gauge axis labeling mode.

Default labeling.

Labels are drawn radially around the axis.

Specifies the linear gauge type.

Default linear gauge style.

Thermometer style.

Specifies the gauge needle type used on circular gauges.

Type 1.

Type 2.

Type 3.

A custom image is used as the marker needle.

Specifies the gauge type when using ChartType.Gauges or ChartType.Multiple with SeriesTypeMultiple.Gauge.

Circular gauges.

Linear horizontal gauge

Linear vertical gauge.

Linear horizontal bars.

Indicator light gauge.

Digital readout gauge.

Specifies a pre-defined hatch style palette.

No hatch style palette is specified.

Palette one.

Palette two.

Palette three.

A random palette.

Specifies file save format.

Saves an image using the W3C Portable Network Graphics (PNG) image format.

Saves an image as a bitmap (BMP).

Saves an image using the Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) image format.

Saves an image using the enhanced Windows metafile (EMF) image format.

Saves an image using the Windows metafile (WMF) image format.

Saves an image using the Tag Image File Format (TIFF) image format.

Saves an image as an Swf flash movie.

Saves an image as a Pdf file.

Saves an image as an Svg file.

Saves an image as an Xaml file.

Saves an image as a compressed Svg file.

Specifies alignment of a label.

Label is aligned automatically.

Label is bottom aligned.

Label is center aligned.

Label is top aligned.

Label is below an object such as a column.

Label is above an object such as a column.

Specifies the label type used with labels.

The default label behavior where the Label.Font font is used.

A digital readout font is used. The Label.Font properties such as size and font style are used as well except the font name is ignored.

Specifies the position of the legend box.

The legend box is rendered at the top right side of the graph.

The legend box is rendered at the middle right side of the graph.

The legend box is rendered at the bottom right side of the graph.

The legend box is rendered at the bottom middle side of the graph.

The legend box is now visible.

Legendbox is drawn inside the chart area.

Specifies a header mode for element entries.

No effect.

Forces the LegendEntry to be repeated at the top of each column in multi-column legend boxes.

Causes the LegendEntry to start a new column.

Controls the type of limitation in Limit or SplitByLimit properties.

Keep only top Limit values.

Keep only bottom Limit values.

Remove top Limit values.

Remove Bottom Limit values.

Specifies a predefined loading animation.

No animation.

Segmented Snake animation.

Double snakes animation.

Rotating snake animation.

Segmented circle animation.

Specifies the orientation of an object.

The object is on the left.

The object is on the right.

The object is on top.

The object is on bottom.

The object ( Usually an annotation) on the upper left hand side.

The object ( Usually an annotation) on the upper right hand side.

The object ( Usually an annotation) on the bottom right hand side.

The object ( Usually an annotation) on the bottom left hand side.

No orientation is specified.

Specifies a pre-defined palette.

No Palette

Palette one.

Palette two.

Palette three.

Palette four.

Palette five.

A random palette.

Autumn palette.

Bright palette.

Lavender palette.

Mid tones palette.

Mixed palette.

Pastel palette.

Poppies palette.

Spring palette.

Warm earth palette.

Water meadow palette.

Dark rainbow palette. (Optimized for ShadingEffectMode.Four)

Mid range colors. (Optimized for ShadingEffectMode.Four)

Vivid dark palette. (Optimized for ShadingEffectMode.Four)

Five color palette 1.

Five color palette 2.

Five color palette 3.

Five color palette 4.

Five color palette 5.

Five color palette 6.

Five color palette 7.

Five color palette 8.

Five color palette 9.

Five color palette 10.

Five color palette 11.

Five color palette 12.

Five color palette 13.

Five color palette 14.

Five color palette 15.

Five color palette 16.

Five color palette 17.

Five color palette 18.

Five color palette 19.

Five color palette 20.

Five color palette 21.

Five color palette 22.

Five color palette 23.

Five color palette 24.

Five color palette 25.

Five color palette 26.

Five color palette 27.

Five color palette 28.

Five color palette 29.

Five color palette 30.

Five color palette 31.

Five color palette 32.

Five color palette 33.

Five color palette 34.

Five color palette 35.

Five color palette 36.

Five color palette 37.

Five color palette 38.

Five color palette 39.

Five color palette 40.

Five color palette 41.

Five color palette 42.

Five color palette 43.

Five color palette 44.

Five color palette 45.

Five color palette 46.

Specifies pie label behavior.

Labels must be inside the pie, if they dont fit they will not be visible.

Labels are drawn outside the pie with a line pointing to the slice it represents.

If labels fit inside a slice they are drawn there otherwise they are drawn outside with a line pointing to the slice it represents.

Specifies the navigation options of the navigators preview area.

Enables Cell selection.

Enables selection at any arbitrary position

Enables scroll wheel zooming.

Specifies how tick labels behave on a radar graph.

The labels are not visible.

The labels are drawn horizontally next to the tick mark.

The labels are angled based on the tick mark angle.

The label is on the right side of the tick mark and angled to touch the top of the grid. The label will be within the radar grid.

The label is on the right side of the tick mark and angled to lie on top of the grid. The label will be outside the radar grid.

Specifies the behavior of the x axis on a circular graph such as radar.

The x axis tick marks are connected by straight lines resembling a spider web.

The x axis ticks marks are connected by arcs completing a circle around the chart. Connected data points such as lines will have data points interpolated around the arc.

Indicates the scale of an axis.

The normal scale will always show 0 on the chart.

The axis will start and end shortly outside the range of element values.

Logarithmic axis scale.

Time axis scale.

Similar to Normal but elements are stacked on top of each other.

Elements are stacked and each stack is equal to 100.

Similar to Logarithmic but elements are stacked on top of each other.

Specifies how a scale break is drawn on a chart.

The scale break is not accentuated in any way.

A gap with a zig zag is drawn at the scale break position.

A gap is drawn at the scale break position.

A line is drawn at the scale break position.

Specifies how a series will be shown on the chart.

Draws elements as element markers.

Draws the series as a line.

Draws the series as a spline.

Draws the series as an area line.

Draws the series as a bar.

Draws the series as a cylinder.

See Column.

Draws the series elements as bubbles.

Draws the series as an area spline.

Draws the series as a four point pyramid.

Draws the series as a cone.

Draws the series as a shape, based on the element's ShapeType property.

Draws the series as a segmented bar.

Specifies how a financial series will be shown on the chart.

Draws the series with candle sticks.

Draws the series with bars.

Draws the opening price as a line.

Draws the closing price as a line.

Draws the high price as a line.

Draws the low price as a line.

Draws a range area of highs and lows.

Specifies how a multiple chart type series will be shown on the chart.

Draws the series as a funnel cone.

Draws the series as a funnel pyramid.

Draws the series as a cone.

Draws the series as a pyramid.

Draws the series as a pie.

Draws the series as a gauge.

Draws the series as a stacked bubble.

Draws the series as a donut.

Specifies a shading mode.

No shading is applied.

Shading style One.

Shading style Two.

Shading style Three.

Shading style Four.

Shading style Five.

Shading style Six.

Shading style Seven.

Shading style Eight.

Background Shading style 1. Used for box backgrounds.

Background Shading style 2. Used for box backgrounds.

Specifies how a shape bubble will be drawn.

No shape.

Triangle shape.

Cube shape.

Pentagon shape.

Hexagon shape.

Heptagon shape.

Octagon shape.

Nonagon shape.

Decagon shape.

Five Point Star shape.

Six Point Star shape.

Seven Point Star shape.

Eight Point Star shape.

Arrow up shape.

Arrow down shape.

Arrow left shape.

Arrow right shape.

Refresh shape.

Hear shape.

Ribbon shape.

Zap shape.

Trophy shape.

Chat bubbles shape.

Peace shape.

Thumbs up shape.

Thumbs down shape.

Point left shape.

Point right shape.

Point up shape.

Point down shape.

Hand shape.

Flag shape.

Plane shape.

Drop shape.

Flake shape.

Hourglass shape.

Mouse shape.

Folder shape.

Candle shape.

Quote shape.

Bell shape.

Clover shape.

X shape.

Check shape.

Defines options used to handle Silverlight plugin installation.

Provides Silverlight plugin installation only (default)

Prompts the user to select between the Silverlight plugin installation or displaying a static chart image

Displays a static chart image automatically if the plugin is not already installed, but also displays a warning notification that the chart experience is not as rich as possible and links to the plugin install.

Displays a static chart image if the plugin is not already installed but shows no warning.

Specifies the how a sub value is drawn.

Draws a traditional error bar. The width of the cap line is determined by SubValue.Line.Length. If not specified it is dynamically determined based on the element size.

Draws a marker at the value position of the SubValue. Two markers are drawn then the SubValue represents a range.

Same as the error bar except only the cap lines are drawn.

Specifies an axis scale synchronization mode between two or more axes.

Synchronizes axes to match the axis origins. The origin is the position on a numeric axis where the value is zero (0). This mode does not apply to time axes.

Synchronizes the complete axis scale (high, and low).

Synchronizes the high range values of multiple axes.

Synchronizes the low range values of multiple axes.

Specifies how tick labels are laid out.

Specifies that the best mode is automatically determined.

Specifies that labels are angled. Only applies to x axes.

Specifies that labels are drawn horizontally on a single line. If labels will overlap with this setting, they will automatically switch to angled.

Specifies that labels are drawn wrapping horizontally. If labels will overlap with this setting, they will automatically switch to angled.

Specifies a time interval.

Specifies minutes.

Specifies hours.

Specifies days.

Specifies weeks.

Specifies months.

Specifies quarters (3 months).

Specifies years.

Specifies hour by minute.

Specifies day by hour.

Specifies week by day.

Specifies month by day.

Specifies year by quarter (3 months).

Specifies year by months.

Specifies no time interval.

Specifies seconds.

Specified one millisecond.

Specifies second.

Specifies minute by seconds.

Specifies the single value time label automation mode.

This feature automates choosing different format strings and axis ticks for particular instances in time. These time instance attributes can be modified through the Axis.TimeLabelAutomationMode property. (Tutorial) See: Getting Started / General Tutorials / Axis Tutorials / Axis Ticks / Axis Time Label Automation

Specifies no time label automation. Only the Axis.DefaultTick and Axis.FormatString will be used.

Specifies hidden time label mode. Single value time labels will not be shown.

Specifies time instance specific label automation mode. Axis ticks will use a format string and axis tick relevant to the instance in time they represent.

Specifies smart time label automation. Similar to specific except the first tick will indicate the instance in time and take it's default value from the axis default tick.

Specifies the range value time label automation mode.

Range time ticks will not be generated unless the time intervals are specified in TimeScaleLabelInfo.RangeIntervals.

Range time ticks are generated based on dynamically determined intervals. If time intervals are specified in TimeScaleLabelInfo.RangeIntervals this mode will behave like Default mode.

Specifies the title box position.

Title box not drawn.

Title box is left aligned.

Title box is centered.

Title box is right aligned.

Title box is stretched across the graph area ( Text is centered ).

Title box is stretched across the graph area ( Text is left aligned, legend right aligned ).

Specifies how to trim characters from a string that exceeds a maximum number of characters.

The end of a string is removed until the specified number of characters remains. (ABCD..)

The start and end of a string is removed until the specified number of characters remains. (..EFGH..)

The start of a string is removed until the specified number of characters remains. (..IJKL)

The middle of a string is removed until the specified number of characters remains (ABCD..IJKL)

No trimming is performed.

Defines a string find and replace pair used by Axis objects to manipulate tick labels.

The key must match the whole label string not just a part of it.

Initialize a new case insensitive instance of the LabelOverride class.

String to override. String to override the key with.

Initialize a new instance of the LabelOverride class.

String to override. String to override the key with. Specifies whether the key is case sensitive.

Specifies whether the key is case sensitive.

String to override.

String to override the key with.

Encapsulates a dotnetCHARTING.Box object with a position, data source, and hot spot functionality.

Annotations can either be instantiated for an Element or added to the Chart.Annotation collection. When attached to an element, the annotation will follow the element's position (unless specified) and have a spike indicating which element it's referring to. When an annotation does not have a size or any text specified and it's Background has an image, the size is will become that of the background's image.

Initializes a new instance of the Annotation class.

Initializes a new instance of the Annotation class with a background. Useful when using an image as the annotation.

Background object for the annotation.

Initializes a new instance of the Annotation class with text.

Annotation text.

Initializes a new instance of the Annotation class with text and all the settings of the specified defaultAnnotation.

Annotation text. Annotation whose settings will be inherited.

Initializes a new instance of the Annotation class with text and a tool tip.

Annotation text. Annotation tool tip.

Initializes a new instance of the Annotation class with text, tool tip, and a url.

Annotation text. Annotation tool tip. Annotation url.

Gets or sets the DataSource object used to replace tokens in this annotation's label, tool tip, and URL.

Data sources include Element, Series, and AxisMarker objects. When the source is specified, any tokens associated with the source type may be used.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether a golden rectangle is maintained as the shape of this annotation.

If false, the shape will be determined by the text and will be drawn on a single line unless Size is specified.

Gets or sets the Hotspot of this Annotation.

Gets or sets the annotation's orientation around it's Position and draws a spike to it.

If orientation is set to Bottom or Right, BottomRight will be selected. If orientation is set to Top or Left, TopLeft will be selected. If the annotation is added to the Chart.Annotations collection, the default is BottomRight but no spike is drawn.

Gets or sets this annotation's position.

Gets or sets the annotation's size.

If the size is not specified, it is determined by DynamicSize and the size of the specified text.

Gets or sets the horizontal StringAlignment of text in this in the annotation.

Gets or sets the vertical StringAlignment of text in this in the annotation.

Gets or sets this annotation's tool tip.

Gets or sets this annotation's hotspot url.

Gets or sets the target URL of this annotation's link.

Contains a collection of Annotation objects.

Creates a new instance of AnnotationCollection with the specified list of Annotation objects.

Adds a specified AnnotationCollection to this collection.

The AnnotationCollection to add.

Adds the specified Annotation objects to this collection.

A list of Annotation objects to add.

Determines whether this collection contains a specified Annotation.

true if the specified Annotation belongs to this collection; otherwise, false. The Annotation to find.

Determines the index of a specified Annotation in this collection.

The zero-based index of the specified Annotation. The Annotation to find.

Inserts a Annotation into this collection at a specified index.

The zero-based index into the collection at which to insert the Annotation. The Annotation to insert into this collection.

Removes a specified Annotation from this collection.

The Annotation to remove.

Gets or sets the object at a specified index.

Represents an axis drawn on a ChartArea.

The axis object is a powerful class that does the following. Defines objects used to draw the axis and fill sections of a ChartArea such as grid lines. Facilitates tick label text formatting and numerous manipulation mechanisms. Defines data element layout and order. Defines an axis dotnetCHARTING.Scale, range, and tick frequency. Calculates copies of itself that can perform unit conversions between over one thousand defined units, mark time ranges with a specified TimeInterval, and manipulate each tick label with a specified custom method. Axes can behave in 3 different modes. Mode Description Value Axis The value axis dynamically displays a numeric or DateTime range. Properties such as Scale, Interval, TimeInterval and others that relate to ranges apply to this type of axis. Using ChartType.Combo, the y axis is a value axis, with ChartType.Horizontal the x axis is. Label Axis The label axis does not display a range of values but rather the names of elements or series. Using ChartType.Combo, the x axis is a label axis and with ChartType.Horizontal the y axis is. Using the DataEngine with DataEngine.DateGrouping generates elements with a numeric value in Element.YValue and a DateTime value in Element.XDateTime. Because the Combo chart's x axis is a label axis the date time value cannot be shown. To remedy this, the DataEngine also populates each element's Name property with a string representation of the DateTime value. This allows the x axis to show date values but it does not allow the use of advanced options such as setting the TimeInterval for those dates. To expose this functionality ChartType.Scatter must be used because the x axis for that chart type acts as a value axis. Calculated Axis A calculated or shadow axis is created by using of the Axis.Calculate methods and must be added to the Chart.AxisCollection collection. It is drawn by the original axis and represents the same range but displays it in a different way.

Initializes a new instance of the Axis class.

Initializes a new instance of the Axis class with a name and label.

Sets the name and label of this axis.

Initializes a new instance of the Axis class that will process the tick values of the specified axis based on a custom method.

This instance must be added to Chart.AxisCollection. The specified axis must appear on the chart, otherwise, the new instance will have no effect when added to Chart.AxisCollection. The name and label of this axis. A delegate used to pass a custom method used for processing tick values. The original axis whose tick labels will be processed.

Initializes a new instance of the Axis class that will convert the tick labels of the specified axis to the specified units.

This instance must be added to Chart.AxisCollection. The specified axis must appear on the chart, otherwise, the new instance will have no effect when added to Chart.AxisCollection. The name and label of this axis. Units representing the values of the original axis. Units to convert to. The original axis whose tick labels are converted.

Initializes a new instance of the Axis class with a name, label, and scale enumeration.

Sets the name and label of this axis. Sets the scale of this axis.

Initializes a new instance of the Axis class that will recalculate time intervals of the specified axis.

This instance must be added to Chart.AxisCollection. The specified axis must appear on the chart and use Scale.Time, otherwise, the new instance will have no effect when added to Chart.AxisCollection. The name and label of this axis. A TimeInterval enumaration that specifies the new TimeInterval for this axis. An axis to derived from.

Adds an dotnetCHARTING.AxisTick with a value based on the specified dotnetCHARTING.Calculation.

Adds an dotnetCHARTING.AxisTick with a value based on the specified dotnetCHARTING.Calculation using a template for the resulting label.

The calculation will be based on the specified SeriesCollection. The Value token in the template will be replaced with the resulting value. A template for the resulting tick label. Calculation to perform. SeriesCollection to perform the calculation on.

Adds an dotnetCHARTING.AxisTick with a value based on the specified dotnetCHARTING.Calculation.

The calculation will be based on all the series using this axis. Calculation to perform.

Adds an dotnetCHARTING.AxisTick with a value based on the specified dotnetCHARTING.Calculation.

The calculation will be based on the specified Series. Calculation to perform. Series to perform the calculation on.

Adds an dotnetCHARTING.AxisTick with a value based on the specified dotnetCHARTING.Calculation.

The calculation will be based on the specified SeriesCollection. Calculation to perform. SeriesCollection to perform the calculation on.

Adds an dotnetCHARTING.AxisTick with a value based on the specified dotnetCHARTING.Calculation using a template for the resulting label.

The calculation will be based on all the series using this axis. The Value token in the template will be replaced with the resulting value. A template for the resulting tick label. Calculation to perform.

Adds an dotnetCHARTING.AxisTick with a value based on the specified dotnetCHARTING.Calculation using a template for the resulting label.

The calculation will be based on the specified Series. The Value token in the template will be replaced with the resulting value. A template for the resulting tick label. Calculation to perform. Series to perform the calculation on.

Adds a LabelOverride to the LabelOverrides collection.

The string to look for. The string to replace the key with.

Adds a LabelOverride to the LabelOverrides collection.

The string to look for. The string to replace the key with. A Boolean value indicating whether to ignore case for strings or convert the string to a number for comparison with the key so '0' will match '0.0'

Obtains a copy instance of this Axis and processes it's tick values based on the specified method.

A new calculated instance of this axis which must be added to the Chart.AxisCollection collection. Name of the new axis instance. A ChangeValueDelegate pointing to a function that will process the tick labels of the new axis.

Obtains a copy instance of this Axis and performs unit conversion for it's tick values based on the specified units.

A new calculated instance of this axis. Name of the new axis. Units to convert from. Units to convert to.

Obtains a copy instance of this Axis and performs unit conversion for it's tick values based on the specified units.

A new calculated instance of this axis. Name of the new axis. Unit to convert from. Unit to convert to. If true, the axis ticks will not necessarily match the original ticks. They will have their own appropriate interval and be easier to read in many cases.

Obtains a copy instance of this Axis and recalculates it's tick values based a specified TimeInterval.

A new instance of the calculated axis. Name of the derived axis. A dotnetCHARTING.TimeInterval enumeration that specifies the new time interval for the resulting axis.

Obtains a copy instance of this Axis and recalculates it's tick values based a specified TimeInterval.

A new instance of the calculated axis. Name of the derived axis. A dotnetCHARTING.TimeIntervalAdvanced class that specifies the new time interval for the resulting axis.

Creates a replica axis object that shadows this axis.

Name of the resulting axis.

Creates a replica axis object with a clear values option that shadows this axis.

Name of the resulting axis. Removes the original (automatically generated) axis ticks.

Creates a replica axis object with an orientation and a value clearing option that shadows this axis.

Name of the resulting axis. Removes the original (automatically generated) axis ticks. Orientation of the axis.

Serves as a shortcut to hide this axis.

The axis is cleared by setting the following properties: Axis.ClearValues = true; Axis.TickLine.Length = 0; Axis.Line.Color = Color.Empty; Axis.TickLabelPadding = 0; Axis.Label.Text = "";

Gets the coordinates of this axis after the chart is rendered.

Returns the value of this X axis at the specified x/y coordinates.

An object representing the value of the axis at the given position. A string representing the coordinates of the image. For example: "100,230"

Returns the value of this Y axis at the specified x/y coordinates.

An object representing the value of the axis at the given position. A string representing the coordinates of the image. For example: "100,230"

Gets or sets a Background object used to fill the area between every other grid two grid lines.

To disable this feature, set AlternateGridBackground.Color = Color.Empty.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether axis ticks are centered above tick labels or drawn between each label.

When false, Axis.DefaultTick.Line properties are used for all tick lines.

Gets or sets a value which indicates whether tick labels are cleared before LabelOverrides are applied.

Only the tick labels that are not overridden are cleared.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether columns and cylinders are drawn side by side or front to back.

(Applies to label axes) When true, columns and cylinders are drawn side by side.

Gets or sets the Calculation used when multiple elements on a quantitative x axis are located at the same x position. If the elements are columns they will be combined into a single element using this calculation, otherwise, the original elements are plotted.

Gets or sets the culture name used for number and date formatting in conjunction with FormatString.

The culture name is applied to tick values and data charted on this axis. See the CultureInfo class for possible names of a culture. (This property applies to value axes)

Gets or sets the default dotnetCHARTING.AxisTick used for all generated minor axis ticks.

Gets or sets an AxisTick that acts as a vehicle for property settings that will propagate to all other axis ticks on this axis.

The property settings of this object will not overwrite properties explicitly set for any given AxisTick.

A collection of AxisTick objects added to the axis.

Gets or sets the format string used by this axis.

Tick labels and labels of elements bound to this axis will be formatted with this format string. (This property applies to value axes)

Gets or sets the GaugeLabelMode for axis ticks drawn on this axis when using gauges.

Gets or sets the GaugeNeedleType used with this axis on gauges.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether an AxisTick object is generated for each element's position on this axis.

Gets or sets this axis' grid dotnetCHARTING.Line. This property is the equivalent of using the Axis.DefaultTick.GridLine property.

Grid lines are drawn for each tick mark on an axis to the other side of a ChartArea. To disable grid lines set GridLine.Color = Color.Empty or Axis.ShowGrid = false.

Gets or sets the numeric tick label interval for this axis.

Tick labels will increment by this value starting at Axis.Minimum and ending at Axis.Maximum if specified. If not set, the interval is automatically determined based on the data range. (Applies to quantitative axes with numeric scales)

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the axis scale is inverted.

When true the axis ticks will be reversed.

Gets or sets the axis label.

Gets or sets an ElementMarker object used on gauge charts in place of the axis' label.

The marker will be positioned between the needle base and the center of the gauge axis.

A collection of LabelOverride objects.

LabelOverrides defines a string find and replace pair used to manipulate tick labels.

Gets or sets a value which indicates whether the axis label of this y axis is facing the tick labels or is facing away.

Gets or sets the axis dotnetCHARTING.Line.

When the origin or 'point of zero' is visible on the axis, this line is drawn twice and away from the origin in order for line caps to appear correctly (Line.StartCap, Line.EndCap).

Gets or sets the logarithmic base of logarithmic axis scales. Used only in conjunction with Logarithmic Scales.

This property is used in conjunction with enumeration members Scale.Logarithmic and Scale.LogarithmicStacked.

A collection of AxisMarkers used to highlight sections of this axis.

Gets or sets the upper bounds of this numeric axis' range.

Applies to value axes. When not specified, this value is set relative to the maximum range of the plotted data.

Gets or sets the lower bounds of this numeric axis' range.

Applies to value axes. When not specified, this value defaults to 0. When the range axis scale is used, it will be set relative to the minimum range of the plotted data.

Gets or sets the numeric minimum interval value.

This allows you to prevent the axis scales from using intervals that are smaller than a single unit of your data. For example a chart showing votes where the maximum value is three may show intervals at .5, which cant represent any data for your chart. In this case setting this value to 1 will represent the chart data better.

Gets or sets a numeric value that determines the interval of minor axis ticks.

Gets or sets the number of minor axis ticks generated between major axis ticks.

Gets or sets a TimeIntervalAdvanced object that determines the interval of minor axis ticks.

Gets or sets the name of this axis.

If Axis.Label.Text is not specified this value will be used. The name is also used to identify the axis with element or series tokens.

See NumberPrecision

Gets or sets the number of decimal digits of this axis' format.

If not specified, this value will be determined automatically. (Applies to value axes)

Gets or sets the orientation of this axis.

Gets or sets an angle measured in degrees clockwise from the y-axis specifying the direction a gauge axis is oriented.

When RangeAngle is set, the orientation is the point the middle of the axis is facing. When SweepAngle is set, the orientation is the starting angle of the sweep.

Gets or sets a text label separator used when two axis ticks on a radar's x axis overlap.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether this axis displays percent values.

When true, a percent sign sign will be added to the end of tick labels and the Maximum will snap to 100 percent if the plotted data's range falls between 50 and 100. (Applies to value axes not using Scale.Time)

Gets or sets the axis positions when 2 or more axes are drawn on the same side of a ChartArea.

Lower values will be drawn closer to the front. This will also affect the order of series bound the the axes.

Gets or sets the RadarMode of this axis. Applies when this object is the x axis of a radar chart.

Gets or sets an angle measured in degrees that is centered at the orientation angle.

Example: If the orientation angle is 100 and the range angle is 100, the axis will begin at 50 degrees and end at 150 degrees.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the positions of series bound to this axis are reversed.

(Applies to label axes)

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the positions of series bound to this axis are reversed without reversing legend positions.

Applies to label axes.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the order of stacked elements is reversed.

Applies to value axes using a stacked axis Scale.

Gets or sets the scale of this axis.

Applies to value axes.

Gets or sets a calendar pattern object that specifies the sequence of scale breaks on a time axis.

Gets or sets a Line object that is used to outline scale breaks on this axis.

A collection of ScaleRange objects that represent discontinuations in this axis' scale.

Gets or set a ScaleBreakStyle enumeration member that specifies the scale break style.

Gets or sets the scale's high and low values.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether grid lines are drawn.

If false, no grid lines will be drawn.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether relevant minor axis ticks will be automatically determined based on major intervals.

This property applies to automatic major intervals, not user defined intervals.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether this axis will insert a discontinuity into it's scale if appropriate.

Gets of sets the maximum number of scale breaks used when Axis.SmartScaleBreak = true.

Gets or sets a percentage (0 - 100) which indicates the spacing between columns, cylinders or groups thereof.

(Applies to label axes)

Gets or sets the static bar width in pixels.

A value of 0 = Automatic and spacing will be based on the SpacingPercentage property. (Applies to label axes)

Gets or sets an angle measured in degrees clockwise from the OrientationAngle to the other side of the axis.

Gets a class that contains options to synchronize the scale of this axis with other scales.

Gets or sets the Label of the Axis.DefaultTick.Label object.

When the axis is a label axis, the tick label's text can be populated with tokens which represent information about the plotted data.

Gets or sets the angle of axis tick labels when they are angled. Setting this property will not automatically angle tick labels.

To force tick label angles, set Axis.TickLabelMode = Axis.TickLabelMode.Angled.

Gets or sets the label mode that specifies how tick labels behave.

Gets or sets a value in pixels indicating the padding between axis elements such as the axis label, tick labels, and ticks lines.

Gets or sets the a tick label separator. The separator is automatically used when labels are wrapped. To disable or enable, set the this line's color to Color.Transparent or a valid color respectively.

Gets or sets the tick dotnetCHARTING.Line for all ticks marks. Same as using DefaultTick.Line

Setting TickLine.Length will specify the tick line's length.

Gets or sets the maximum number of tick marks for numeric axis scales.

. Three (3) is lowest number of tick marks possible. (Applies to value axes with numeric scales)

Gets or sets the time interval between tick labels when using the time scale.

(Applies to quantitative axes using Scale.Time)

Gets or sets a class that represents advanced time interval settings to supplement the TimeInterval property.

This property can be used in conjunction with TimeInterval or override it completley.

Gets or sets the time padding of this axis.

(Applies to value axes using Scale.Time)

Gets the TimeLabelAutomationInfo class that encapsulates axis ticks, format strings, and options of the Time Label Automation features used to represent particular instances in time.

Gets a ViewPort object that defines the visible scale range or zoom range when using AJAX scrolling. Setting the properties of this class allows zooming the chart programatically.

Gets or sets the grid dotnetCHARTING.Line at the origin or 'point of zero' on this axis.

Applies to value axes with numeric scales except Scale.Logarithmic

Gets or sets an AxisTick that replaces automatically generated axis tick with a value of zero (0).

This tick can be disabled by setting it to null or it can be overridden by adding a new AxisTick with a value of zero to the ExtraTicks collection. In order to disable the zero tick, set it to null: Axis.ZeroTick = null

An extension to the Axis.SynchronizeScale property. Defines the scale synchronization behavior of an axis.

Gets or sets the SynchronizeScaleMode of this scale sync class.

Gets or sets a value that determines whether the axis scale will change when re-drawn on another ChartArea.

Encapsulates time scale label behavior options in addition to axis ticks and format strings used instead of the main axis ticks when they represent particular instances in time.

Creates an instance of the componentname object.

Gets or sets the format string used with DateTime values that represent the instance in time wher(Shortcut to: Element.Hotspot.URL)e the day changes.

Gets or sets the AxisTick used to represent the instance in time where the day changes.

Gets or sets the format string used with DateTime values that represent the instance in time where the hour changes.

Gets or sets the AxisTick used to represent the instance in time where the hour changes.

Gets of sets the maximum number or rows automatically generated range ticks will span.

Gets or sets the format string used with DateTime values that represent the instance in time where the millisecond changes.

Gets or sets the axis tick used to represent the instance in time where the millisecond changes.

Gets or sets the format string used with DateTimevalues that represent the instance in time where the minute changes.

Gets or sets the AxisTick used to represent the instance in time where the minute changes.

Gets or sets the time label automation mode for single value labels.

Gets or sets the format string used with DateTime values that represent the instance in time where the Month changes.

Gets or sets the AxisTick used to represent the instance in time where the Month changes.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether auto-generated range ticks are trimmed if more than the specified percentage of the label lingers outside of the axis bounds.

Gets or sets the format string used with DateTime labels of quarter range ticks.

Gets or sets the AxisTick used to represent a year's quarter range ticks.

Gets or sets an TimeIntervalCollection used with modes Range and AddRange. When no intervals are specified the intervals will be determined dynamically.

Gets or sets the time label automation mode for range value labels.

Gets or sets the format string used with DateTime values that represent the instance in time where the second changes.

Gets or sets the AxisTick used to represent the instance in time where the second changes.

Gets or sets the format string used with DateTime labels of week range ticks.

Gets or sets the AxisTick used to represent a week range ticks.

Gets or sets the format string used with DateTime values that represent the instance in time where the year changes.

Gets or sets the AxisTick used to represent the instance in time where the Year changes.

Contains a collection of Axis objects.

Creates a new instance of AxisCollection with the specified list of Axis objects.

Adds a specified AxisCollection to this collection.

The AxisCollection to add.

Adds the specified AxisMarker objects to this collection.

A list of AxisMarker objects to add.

Determines whether this collection contains a specified Axis.

true if the specified Axis belongs to this collection; otherwise, false. The Axis to find.

Determines the index of a specified Axis in this collection.

The zero-based index of the specified Axis. The Axis to find.

Inserts a Axis into this collection at a specified index.

The zero-based index into the collection at which to insert the Axis. The Axis to insert into this collection.

Removes a specified Axis from this collection.

The Axis to remove.

Gets or sets the object at a specified index.

Defines styles and positions used to mark a specified section or point on an axis.

Each marker displayed on the chart will also have a LegendEntry in the LegendBox. There are two ways to use AxisMarkers. Attach to axis An AxisMarker can be added to the Markers collection of any axis. In this case, a numeric, time, or text: value or range must be specified. When Value is specified, ValueLow and ValueHigh are both set to this value. When ValueLow and ValueHigh are equivalent, this AxisMarker is represented by the Line object, otherwise, Background fills the range between ValueLow and ValueHigh. Attach to element An AxisMarker is instantiated and passed to the AxisMarker property of any element. In such a case, the axis marker is drawn on the Axis where the element's name is displayed. See sample 'AxisMarkerAdvanced.aspx' in the download.

Initialize a new instance of the AxisMarker class.

Initialize a new instance of the AxisMarker class with a label and Background.

The Label drawn on the marker. The label trickles down to this AxisMarker object's LegendEntry.Name property unless one explicitly specified. dotnetCHARTING.Background which fills the an area of the chart within a specified range.

Initialize a new instance of the AxisMarker class with a label, Background object, and calendar pattern.

The Label drawn on the marker. The label trickles down to this AxisMarker object's LegendEntry.Name property unless one explicitly specified. Background which fills the an area of the chart within the specified range. CalendarPattern of this axis marker.

Initialize a new instance of the AxisMarker class with a label, Background object, and axis range.

Initialize a new instance of the AxisMarker class with a label, colort, and axis range.

The Label drawn on the marker. The label trickles down to this AxisMarker object's LegendEntry.Name property unless one explicitly specified. The color that fills the an area of the chart within the specified range. CalendarPattern of this axis marker.

Initialize a new instance of the AxisMarker class with a label, Background object, and a numeric or time value representing a point on an axis..

The Label drawn on the marker. The label trickles down to this AxisMarker object's LegendEntry.Name property unless one explicitly specified. The color used to draw line at the specified position. Numeric, DateTime, or Text value representing a point on an axis.

Initialize a new instance of the AxisMarker class with a label, colort, and axis range.

Initialize a new instance of the AxisMarker class with a label, Background object, and a numeric or time value representing a point on an axis..

The Label drawn on the marker. The label trickles down to this AxisMarker object's LegendEntry.Name property unless one explicitly specified. Line to draw at the specified position. Numeric, DateTime, or Text value representing a point on an axis.

Gets or sets a dotnetCHARTING.Background object used to fill this AxisMarker object's range on a ChartArea.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the AxisMarker is drawn in front of the chart data while in 2D mode.

Gets or set a CalendarPattern used by this axis marker instead of the range values.

Gets or sets a Label object drawn next to the AxisMarker on a ChartArea.

Gets or sets a dotnetCHARTING.LegendEntry that represents this AxisMarker in a LegendBox.

Gets or sets a dotnetCHARTING.Line object drawn on a ChartArea.

This line is used when ValueHigh and ValueLow are equal or if Value is set.

Gets or sets an AxisTick object that will represent this AxisMarker on the axis where it resides.

By default this tick is null and must be instantiated. If the axis marker is a range, the axis tick will also be a range AxisTick. If a dotnetCHARTING.CalendarPattern is used, the tick cannot be used.

Gets or sets the numeric, DateTime, or text value of this AxisMarker.

When Value is specified, ValueLow and ValueHigh are both set to this value. When ValueLow and ValueHigh are equivalent, this AxisMarker is represented by the Line object, otherwise, Background fills the range between ValueLow and ValueHigh.

Gets or sets the upper bounds of a numeric, DateTime, or text range.

When ValueLow and ValueHigh are equivalent, this AxisMarker is represented by the Line object, otherwise, Background fills the range between ValueLow and ValueHigh.

Gets or sets the lower bounds of a numeric, DateTime, or text range.

When ValueLow and ValueHigh are equivalent, this AxisMarker is represented by the Line object, otherwise, Background fills the range between ValueLow and ValueHigh.

Contains a collection of AxisMarker objects.

Creates a new instance of AxisMarkerCollection with the specified list of AxisMarker objects.

Adds a specified AxisMarkerCollection to this collection.

The AxisMarkerCollection to add.

Adds the specified AxisMarker objects to this collection.

A list of AxisMarker objects to add.

Determines whether this collection contains a specified AxisMarker.

true if the specified AxisMarker belongs to this collection; otherwise, false. The AxisMarker to find.

Determines the index of a specified AxisMarker in this collection.

The zero-based index of the specified AxisMarker. The AxisMarker to find.

Inserts a AxisMarker into this collection at a specified index.

The zero-based index into the collection at which to insert the AxisMarker. The AxisMarker to insert into this collection.

Removes a specified AxisMarker from this collection.

The AxisMarker to remove.

Gets or sets the object at a specified index.

Encapsulates an axis tick that includes Label or ElementMarker, TickLine, and GridLine styling objects.

Appearance AxisTick objects can appear in three different ways. Normal axis tick with a label. AxisTick where the label is replaced with the AxisTick.Marker object (Icon or Image). Range AxisTick in which case the tick has a low and high value. Uses AxisTick objects can also be used in different ways. As an additional axis tick. To override a tick on an axis. To override multiple ticks on an axis.

Initializes a new instance of the AxisTick class.

Initializes a new instance of the AxisTick class with an arbitrary numeric or DateTime value.

Axis tick value. The label will automatically represent the value given.(Number or DateTime)

Initializes a new instance of the AxisTick class with an arbitrary numeric or DateTime value and an element marker.

Axis tick value.(Number or DateTime) Element Marker

Initializes a new instance of the AxisTick class with an arbitrary numeric or DateTime range.

Low value. (Number or DateTime) High value. (Number or DateTime)

Initializes a new instance of the AxisTick class with an arbitrary numeric or DateTime range and an option to make this axis tick override ticks within it's range instead of appearing on the axis.

Low value.(Number or DateTime) High value.(Number or DateTime) When true, the axis tick will override ticks within it's range, otherwise, it will be a range tick.

Initializes a new instance of the AxisTick class with an arbitrary numeric or DateTime range and label.

Low value.(Number or DateTime) High value.(Number or DateTime) Label text.

Initializes a new instance of the AxisTick class with an arbitrary numeric or DateTime value and a text label.

Axis tick value.(Number or DateTime) Label text.

Initializes a new instance of the AxisTick class with text of an original label and new text to override that label with.

Case insensitive. Label text of the axis tick to replace. New label text.

Releases all resources used by this AxisTick.

Sets the colors of this AxisTick's Label, Line, and GridLine.

Color to use.

Gets or sets the properties of the Line drawn on the ChartArea at this AxisTick object's position.

Gets or sets the Label of this AxisTick.

Gets or sets the tick line of this AxisTick. The property Line.Length will control the length of this tick.

Gets or sets an ElementMarker object used instead of the label text.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether this range AxisTick is drawn on an axis or if it's properties are used to override those of other AxisTicks within it's range.

Contains a collection of AxisTick objects.

Creates a new instance of AxisTickCollection with the specified list of AxisTick objects.

Adds the specified AxisTick object to this collection.

Adds a specified AxisTickCollection to this collection.

The AxisTickCollection to add.

Adds the specified AxisTick objects to this collection.

A list of AxisTick objects to add.

Determines whether this collection contains a specified AxisTick.

true if the specified AxisTick belongs to this collection; otherwise, false. The AxisTick to find.

Creates a collection of axis ticks with the specified values.

List of double values.

Creates a collection of axis ticks with the specified values.

List of DateTime values.

Determines the index of a specified AxisTick in this collection.

The zero-based index of the specified AxisTick. The AxisTick to find.

Inserts a AxisTick into this collection at a specified index.

The zero-based index into the collection at which to insert the AxisTick. The AxisTick to insert into this collection.

Removes a specified AxisTick from this collection.

The AxisTick to remove.

Gets or sets the object at a specified index.

Defines styling properties used to fill the interior of polygons and chart elements such as legend boxes, annotations and other shapes.

Initializes a new instance of the Background class.

Initializes a new instance of the Background object with a Brush.

Brush object used to to fill the background.

Initializes a new instance of the Background object with a color.

Color to fill with.

Initializes a new instance of the Background object with gradient colors drawn left to right.

First color. Second color

Initializes a new instance of the Background object with gradient colors drawn at a specified angle.

First color. Second color Specifies an angle ( left to right = 0, right to left = 180 )

Initializes a new instance of the Background object with a tiled image.

Path of an image.

Initializes a new instance of the Background object with an image and a background mode.

The Path of a background image. Specifies a BackgroundMode to use with the image.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether this background will use a bevel shading effect.

Gets or sets a brush object that is used to fill objects.

Gets or sets the primary Color.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether a glass effect is used to fill an object.

Gets or sets an angle at which gradients are drawn.( left to right = 0, right to left = 180 )

Gets or sets a color hatch patterns are drawn with.

Gets or sets a hatch pattern.

If not specified, no hatch will is drawn.

Gets or sets the path of a fill image.

An image fill is used when BackgroundMode.ImageTile, BackgroundMode.ImageStretch or BackgroundMode.Image is used.

Gets or sets the fill mode.

Gets or sets the secondary color.

The secondary color is used with the primary color to create a gradient fill when using BackgroundMode.Gradient.

Gets or sets a ShadingEffectMode enumeration member that indicates a shading effect to use when filling a surface.

Gets or sets a value from 0 to 100 that indicates the background transparency.

A value of 0 will have no transparency and 100 will be completely transparent.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether this background is visible.

Defines a base class for derived objects such as TitleBox, LegendBox, and Annotation.

The box object provides the following Defines objects used to fill the interior, shadow, and outline the box. Defines rectangle edge styles. Defines the position, title box icon, LegendBox layout template, and interior label.

Initializes a new instance of the Box class.

Serves as a shortcut to make this box invisible.

The following properties are set when invoked: Background.Color = Color.Empty Background.Bevel = false Line.Color = Color.Empty Shadow.Color = Color.Empty InteriorLine.Color = Color.Empty

Gets the coordinates of this box after the chart is rendered.

Gets a Rectangle object indicating this boxes position and size after the chart is rendered.

Gets or sets a background object used to fill the interior of this box.

Gets or sets the bottom left corner style.

Gets or sets the bottom right corner style.

Gets or sets a value that indicates the corner size in pixels. This size is used with BoxCorner settings. This setting is limited to 0-8 pixels. This property can also affect box header alignment behavior. Values larger than 8 will be used by headers.

For a legendbox, this setting is limited to 0-8 pixels, unless the legendbox padding is high enough to accomodate the corner size. For TitleBox and Annotation, a corner size higher than 8 may cause the box padding to increase so that the text on it is not cut off by the corners.

Gets or sets the top left corner style.

Gets or sets the top right corner style.

Gets or sets the default box corner style.

Explicitly set corners will not be overridden.

Gets or sets a BoxHeaderOptions object describing this boxes header options and content.

Gets or sets a Background object that is used to fill the background of this boxes header.

Gets or sets a Label object that is placed in a header above this box object. A header will not be shown if the label does not contain any text.

Gets or sets the icon path of this title box.

Only the title box supports this feature.

Gets or sets the interior line of this legend box.

Multiple column legend boxes draw this line to separate columns.

Gets or sets the Label of this box.

When the box text is not determined by this label, it's font and color properties will be used for any text that appears in the box. When used as a TitleBox and the position is set to FullWithLegend, the font properties of ChartArea.LegendBox.Label will be used for the legend entries and the Chart.TitleBox.Label properties and text will be used for the title.

Gets or sets the exterior line of this box.

Gets or sets this object's orientation around a ChartArea.

Gets or sets a value in pixels that represents the padding between objects within the box and the box walls.

Legend boxes also use this property to set the padding between entries.

Gets or sets the position of this box. When using with Series.Box.Position, this property can take a Size or Rectangle object.

Gets or sets the Shadow cast under this box.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether this box is visible.

Represents a box header with options that control its layout, styling, and contents.

Creates an instance of the componentname object.

Gets or sets a Background object that is used to fill the background of this header.

Gets or sets an EdgeAlignment value that controls the alignment of the header's right side in relation to the parent box and the header label.

Gets or sets a BoxCapStyle describing this headers right cap style.

Gets or sets a Label object that is drawn in this header. A header will not be shown if the label does not contain any text.

Gets or sets a Line object used to draw the outline of this header.

Gets or sets a Point object representing the offset of this box header in pixels.

Gets or sets the Shadow cast under this header.

Gets or sets an EdgeAlignment value that controls the alignment of the header's left side in relation to the parent box and the header label.

Gets or sets a BoxCapStyle describing this headers left cap style.

Gets or sets an EdgeAlignment value that controls the vertical alignment of the header in relation to the parent box.

Specifies a calendar pattern such as weekends in a week.

The pattern is represented by an array of boolean values. CalendarPattern.PatternFromString can be used to quickly create patterns using simple strings. A week pattern would look like this: "0000000". A zero for each day of the week. To indicate weekends the pattern will be "1000001". The time units must also be specified. Each one or zero represents a day: myCalendarPattern.PatternUnit = TimeInterval.Day The entire pattern represents a week: myCalendarPattern.CalendarUnit = TimeInterval.Week The above calendar pattern will flag each saturday and sunday in a given, time span.

Initializes a new instance of the CalendarPattern class.

Initializes a new instance of the CalendarPattern class with time units and a pattern.

Initializes a new instance of the CalendarPattern class with time units and a string pattern.

Inverts this CalendarPattern.

If the pattern is "0011", after this operation it will become "1100".

Gets a boolean array from a string of ones (1) and zeros (0).

bool[] A pattern in a string form. A string of "1100" will return [ true, true, false, false ]. The boolean array can be used to set the Pattern property of this CalendPattern.

Gets or sets a values by which the time interval is offset on the axis.

This property can be useful with axis markers because tick marks may appear at the beginning of a time unit like month. The calendar pattern may need to be adjusted to properly correspond to axis ticks.

Gets or sets a TimeInterval that represents the time unit of the entire Pattern.

Gets or sets the calendar pattern.

Gets or sets a TimeInterval that represents the time unit of each Boolean value in the Pattern.

Gets a calendar pattern instance representing weekdays.

Gets a calendar pattern instance representing weekends.

The .netCHARTING control.

Initializes a new empty instance of the Chart control.

Obtains a Bitmap of the generated chart.

When invoked, the Point properties of all elements drawn on the chart will be populated. A Bitmap of the chart.

Returns the metafile contains records that describe a sequence of graphics operations that can be recorded (constructed) and played back (displayed).

A Metafile of the chart image.

Returns the memory stream of the image.

A MemoryStream of the chart image.

Obtains a Bitmap of the legend generated by the chart.

When invoked, the Point properties of all elements drawn on the chart will be populated. A Bitmap of the legend.

Returns the metafile contains records that describe a sequence of graphics operations that can be recorded (constructed) and played back (displayed).

A Metafile of the legend box image.

Imports a chart object from the specified xml file.

A chart object. This property takes either a raw xml string or an xml file name. For an xml file name it takes either an absolute path 'c:/inetpub/wwwroot/app/chart.xml', a physical UNC path ('\\myUncPath\cahrt.xml'), a relative path ('temp/chart.xml',) or when started with '/' a relative path from c:/inetpub/wwwroot/ ('/app/chart.xml), or only a file name 'chart.xml' in the temp directory. A raw xml string or an xml file name to load.

Imports a chart object from the specified xml file.

Set the chart object from the specified xml file.

This first parameter takes either a raw xml string or an xml file name. For an xml file name it takes either an absolute path 'c:/inetpub/wwwroot/app/chart.xml', a physical UNC path ('\\myUncPath\cahrt.xml'), a relative path ('temp/chart.xml',) or when started with '/' a relative path from c:/inetpub/wwwroot/ ('/app/chart.xml), or only a file name 'chart.xml' in the temp directory. A raw xml string or an xml file name to load. The chart object that be loaded with XML data.

Set the chart object from the specified xml file.

This first parameter takes either a raw xml string or an xml file name. For an xml file name it takes either an absolute path 'c:/inetpub/wwwroot/app/chart.xml', a physical UNC path ('\\myUncPath\cahrt.xml'), a relative path ('temp/chart.xml',) or when started with '/' a relative path from c:/inetpub/wwwroot/ ('/app/chart.xml), or only a file name 'chart.xml' in the temp directory. Path of XML file or XML data to load. The chart object that be loaded with XML data. Determine whether clear the chart object before loading the data.

Adds the colors of a predefined palette to the existing palette colors stored in Palette.

Outputs chart server control content to a provided HtmlTextWriter object.

string LoadState() void LoadState(string xmlFilePath,Chart chartObject) string LoadState(Chart chartObject) string LoadState() void LoadState(string xmlFilePath) string LoadState(Chart chartObject) string LoadState(string xmlFilePathOrData) void LoadState(string xmlFilePathOrData,Chart chartObject) string LoadState(Chart chartObject) string LoadState() string LoadState(string xmlFilePath) void LoadState(string xmlFilePath,Chart chartObject)

Saves this chart instance to an xml file.

This first parameter takes either an absolute path 'c:/inetpub/wwwroot/app/chart.xml', a physical UNC path ('\\myUncPath\cahrt.xml'), a relative path ('temp/chart.xml',) or when started with '/' a relative path from c:/inetpub/wwwroot/ ('/app/chart.xml), or only a file name 'chart.xml' in the temp directory. Path of XML file.

Saves the chart instance to an xml file.

Saves this chart instance to an xml string.

The xml string which represent the current chart object.

Saves the chart instance to an xml string.

The xml string which represent the chart object. The chart object is being serialized.

Gets or sets text displayed in place of a chart when images can't be viewed. This property can also be used as a tooltip for the chart in browsers that support this feature.

A collection of Annotation objects drawn on the chart.

sets the license key.

Gets or sets a value which indicates whether elements and series are automatically named when no names are provided.

Contains a collection of calculated Axis objects.

Axes added to this collection must be calculated from axes on the chart, otherwise they are ignored.

Gets or sets the Background of this chart.

Gets or sets an Annotation object that is drawn as the background for this chart.

When using this annotation with a header label, it may be useful to make the chart top margin larger: Chart.MarginTop = 20

Gets or sets a boolean value to control bubble center stack.

Gets or sets a boolean value to control bubble stack shade.

Gets or sets the number of minutes an image is cached and displayed on a page before a new one is generated.

When set, a given chart image will be generated on the first hit and on all subsequent hits within the cache duration period the same image will be returned with no rendering work by the chart control.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the values of empty elements are percieved as 0 or omitted in calculations performed with the Chart.SeriesCollection.Add(Calculation calc) shortcut.

If this property is set to false, in all calculations (average,min,median,mode etc.) only the applicable elements are counted. If set to true, such elements are given 0 values and included in the calculation. This case occurs when you have multiple series and are calculating derived series from them. Defaults to true.

Gets or sets the main ChartArea of the image.

Gets or sets chart area layout options.

Gets or sets a value in pixels that defines the spacing between boxes like chart areas and legends.

Gets or sets the minimum number of minutes images are stored in the TempDirectory before they are deleted.

When .netCHARTING renders a chart a temporary file is created in the directory set by the TempDirectory property. The CleanupMinimumAge ensures that only files older than this age, in minutes, will be deleted.

Gets or sets the number of minutes images are stored in the TempDirectory folder before they are deleted.

When .netCHARTING renders a chart a temporary file is created in the directory set by the TempDirectory property. The CleanUpPeriod property determines how frequently (in minutes) this directory is cleaned by deleting old temporary files. The default is 15 minutes and the property can be set to 0 in order to disable the cleanup in which case temp files are not automatically deleted. Any files that start with 'dnc-' will be deleted in the temp directory.

Gets or sets a value which determines if gauges should be clipped (cut) to display only the active area.

See Debug

When data is corrected for example the selected axis.scale is not appropriate for the data included in the chart this property will be populated with a descriptive message.

Gets or sets the culture name used when StartDate and EndDate insert to the sql statement. This property only necessary to set if the web server and database server having different culture setting.

See the CultureInfo class for possible names of a culture.

Gets or sets the control object or ID of a datagrid control that will be populated with the charted data.

This property accepts a control ID for a datagrid. If set, the data represented in the chart is populated in the datagrid of the same name. You must also define a datagrid control with an appropriately named ID within the same script. This property is useful when displaying tabular chart data along with your charts.

Adds element's custom attributes to the DataGrid control specified by the DataGrid property.

For complete code see DataGridCustomAttributes.aspx or GridviewCustomAttributes.aspx sample

Gets or sets the format string which determines number formatting in the datagrid.

See 'Formatting Types' in your msdn documentation for a complete list of options. Some shortcuts are also provided for specific settings including "C" for "currency" , "E" for "scientific" , "F" for "fixed" , "G" for "general" and "N,2" for normal and the number after the comma determines the number of decimal places.

Gets or sets the header label of the DataGrid control specified by the DataGrid property.

This property controls the header label used for the datagrid series name column. If set to "none" the series name column will be removed. If set to "XAxisLabel", xAxis label set as the header label of the datagrid.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the data with which the specified DataGrid control is populated will be transposed.

Gets or sets a TimeInterval enumeration which determines how the values of a given series are aggregated by date when retrieved from a database.

Gets or sets an enum which determines how values are grouped to create a single element value.

When dategrouping is used, if an element has more than one value, a Calculation is performed on those values.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether to maintain the sort order of the data as it is provided.

When dategrouping is used and StartDate or EndDate is not set, the data is sorted by the xAxis field by default. Setting this property to true will maintain the sort order of the data as it is provided.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether debug messages are displayed below the chart.

This property controls if error text is returned below the generated image if a problem occurs. This is typically used for debug purposes when initially developing charts. This is provided as a property so that your end users are not exposed to developer level errors. This property defaults to false

Gets or sets an Axis object whose properties will trickle down to all other axes on the chart unless otherwise specified.

Gets a base box object that is used as a vehicle for property settings which will become the defaults settings of all elements on the chart that derive from box.

Gets a dotnetCHARTING.ChartArea object whose property settings will propagate to all other dotnetCHARTING.ChartArea objects on the chart image.

Gets or sets the default culture name which determines number and date formatting.

Equivalent to Chart.DefaultAxis.CultureName. See the CultureInfo class for possible names of a culture.

Gets or sets an Element object whose properties will trickle to all other elements on the chart unless otherwise specified. This is a shortcut to the DefaultSeries.DefaultElement property.

Gets or sets the default format string which determines number and date formatting. See Chart.DefaultAxis.FormatString.

Equivalent to Chart.DefaultAxis.FormatString. See 'Formatting Types' in your msdn documentation for a complete list of options. Some shortcuts are also provided for specific settings including "C" or "currency" , "E" or "scientific" , "F" or "fixed" , "G" or "general" and "N,2" for normal and the number after the comma determines the number of decimal places.

Gets a dotnetCHARTING.LegendBox object whose property settings will propagate to all other dotnetCHARTING.LegendBox objects on the chart image.

Gets or sets a Series object whose properties will trickle to all other series on the chart unless otherwise specified.

Gets or sets a shadow object whose properties will trickle to all other objects with shadows.

Gets a dotnetCHARTING.Box object whose property settings will propagate to all title boxes on the chart image.

Gets or sets depth of the chart when Use3D is true.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether disable browser cache.

Gets or sets a percentage value which determines the relative thickness of the donut ring when ChartType.Donut is used.

Gets or sets the resolution, in dots per inch, of the chart Bitmap.

Gets or sets the drill down chain which activates automatic time based drill down if date grouping used. If Limit or SplitByLimit used with ShowOther option, setting drill down chain to "Other" or "OtherAll" activates automatic drill down to other elements or series. "OtherAll" shows all other elements or series in the second level. "Other" shows the next number of elements or series has been set in limit or splitByLimit propertes.

When using automated drill down with DateGrouping, this property controls the drill down chain, or hierarchy, that is followed. In addition you can override names to be displayed for the different drill down levels.

When using automated drill down in conjunction with date grouping and multiple series, this property determines if drill down will occur into a single series or multiple series.

Gets or sets the default text of empty element labels. See Chart.DefaultSeries.DefaultElement.SmartLabel

See Debug.

Gets or sets the relative percentage an exploded slice should be pulled out from the pie or donut.

Gets a collection of additional dotnetCHARTING.ChartArea objects added to the chart.

Gets a collection of additional dotnetCHARTING.LegendBox objects added to the chart.

Gets a collection of additional LegendEntry objects added to the legend.

This collection allows you to add any number of custom legend entries to the legend of your chart.

Gets or sets the chart's instance of the FileManager which facilitates saving images.

See Chart.FileManager.FileName.

Gets or sets Jpg file quality. (Worse quality) 0 - 100 (Best quality)

Gets or sets a numeric value between 0 and 100 that indicates the percentage of the full funnel height that comprises the funnel's nozzle.

Gets or sets a numeric value between 0 and 100 that indicates the percentage of the full funnel width that comprises the funnel's nozzle.

Gets or sets a numeric value between 0 and 100 that indicates the percentage of the funnel's spacing.

Gets or sets the hatch style drawn on columns and cylinders when an element's Complete value is set.

Typically used with Gantt charts to indicate what percentage of a task has been completed.

Gets or sets a hatch style palette that will trickle to all series on the chart. The hatch patterns will not show on chart elements if a hatch color is not specified. The default hatch color can be specified with the Chart.DefaultSeries.DefaultElement.HatchColor property.

For a complete list of hatch styles see HatchStyle enumeration.

Gets or sets a predefined HatchStylePalette that defines element and series hatch style.

Gets or sets the height of the chart image.

Gets or sets the dotnetCHARTING.Hotspot property of the chart image.

Gets or sets a value that indicates the minimum size in pixels a hotspot must be in order for it to be generated.

Gets or sets an ImageFormat enumeration specifying the generated image's file type.

Returns a string for the image map name generated for the current chart image.

Returns a string for the image map generated for the current chart image.

Gets or sets the label that fills the chart image when used.

Gets or sets a LegendBox object that represents the legend box.

Notes - To hide the legend box use Chart.LegendBox.Position = LegendBoxPosition.None. - When Chart.TitleBox.Position = TitleBoxPosition.FullWithLegend is set the legend box will disappear.

In a multiple series chart, this property controls the primary series used for the Limit operation. Other series' elements will be matched with the primary series elements and that order will be maintained regardless of the values of the other series. For example, if you limit to the top 5 values and set the LimitPrimarySeries to the sales series other series such as dollar amount or quantity would not affect which elements were ultimately selected for the chart.

This property is used only when using a map chart: (Chart.Type = ChartType.Map).

Gets or sets a string which automatically sets multiple margins as a shortcut.

Controls the margins or amount of space in pixels that will be left around the charting elements including the Legend and title box. This property can be used in conjunction with the Chart.Background property to easily implement attractive custom borders or just pad the chart as you please. The property accepts margins "Left, Top, Right, Bottom" in pixels. Negative values are allowed.

Gets or sets the bottom margin of the chart image.

Negative values are allowed.

Gets or sets the left margin of the chart image.

Negative values are allowed.

Gets or sets the right margin of the chart image.

Negative values are allowed.

Gets or sets the top margin of the chart image.

Negative values are allowed.

Gets or sets a value which controls the maximum size of bubbles when ChartType.Bubble is used.

When not set, the maximum size is determined dynamically.

Gets or sets the maximum value the bubble size will be based on where a bubble size value of MaximumBubbleSizeValue equals a bubble of size MaximumBubbleSize.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the mentor is shown under the chart control. The mentor also requires that Chart.Debug is set to true.

Provides SliverLight functionality.

Gets or sets a label shown on the chart when no data is available.

See NoDataLabel.

Gets or sets an object that will be drawn instead of the chart and will dynamically resize the chart image to fit the object's size. The supported objects are Label and Annotation.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the 'unlicensed chart' footer overlaps the chart or moves it up.

If set to false, the rendered chart will exactly match that of a production licensed chart (which does not have the footer or branding in the top right). If set to true, the chart will be resized slightly so that the footer does not overlap the chart. In all cases the final rendered image will be exactly what you set for Chart.Size or Chart.Height and Chart.Width.

Gets or sets an array of colors that define element and series colors.

Gets or sets a predefined Palette that defines element and series colors.

See DefaultSeries.DefaultElement.SmartLabel.PieLabelMode.

When using date grouping the main value in the element is derived from the actual values in the database or data provided to .netCHARTING. This property controls whether these subvalues used in the calculation to determine the element value are added to SubValues or not. By default, such values are not added to the element subvalues.

Gets or sets a ChartArea object which represents the price chart area on a financial chart.

Gets or sets a time interval used to blend financial data shown in the PriceArea of a financial chart.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether text rendered on the chart optimized for printing.

See DefaultSeries.DefaultElement.SmartLabel.RadarLabelMode.

Gets or sets a TimeSpan object that determines how often the page containing this chart will automatically reload.

Gets or sets a series which is added to the chart's main SeriesCollection when the Chart.SeriesCollection.Add() method is invoked.

Gets a SeriesCollection object which represents the data this chart will render.

See ShadingEffectMode.

Gets or sets a ShadingEffectMode enumeration indicating how elements on the chart are shaded.

2D Columns, and Bubbles can use mode One, Two, and Three. 3D Columns, 2D Pies, and 2D Donuts can only use mode 'One'.

Gets or sets a value which indicates whether specified dates are shown in the title. The formatting of the shown dates can be controlled with Chart.DefaultCultureName.

Applicable when Chart.DefaultSeries.Start/EndDate or Chart.Series.Start/EndDate areset.

Sets a string that automatically sets the Height and Width of the chart image.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether this chart uses the SmallChartMode.

This mode is designed for miniature charts and automatically gets rid of legendboxes, titles, axes, and margins.

Gets or sets a TimeIntervalAdvanced object that specifies a time span shown on the chart. The span shown is an interval which encompasses the time the chart is rendered. A trend line is also added for the entire span shown and uses values not shown in it's calculation to improve accuracy.

See Chart.DefaultSeries.DefaultElement.SmartLabel.Line.

Gets or sets a NameColorCollection object that specifies the colors of elements and series with specific names.

Gets or sets a boolean which controls smart palette synchronization.

Gets or sets the spacing percentage of pyramids, cones, and funnels with ChartType.Multiple .

Gets or sets a value that indicates the spacing percentage of nested pies.

Gets or sets a DateTime object to determine the start month of the year when DateGrouping is used.

This property determine the start month of the year. The default is January.

Gets or sets a DayOfWeek enumeration that indicates the starting day of the week when DateGrouping is used.

Gets or sets a TimeInterval enumeration which determines how the values of a given series are aggregated by date when retrieved from a database.

Gets or sets the directory where images generated by the control are temporarily stored.

This property takes either an absolute path 'c:/inetpub/wwwroot/app/tmp', a relative path ('tmp', '../tmp',) or when started with '/' a relative path from c:/inetpub/wwwroot/ ('/app/tmp).

Gets or sets the chart title. Equivalent to Chart.TitleBox.Label.Text.

Gets or sets a Box object that represents the title box.

Notes - To hide the title box use Chart.TitleBox.Position = TitleBoxPosition.None. - Setting Chart.TitleBox.Icon = "...IconPath..." draws the image inside the title box. - When no title, or icon is provided and TitleBoxPosition.FullWithLegend is not set, the title box is automatically hidden.

Gets or sets the Tooltip of the entinre chart image.

See Chart.DefaultSeries.DefaultElement.ToolTip.

Return the total number of series in the seriesCollection. This property usually used in conjunction with SplitByLimit.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether data added to this chart's SeriesCollection property is automatically transposed.

Gets or sets the ChartType of this Chart.

Gets or sets the URL of the entinre chart image.

Gets or sets the target of the URL link.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether chart elements are rendered in 3D.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the generated image is saved as a file in the TempDirectory folder or streamed directly to the browser.

.netCHARTING supports streaming images in addition to returning a reference to a generated file. There are differences in the way the control can be used between these two image return methods. When using a file reference, you are free to treat the page as you normally would, including HTML and any other web content on the page. If you are streaming the image back, only the control call should exist on the page because no other HTML will render. This is not a limitation of .netCHARTING but rather specific to the HTTP implementation which serves each request separately (as such a request to a web site with 3 images is actually 4 unique requests and the browser does the job of assembling those 4 items into the web page you see. Becauase streaming images does not allow HTML, setting url and tooltip properties of elements on the chart will have no effect.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the generated image is saved temporarily in a session variable for subsequent streaming from a helper aspx page. This option may only be used when UseFile = false.

.netCHARTING supports streaming images directly to the browser in addition to returning a reference to a generated image file. There are differences in the way the control can be used between these two image return methods. When using a file reference, you are free to treat the page as you normally would, and include HTML and any other web content on the page.<br/> Since streaming turns the page you include the control on into the actual image file return, the browser will not also allow HTML within the same http request. As a result url, tooltip and drilldown options will not be enabled. Setting UseSession to true works around this issue by returning an image reference to the same aspx page for image streaming. The image stream is temporary stored in a session variable and an aspx page in the temp directory streams the image to the browser, enabling the regular HTML and image map based features to work seamlessly with the control. NOTE: streaming of any kind (direct or through the session helper) has a large performance cost over the file based system which has build in cleanup functionlity and should be used in all possible environments. Streaming should never be used unless your environment completely prevents write access which is required for the file based system to operate.<br/>

Gets or sets a ChartArea object which represents the volume chart area on a financial chart.

Setting Chart.VolumeArea.Visible = false hides the volume chart area.

Gets or sets the size ratio between the VolumeArea and PriceArea of a financial chart.

A value of .3 makes the VolumeArea 30 while the P:dotnetCHARTING.Chart.PriceArea is 70.

Gets or sets a time interval used to aggregate financial volume data shown in the VolumeArea of a financial chart.

Gets or sets the width of the chart image.

Gets or Sets the main XAxis which all series inherit by default.

Gets or Sets the main YAxis which all series inherit by default.

Provides AJAX zooming and scrolling feature settings.

Occurs when the the chart is completed the data processing.

This event is very useful for customizing and displaying the processed data specially when using SplitByLimit which generates more than one series from a series.

Represents an area on which series and elements are plotted.

Initializes a new instance of the ChartArea class.

Initializes a new instance of the ChartArea class with a Series.

A series of data plotted in this chart area.

Initializes a new instance of the ChartArea class with a SeriesCollection.

Data plotted in this chart area.

Initializes a new instance of the ChartArea class with a title.

Chart area's title, equivalent of using: ChartArea.TitleBox.Text.

Initializes a new instance of the ChartArea class with a title and SeriesCollection.

Chart area's title, equivalent of using: ChartArea.TitleBox.Text. A series of data plotted in this chart area.

Initializes a new instance of the ChartArea class with a title and SeriesCollection.

Chart area's title, equivalent of using: ChartArea.TitleBox.Text. Data plotted in this chart area.

Serves as a shortcut to make the ChartArea transparent.

The following properties are set: Background.Color = Color.Empty Background.Bevel = false Line.Color = Color.Empty Shadow.Color = Color.Empty InteriorLine.Color = Color.Empty For each axis AlternateGridBackground.Color = Color.Empty; AlternateGridBackground.Mode = BackgroundMode.Color; AlternateGridBackground.Bevel = false; GridLine.Color = Color.Empty; ZeroLine.Color = Color.Empty;

Gets the coordinates of this ChartArea after the chart is rendered.

Gets a Rectangle object indicating this ChartArea's position and size after the chart is rendered.

Gets a chart area which expands the specified x axis at the specified scale range and allows vieweing data in greater detail.

The x axis to zoom. The scale range on the axis to expand. A line object used to indicate that the resulting chart area is zooming into the original one.

Gets a chart area which expands the specified y axis at the specified scale range and allows vieweing data in greater detail.

The y axis to zoom. The scale range on the axis to expand. A line object used to indicate that the resulting chart area is zooming into the original one.

Gets or sets a background object used to fill the interior of this chart area.

Gets or sets the bottom left corner style.

Only corners without axes touching them can be styled.

Gets or sets the bottom right corner style.

Only corners without axes touching them can be styled.

Gets or sets a value that indicates the corner size in pixels. This size is used with BoxCorner settings.

Only corners without axes touching them can be styled.

Gets or sets the top left corner style.

Only corners without axes touching them can be styled.

Gets or sets the top right corner style.

Only corners without axes touching them can be styled.

Gets or sets a TimeInterval enumeration which determines how the values of a given series are aggregated by date when retrieved from a database.

Controls how the values of a given series are grouped by date. In order to use this option the second column returned by the SqlStatement must be a date/time. Options include Minutes, Hours, Days, Weeks, Months, Quarters and Years where any StartDate and EndDate can be used and the chart will show all values sequentially. There are additional options for Hour/Minute, Day/Hour, Week/Day, Month/Day, Year/Quarter and Year/Month in these cases there are 2 special considerations 1) only a single day / week / month / or year is charted and 2) if the date range is greater than the period type (e.g. 1 day / 1 week / 1 month / 1 year) values are totalled over that period. There are also shortcuts for the grouping cases of Hour (Hours/Minute), Day (Day/Hour), Week(Week/Day), Month (Month/Day) and Year (Year/Month). See all time interval options. This feature automatically groups multiple data points over a given date range into the specific date grouping you select. When DateGrouping is enabled you must ensure that each series within a given chart returns date/time data for the second column returned by the SqlStatement.

Gets or sets an enum which determines how values are grouped to create a single element value.

When dategrouping is used, if an element has more than one value, a Calculation is performed on those values.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether to maintain the sort order of the data as it is provided.

Gets or sets the default box corner style.

Explicitly set corners will not be overridden. Only corners without axes touching them can be styled.

Gets or sets an Element object whose properties will trickle to all other elements on the chart unless otherwise specified. This is a shortcut to the DefaultSeries.DefaultElement property.

Gets or sets a Series object whose properties will trickle to all other series in this chart area unless otherwise specified.

When using automated drill down in conjunction with date grouping and multiple series, this property determines if drill down will occur into a single series or multiple series.

Gets or sets the layout column and row position of this ChartArea.

The default (top-left) position is 0,0. To place another ChartArea to the right of it, the position would be 1,0. The format is: ( Column, Row ) or ( X , Y )

Gets or sets a value that specifies what percentage of the full height available for ChartAreas this ChartArea will occupy.

Values range from 0 to 100. This property should be used with multiple vertical chart area charts.

Gets or sets the Hotspot of this ChartArea. This feature is designed for use with Navigator only at this time.

Specialized tokens YValue and XValue can be used in this hotspot's strings. Unlike other tokens used with hotspots where the values are the same for the entire hotspot area, these tokens refer to the mouse position on the chart area. For example, if used with tooltips, the tooltip text will change depending on the mouse position.

Gets or sets a line object which is drawn inside the chart area.

The interior line can be seen when the chart is drawn in 3D.

Gets or sets a label object which draws a string inside the chart area.

The label will be drawn in the upper left corner of the chart.

Gets or sets a LegendBox object associated with this chart area.

This property is null by default. By instantiating a new LegendBox, LegendEntry objects of the series or element in this chart area will appear in this LegendBox. Otherwise, they would appear in the main chart area's legend box (Chart.ChartArea.LegendBox).

Gets or sets the Line object used to draw the outline of this chart area.

Gets or sets a value that specifies what percentage of the chart area used used for drag scrolling or arbitrary selection.

Gets or sets the chart area interactivity features for the Silverlight Navigator.

Gets or sets the padding or spacing of chart objects plotted on this ChartArea. This applies only to radar, pie, TreeMap, and gauge charts.

To control column and cylinder spacing see link below.

Gets or sets a series which is added to the chart's main SeriesCollection when the Chart.SeriesCollection.Add() method is invoked.

Adds Series or SeriesCollection objects to the chart area.

Gets or sets the Shadow cast under this box.

Gets or sets a DateTime object to determine the start month of the year when DateGrouping is used.

This property determine the start month of the year. The default is January.

Gets or sets a DayOfWeek enumeration that indicates the starting day of the week when DateGrouping is used.

Gets or sets the ChartArea's title. Equivalent to ChartArea.TitleBox.Label.Text.

Gets or sets a title box (dotnetCHARTING.Box) object associated with this ChartArea.

Gets or sets a label that specifies the font and color of element labels drawn on the chart. Equivalent to: Chart.DefaultSeries.DefaultElement.SmartLabel

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether this chart area is visible.

Gets or sets a value that specifies what percentage of the full width available for ChartAreas this ChartArea will occupy.

Values range from 0 to 100. This property should be used with multiple horizontal chart area charts.

Gets or sets the X axis of this chart area.

When the axis is specified, series plotted on this area will automatically use this x axis, unless otherwise specified.

Gets or sets the Y axis of this chart area.

When the axis is specified, series plotted on this area will automatically use this y axis, unless otherwise specified.

Contains a collection of ChartArea objects.

Creates a new instance of ChartAreaCollection with the specified list of ChartArea objects.

Adds a specified ChartAreaCollection to this collection.

The ChartAreaCollection to add.

Adds the specified ChartArea objects to this collection.

A list of ChartArea objects to add.

Determines whether this collection contains a specified ChartArea.

true if the specified ChartArea belongs to this collection; otherwise, false. The ChartArea to find.

Determines the index of a specified ChartArea in this collection.

The zero-based index of the specified ChartArea. The ChartArea to find.

Inserts a ChartArea into this collection at a specified index.

The zero-based index into the collection at which to insert the ChartArea. The ChartArea to insert into this collection.

Removes a specified ChartArea from this collection.

The ChartArea to remove.

Gets or sets the object at a specified index.

Encapsulates a set of options that control the layout of multiple chart areas in a single chart image.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether chart areas oriented opposite to the grid layout mode's priority orientation can be placed next to chart areas that don't share any axes.

This setting applies only to modes VerticalPriority and HorizontalPriority.

Gets or sets the a ChartAreaLayoutMode.

Acquires and manipulates data from databases or other sources, then creates a SeriesCollection which is consumed by the chart control.

Initializes a new instance of the DataEngine class.

Initializes a new instance of the DataEngine class with a data object.

Supported Data Objects DataSet DataTable DataView String (xml file name or xml string)

Initializes a new instance of the DataEngine class with a data object and mapped DataFields.

Supported Data Objects DataSet DataTable DataView String (xml file name or xml string) See Gettings Started > Tutorials > Data Fields

Initializes a new instance of the DataEngine class with a connection string.

Initial connection string.

Initializes a new instance of the DataEngine class with a ConnectionString and SqlStatement.

Initializes a new instance of the DataEngine class with a ConnectionString, SqlStatement, and DataFields.

Connection String Sql statement Data fields

Initializes a new instance of the DataEngine class with a ConnectionString, SqlStatement, and DateGrouping.

Connection String Sql statement DateGrouping

Adds a stored procedure when to use in conjunction with StoredProcedure.

This method is optionally used in conjunction with the StoredProcedure property to specify any number of parameters for the stored proc. A number of field types are supported. de.AddParameter("MyParameter","MyValue",FieldType.Text) String specifying the parameter name. String pecifying the parameter value. A FieldType enumeration specifying the parameter type.

See String).

Gets a SeriesCollection based on a data object and mapped DataFields.

Supported Data Objects DataSet DataTable DataView String (xml file name or Xml string) Mapped DataFields

Gets a SeriesCollection based on a connection string and SQL query statement.

The connection string or path and file name of an mdb database. The SQL statement.

Gets a SeriesCollection based on a connection string and SQL query statement and mapped DataFields.

The connection string or path and file name of an mdb database. The SQL statement. Mapped DataFields. See Gettings Started > Tutorials > Data Fields

Gets a SeriesCollection based on a connection string, SQL query statement, and DateGrouping.

The connection string or path and file name of an mdb database. The SQL statement. Mapped DataFields. See Gettings Started > Tutorials > Data Fields

Initiates data acquisition and processing based on the specified data object.

A SeriesCollection containting the resulting chart data. A data object.

Initiates data acquisition and processing based on the specified data engine settings.

When ChartType is set to Financial and DateGrouping is specified, high, low, open, and close element values will be calculated based on the price field. Otherwise they will not be generated. A SeriesCollection containting the resulting chart data.

Sets the Chart object.

Gets or sets the ChartType enumeration that sets the default DataFields for each type.

See Getting Started > Tutorials > DataFields for more info.

Gets or sets the wait time before terminating the attempt to execute a command and generating an error.

The time (in seconds) to wait for the command to execute. The default value is 30 seconds.

Gets or sets the string used to open a SQL Server, Access, or Excel database.

Access, Excel and SQL server are supported and automatically detected based on the connection string specified. See Getting Started > Tutorials > Connecting to data.

Gets or sets the culture name used when element names are populated with values such as dates.

See the CultureInfo class for possible names of a culture.

Gets or sets a DataTable, DataSet, DataView, XML file name, Xml string or an object that implement IEnumerable, ArrayList or HashTable used to generate a SeriesCollection.

When not connecting to a database directly using ConnectionString and SqlStatement, this property offers an alternative method for obtaining database data.

Gets or sets the culture name used when StartDate and EndDate insert to the sql statement. This property only necessary to set if the web server and database server having different culture setting.

See the CultureInfo class for possible names of a culture.

Gets or sets a value that specifies the 'database column' to 'element value' relationship.

See Getting Started > Tutorials > Data Fields for more info.

Gets or sets the control object of a DataGrid or GridView control that will be populated with the charted data.

This property accepts a DataGrid or GridView control object. If set, the data represented in the chart is populated in the DataGrid or GridView of the same name. You must also define a DataGrid or GridView control within the same script. This property is useful when displaying tabular chart data along with your charts.

Gets or sets the format string which determines number formatting in the datagrid.

See 'Formatting Types' in your msdn documentation for a complete list of options. Some shortcuts are also provided for specific settings including "C" or "currency" , "E" or "scientific" , "F" or "fixed" , "G" or "general" and "N,2" for normal and the number after the comma determines the number of decimal places.

Gets or sets the header label of the DataGrid control specified by the DataGrid property.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the data with which the specified DataGrid control is populated will be transposed.

Gets or sets the date grouping of data returned from your database.

Controls how the values of a given series are grouped by date. In order to use this option the first column returned by the SqlStatement must be a date/time. Options include Minutes, Hours, Days, Weeks, Months, Quarters and Years where any StartDate and EndDate can be used and the chart will show all values sequentially. There are additional options for Hour/Minute, Day/Hour, Week/Day, Month/Day, Year/Quarter and Year/Month in these cases there are 2 special considerations 1) only a single day / week / month / or year is charted and 2) if the date range is greater than the period type (e.g. 1 day / 1 week / 1 month / 1 year) values are totalled over that period. There are also shortcuts for the grouping cases of Hour (Hours/Minute), Day (Day/Hour), Week(Week/Day), Month (Month/Day) and Year (Year/Month). See all time interval options. This feature automatically groups multiple data points over a given date range into the specific date grouping you select. When DateGrouping is enabled you must ensure that each series within a given chart returns date/time data for the first column returned by the SqlStatement. Controls how the values of a given series are grouped by date. In order to use this option the first column returned by the SqlStatement must be a date/time. Options include Minutes, Hours, Days, Weeks, Months, Quarters and Years where any StartDate and EndDate can be used and the chart will show all values sequentially. There are additional options for Hour/Minute, Day/Hour, Week/Day, Month/Day, Year/Quarter and Year/Month in these cases there are 2 special considerations 1) only a single day / week / month / or year is charted and 2) if the date range is greater than the period type (e.g. 1 day / 1 week / 1 month / 1 year) values are totalled over that period. There are also shortcuts for the grouping cases of Hour (Hours/Minute), Day (Day/Hour), Week(Week/Day), Month (Month/Day) and Year (Year/Month). See all time interval options. This feature automatically groups multiple data points over a given date range into the specific date grouping you select. When DateGrouping is enabled you must ensure that each series within a given chart returns date/time data for the first column returned by the SqlStatement. See Getting Started > Tutorials > Data Engine

Gets or sets an enum which determines how values are grouped to create a single element value.

When dategrouping is used, if an element has more than one value, a Calculation is performed on those values.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether to maintain the sort order of the data as it is provided.

When using automated drill down in conjunction with date grouping and multiple series, this property determines if drill down will occur into a single series or multiple series.

Gets or sets the ending date used with SqlStatement to query filtered data from a database.

This property is used for the SqlStatement property where the #EndDate# token is replaced with the value set to this property. See: Getting Started > Tutorials > Data Engine

Gets an error message which will be available if this DataEngine instance fails after a call to GetSeries().

Gets or sets the format string used when element names are populated with values such as dates.

This property usually used with conjunction of date grouping. If it doesn't set, use an appropriate format for the date grouping. For format information see DateTimeFormatInfo or NumberFormatInfo

Gets or sets the limit number of elements returned for each series when data is generated. Gets or sets the limit number of elements returned for each series when data is generated. This property determines the number of elements to include in the limited return. The limit string can be a number "3" or "2x3". In the second format, the first number determines the group position and the second number is the limit. By setting "2x3" with top limit mode, it only return the second "3" maximum elements.

If DateGrouping is used, limit has no effect. In such a case, StartDate and EndDate must be used to limit the generated element count. See Getting Started > Tutorials > Data Engine.

Determine the type of limitation. Default is Top.

This property works in conjunction with Limit or SplitByLimit to determine which elements or series should be included or excluded.

Gets or sets the label used for the element or series created when using Limit or SplitByLimit and setting ShowOther to true.

See Getting Started > Tutorials > Data Engine for more info.

Gets or sets a collection of Parameter objects used in conjunction with the StoredProcedure property.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the additional series not shown due to the use of SplitByLimit, or elements not shown due to the use of Limit, are aggregated into a single series or element.

See Gettings Started > Tutorials > Data Engine for more info. The default is false.

Gets or sets the number of series created using SplitBy.

This property works with conjunction of LimitMode property and determines the number of series to include in the return. The limit string can be a number "3" or "2x3". In the second format, the first number determines the group positon and the second number is the limit. By setting "2x3" with top limit mode, it only return the second "3" maximum series. See Getting Started > Tutorials > Data Engine.

The SQL statement used to obtain the charting data.

The first column returned is used for the X values, and the second for the Y values. The first also has special handling if dates are returned as the DateGrouping property can be used for intelligent date handling and grouping. The third column is optional and is used only for SplitBy. When a third column is set it is used automatically to create a unique series based on each unique value in this column. NOTE: All date values in your SQL statements should be wrapped with the pound symbol: #10/25/2002#, regardless if Access or SQL server is used. Also the #StartDate# and #EndDate# tokens can be used in which case the dates set for these properties will be set in place of the tokens before the SqlStatement is executed. See Getting Started > Tutorials > Queries for more info.

Gets or sets the starting date used with SqlStatement to query filtered data from a database.

This property is used for the SqlStatement property where the #StartDate# token is replaced with the value set to this property. See: Getting Started > Tutorials > Data Engine

Gets or sets a DateTime object to determine the start month of the year when DateGrouping is used.

This property determine the start month of the year. The default is January.

Gets or sets a DayOfWeek enumeration that determines the day which will be used as the starting day of the week for the dategrouping functionality.

This property used with conjunction of date grouping by weeks. The default is Sunday.

This property accepts the name of a stored procedure to be used in place of the SqlStatement property in order to obtain data for the chart.

Stored Procedures also work with parameters, see the FieldType) method. See Getting Started > Tutorials > Connecting to Data for more info.

Gets or sets the date grouping for the element subvalue.

Controls how the values of a given element subvalue are grouped by date. In order to use this option the first column returned by the SqlStatement must be a date/time. Options include Minutes, Hours, Days, Weeks, Months, Quarters and Years where any StartDate and EndDate can be used and the chart will show all values sequentially. There are additional options for Hour/Minute, Day/Hour, Week/Day, Month/Day, Year/Quarter and Year/Month in these cases there are 2 special considerations 1) only a single day / week / month / or year is charted and 2) if the date range is greater than the period type (e.g. 1 day / 1 week / 1 month / 1 year) values are totalled over that period. There are also shortcuts for the grouping cases of Hour (Hours/Minute), Day (Day/Hour), Week(Week/Day), Month (Month/Day) and Year (Year/Month). See all time interval options. This feature automatically groups multiple data points over a given date range into the specific date grouping you select. When DateGrouping is enabled you must ensure that each series within a given chart returns date/time data for the first column returned by the SqlStatement. Controls how the values of a given series are grouped by date. In order to use this option the first column returned by the SqlStatement must be a date/time. Options include Minutes, Hours, Days, Weeks, Months, Quarters and Years where any StartDate and EndDate can be used and the chart will show all values sequentially. There are additional options for Hour/Minute, Day/Hour, Week/Day, Month/Day, Year/Quarter and Year/Month in these cases there are 2 special considerations 1) only a single day / week / month / or year is charted and 2) if the date range is greater than the period type (e.g. 1 day / 1 week / 1 month / 1 year) values are totalled over that period. There are also shortcuts for the grouping cases of Hour (Hours/Minute), Day (Day/Hour), Week(Week/Day), Month (Month/Day) and Year (Year/Month). See all time interval options. This feature automatically groups multiple data points over a given date range into the specific date grouping you select. When DateGrouping is enabled you must ensure that each series within a given chart returns date/time data for the first column returned by the SqlStatement. See Getting Started > Tutorials > Data Engine

Represents a single or related set of .netCHARTING data-based objects that specify a data source used to parse tokens and populate custom legend boxes with LegendEntry objects.

Evaluates a string containing tokens that relate to this DataSource. For example, if this DataSource represents a series, the string "Name" will return the actual name of the series. See the token reference for more information on available tokens.

All other string features such as expressions and embedded formatting are supported by this method. String with tokens to evaluate. Chart type used with this DataSource. When true, the returned string is urlEncoded.

Creates an AxisMarker DataSource object from an AxisMarker object.

Axis containing the axis marker.

Creates a DataSource object from a SeriesColleciton, Series, and Element.

SeriesCollection containing the series of the given element. Index of the series that contains the given element. Index of the element in the specified series. Split into type when this DataSource is used to populate a legend box.

Creates a DataSource object from a SeriesColleciton, Series, and Element.

SeriesCollection containing the series of the given element. Name of the series that contains the given element. Name of the given element. Split into type when this DataSource is used to populate a legend box.

Creates a DataSource object from a SeriesColleciton, Series, and Element.

SeriesCollection containing the series of the given element. Index of the series that contains the given element. Name of the given element. Split into type when this DataSource is used to populate a legend box.

Creates a DataSource object class from a SeriesColleciton, Series, and Element.

SeriesCollection containing the series of the given element. Index of the series that contains the given element. Index of the element in the specified series.

Creates a DataSource object from a SeriesColleciton, Series, and Element.

SeriesCollection containing the series of the given element. Name of the series that contains the given element. Name of the given element.

Creates a DataSource object from a SeriesColleciton, Series, and Element.

SeriesCollection containing the series of the given element. Index of the series that contains the given element. Name of the given element.

Creates a DataSource object from an element Element.

The element.

Creates a DataSource object from a SeriesColleciton, and Element index.

SeriesCollection containing the given group of elements. Index of the element in each series that makes up the group. Name of the given element.

Creates an Element Group DataSource object from a SeriesColleciton, and Element name.

SeriesCollection containing the given group of elements. Name of the element in each series that makes up the group. Name of the given element.

Creates an Element Group DataSource object from a SeriesColleciton, and Element index.

SeriesCollection containing the given group of elements. Index of the element in each series that makes up the group.

Creates an Element Group DataSource object from a SeriesColleciton, and Element name.

SeriesCollection containing the given group of elements. Index of the element in each series that makes up the group.

Creates a DataSource object from an ScaleRange object.

Axis containing the scale range. Given ScaleRange object.

Creates a DataSource object from a SeriesColleciton, and Series.

SeriesCollection containing the given series. Index of the given series. Split into type when this DataSource is used to populate a legend box.

Creates a DataSource object from a SeriesColleciton, and Series.

SeriesCollection containing the given series. Name of the given series. Split into type when this DataSource is used to populate a legend box.

Creates a DataSource object from a SeriesColleciton, and Series.

SeriesCollection containing the given series. Index of the given series.

Creates a DataSource object from a SeriesColleciton, and Series.

SeriesCollection containing the given series. Name of the given series.

Creates a DataSource object from a Series.

The series.

Creates a DataSource object from a SeriesColleciton.

Given SeriesCollection. Split into type when this DataSource is used to populate a legend box.

Creates a DataSource object from a SeriesColleciton.

Given SeriesCollection.

Creates a DataSource from the specified SeriesCollection.

Creates a DataSource from the specified AxisMarker.

AxisMarker that is used as the as the DataSource.

Creates a DataSource from the specified Element.

Element that is used as the as the DataSource.

Creates a DataSource from the specified Series.

Series that is used as the as the DataSource.

Creates a DataSource from the specified SeriesCollection.

SeriesCollection that is used as the as the DataSource.

Gets or sets the represented axis.

Gets or sets the represented AxisMarker.

Gets or sets the represented element.

Gets or sets the index of series for the element group.

Gets or sets the represented ScaleRange object.

Gets or sets the represented or parent series.

Gets or sets the represented or parent SeriesCollection.

Specifies the type of DataSource to split this data source into when it is used to populate a legend box.

Gets or sets the DataSourceType of this DataSource.

Represents a element object or data point on the chart.

The Element object contains properties that describe it's value such as YValue, YDateTime, BubbleSize etc.. It also defines defines objects and properties that specify the element's behavior and appearance. Element properties that don't describe it's value can be set simultaneously for all element in a Series by setting them with Series.DefaultElement.___ For example:(Chart.DefaultSeries.DefaultElement.SmartLabel.Text = "YValue"). See also20Model.html">Data Model Tutorial

Initializes a new instance of the Element class.

Initializes a new instance of the Element class with the specified name.

Name of this element.

Initialize a new instance of the Element class with (YDateTimeStart, YDateTime) or (XDateTime, YDateTime) as the initial element value types.

Name of this element. Sets YDateTimeStart and XDateTime Sets YDateTime

Initialize a new instance of the Element class with (YDateTimeStart, YDateTime, Complete) or (XDateTime, YDateTime, BubbleSize) as the initial element value types.

Name of this element. Sets YDateTimeStart and XDateTime Set YDateTime Sets Complete and BubbleSize

Initialize a new instance of the Element class with (XDateTime, YValue) or (XDateTime, Close) as the initial element value types.

Name of this element. Sets XDateTime Sets YValue and Close

Initialize a new instance of the Element class with (XDateTime, YValue, BubbleSize) or (XDateTime, Close, Volume) as the initial element value types.

Name of this element. Sets XDateTime Sets Yvalue and Close Sets BubbleSize and Volume

Initialize a new instance of the Element class with (XDateTime, High, Low, Open, Close) as the initial element value types.

Name of this element. Sets XDateTime Sets High Sets Low Sets Open Sets Close

Initialize a new instance of the Element class with (XDateTime, High, Low, Open, Close, Volume) as the initial element value types.

Name of this element. Sets XDateTime Sets High Sets Low Sets Open Sets Close Sets Volume

Initialize a new instance of the Element class with (YValue) as the initial element value type.

Name of this element. Sets YValue

Initialize a new instance of the Element class with (XValue, YDateTime) as the initial element value types.

Name of this element. Sets XValue Sets YDateTime

Initialize a new instance of the Element class with (XValue, YDateTime, BubbleSize) as the initial element value types.

Name of this element. Sets XValue Sets YDateTime Sets BubbleSize

Initialize a new instance of the Element class with (YValueStart, YValue) or (XValue, YValue) as the initial element value types.

Name of this element. Sets YValueStart and XValue Sets YValue

Initialize a new instance of the Element class with (YValueStart, YValue, Complete) or (XValue, YValue, BubbleSize) as the initial element value types.

Name of this element. Sets YValueStart and XValue Sets YValue Sets Complete and BubbleSize

Adds the values of two elements.

All properties of lsh are copied to the resulting element, then rhs properties are trickled to the resulting element. An element. An element.

Adds a value to all values of an element.

An element. A value.

Adds a value to all values of an element.

A value. An element.

Creates a copy of the current Element.

Divides an element by another.

All properties of lsh are copied to the resulting element, then rhs properties are trickled to the resulting element. An element. An element.

Divides an element by a number.

An element. A numeric value.

Divider a number by an element.

A numeric value. An element.

Gets a DataSource object representing this Element.

Gets the coordinates of the element after the chart is generated. This can be used to draw on top of the element by knowing its polygon coordinates.

A PointF array of the element's polygon.

Multiplies two elements.

All properties of lsh are copied to the resulting element, then rhs properties are trickled to the resulting element. An element. An element.

Multiplies an element by a specified numeric value.

An element. A numeric value.

Multiplies an element by a specified numeric value.

A numeric value. An element.

Subtracts an element from another.

All properties of lsh are copied to the resulting element, then rhs properties are trickled to the resulting element. An element. An element.

Subtracts a value from all values of an element.

An element. A value.

Subtracts all values of an element from specified value.

A value. An element

Adds the values of two elements.

Adds a value to all values of an element.

A value. An element.

Adds a value to all values of an element.

An element. A value.

Adds the values of two elements.

All properties of lsh are copied to the resulting element, then rhs properties are trickled to the resulting element. An element. An element.

Divides an element by another.

Divider a number by an element.

A numeric value. An element.

Divides an element by a number.

An element. A numeric value.

Divides an element by another.

All properties of lsh are copied to the resulting element, then rhs properties are trickled to the resulting element. An element. An element.

Multiplies an element by a specified numeric value.

A numeric value. An element.

Multiplies an element by a specified numeric value.

An element. A numeric value.

Multiplies two elements.

All properties of lsh are copied to the resulting element, then rhs properties are trickled to the resulting element. An element. An element.

Subtracts an element from another.

Subtracts all values of an element from specified value.

A value. An element

Subtracts a value from all values of an element.

An element. A value.

Subtracts an element from another.

All properties of lsh are copied to the resulting element, then rhs properties are trickled to the resulting element. An element. An element.

Gets or sets this element's Annotation.

The annotation's position will be the same as this element's position, usless specified. Element tokens can be used by this annotation's text to describe the element.

Gets or sets this element's AxisMarker.

This axis marker will highlight a section of the axis on which this element's name appears.

Gets or sets the bubble size of this element.

This Element value type is used by ChartType.Bubble only.

Gets or sets the financial closing price of this element.

This element value type is used by ChartType.Financial only.

Gets or sets this element's color.

This color will also trickle to this element's SmartLabel.Color property, unless specified. When this element instance is the Series.DefaultElement of a Series, this color will trickle to that series' Line.Color property, unless specified.

Gets or sets the percent complete value of this element.

This Element value type is used by ChartType.Combo, ComboHorizontal, and ComboSideBySide with Column and Cylinder SeriesType. Primarily used to create Gantt charts.

Gets a collection of custom attributes associated with this element.

Gets or sets a default dotnetCHARTING.SubValue object used to propagate its property settings to all SubValue objects in the SubValues collection.

Gets of sets the high error value. When set, a single SubValue is drawn above the element's value. When ErrorLowValue is also set, a range SubValue is drawn between the two values.

Gets of sets the low error value. When set, a single SubValue is drawn below the element's YValue value or range. When ErrorHighValue is also set, a range SubValue is drawn between the two values.

Gets of sets the negative error offset. When set, a single SubValue is drawn below the element's value.

Gets or sets the negative error offset based on the specified percentage of the element's YValue value or range. When set, a single SubValue is drawn below the element's value. When ErrorPlusPercent is also set, a range SubValue is drawn between the two points.

Gets or sets the error offset. The offset represents a range, +/- the value of the offset with respect to the element's YValue value or range.

Gets or sets the error offset based on the specified percentage of the element's YValue value or range. The offset represents a range, +/- the percentage of the element's YValue value or range.

Gets of sets the positive error offset. When set, a single SubValue is drawn above the element's value.

Gets or sets the positive error offset based on the specified percentage of the element's YValue value or range. When set, a single SubValue is drawn above the element's value. When ErrorMinusPercent is also set, a range SubValue is drawn between the two points.

See ExplodeSlice

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the pie slice represented by this element is exploded.

When a pie slice represents a series, that series' DefaultElement.ExplodeSlice property indicates whether the slice is exploded.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether this element's ElementMarker is drawn when the parent Series object's SeriesType omits the ElementMarker by default.

Only SeriesTypes: Line (when Use3D = false), Spline, and Marker draw ElementMarkers by default.

Gets or sets this element's HatchStyle color.

Gets or sets this element's hatch style.

Hatch styles are filled using HatchColor. By default the color is transparent and may need to be specified before the hatch appears.

Gets or sets a value which represents the height of pie slices.

Gets or sets the financial high price of this element.

This element value type is used by ChartType.Financial only.

Gets or sets the Hotspot of this Element.

Gets or sets the InstanceID of the parent element for use in organization charts.

Gets or sets this element's SmartLabel.Text property.

Element tokens can be used to describe this element.

Gets or sets this element's LegendEntry.

The legend entry represents this element in the LegendBox. Most charts types will only show legend entries of series, not individual elements. Changing this behavior to show the element's legend entries is done by setting the series' Palette or PaletteName properties.

Gets or sets a percent value representing this element's needle length. Also used to represent pie slice length.

Applies to gauge charts.

Gets or sets the financial low price of this element.

This element value type is used by ChartType.Financial only.

Gets or sets this element's Marker.

Only SeriesType options: Line (when Use3D = false), Spline, and Marker draw ElementMarkers by default. For other SeriesTypes, ForceMarker must be true.

Gets or sets this element's name.

The name property represents the element on label axes.

Gets or sets the financial open price of this element.

This element value type is used by ChartType.Financial only.

Gets or sets the parent of this element for use in organizational charts.

Gets the element's pixel coordinate on a chart image.

This position is only available after the chart is rendered.

Gets or sets this element's secondary color.

The secondary color is used with financial series types to indicate that the closing price (dotnetCHARTING.Element.Close) is lower than the opening price (dotnetCHARTING.Element.Open).

Gets or sets the shape type of this element when the series type is BubbleShape.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether this element's SmartLabel is visible.

Gets or sets this element's SmartLabel.

By default this label is hidden unless ShowValue is true.

Gets a collection of SubValue objects drawn on this Element.

Gets or sets a Series or Element object from which this element's color will be inherited.

The specified object must be one that is used and in the chart.

Gets or sets this elements tool tip. (Shortcut to: Element.Hotspot.Tooltip)

Element tokens can be used to describe this element.

Gets or sets the element color's transparency.

A value of 0 will have no transparency and 100 will be completely transparent.

Gets or sets the element's URL link. (Shortcut to: Element.Hotspot.URL)

The chart will create an image map with the specified url for this element. Element tokens can be used to describe this element in the url.

Gets or sets the URL target of this element's link URL. (Shortcut to: Element.Hotspot.URLTarget)

Gets or sets the financial volume of this element.

This element value type is used by ChartType.Financial only.

Gets or sets an AxisTick object that will placed on the x axis at the position of this element's x value. If the x axis is a category axis, AxisTick will not have any effect.

This value is null by default.

Gets or sets the X DateTime value of this element.

This Element value is used with value x axes.

Gets or sets the initial X DateTime value of this element.

Not yet implemented.

Gets or sets the X value of this element.

This Element value is used with value x axes.

Gets or sets the initial X value of this element.

Not yet implemented.

Gets or sets an AxisTick object that will placed on the y axis at the position of this element's y value. If the x axis is a category axis, AxisTick will not have any effect.

Gets or sets the Y DateTime value of this element.

Using ChartType.ComboHorizontal the YDateTime value type corresponds to the x axis because this allows the element to be interchangeable between the vertical and horizontal combo chart.

Gets or sets the initial Y DateTime value of this element.

Using ChartType.ComboHorizontal the YDateTimeStart value type corresponds to the x axis because this allows the element to be interchangeable between the vertical and horizontal combo chart.

Gets or sets the y value of this element.

YValue is the main value container for elements. It is used at times when the element's value would not officially be considered the y value such as: pie slice value. Using ChartType.ComboHorizontal the YValue type value corresponds to the x axis because this allows the element to be interchangable between the vertical and horizontal combo chart. This Element value type is used by all chart types except ChartType.Financial.

Gets or sets the initial Y value of this element.

Using ChartType.ComboHorizontal, the YValueStart type value corresponds to the x axis because this allows the element to be interchangable between the vertical and horizontal combo chart. This Element value type is used by all chart types except ChartType.Financial.

Gets or sets the Z value of this element.

This Element value is used with value x axes.

Contains a collection of Element objects.

Creates an instance of the componentname object.

Adds an element to the collection based on the specified calculation.

This method must be used through Chart.Series.Elements.Add(...). Numeric index of the added element. Calculation to perform on the collection.

Adds an element to the collection based on the specified collection with the specified name.

Numeric index of the added element. Calculation to perform on the elements. Name of the new element.

Provided as a shortcut for adding element the chart SeriesCollection.

Adds the specified Elements to this collection.

List of elements to add.

Adds a specified ElementCollection to this collection.

ElementCollection to add.

Adds a specified Element class to this collection.

The zero-based index of the added Element. The Element to add.

Determines whether this collection contains a specified Element.

true if the specified Element belongs to this collection; otherwise, false. The Element to find.

Determines the index of a specified Element in this collection.

The zero-based index of the specified AxisTick. The AxisTick to find.

Inserts a element into this collection at a specified index.

The zero-based index into the collection at which to insert the element. The element to insert into this collection.

Removes a specified element from this collection.

The element to remove.

Gets or sets the Element at a specified index.

Defines a graphical object with a specified shape, size, and color or an image used to mark and identify Element objects.

Initializes an instance of ElementMarker with an image and size.

Initializes an instance of ElementMarker.

This element marker will be empty.

Initializes an instance of ElementMarker with a built in icon (ElementMarkerType).

Element marker type of this marker.

Initializes an instance of ElementMarker with a built in icon (ElementMarkerType), and size.

Element marker type of this marker. The size of this marker.

Initializes an instance of ElementMarker with a built in icon (ElementMarkerType), size, and color.

Element marker type of this marker. The size of this marker. The color of this marker.

Initializes an instance of ElementMarker with an image.

Absolute path of an image.

Initializes an instance of ElementMarker with an image and size.

Absolute path of an image. Maximum width or height of the image.

Gets or sets the color of this element marker.

Gets or sets the color in a specified image that will be replaced by the color of the element it represents.

Gets or sets a value between 0 and 100 that represents the tolerance of the DynamicImageColor allowing the replacing color to affect a wider range of color variation from the specified DynamicImageColor.

Gets or sets the image path of this marker.

Gets or sets the size of this element marker.

Gets or sets a predefined shape for this marker.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether the marker is visible.

Defines the behavior and appearance of empty elements for a given Series.

Initializes a new instance of the EmptyElement class.

Initializes a new instance of the EmptyElement class with a label string and color.

Empty element label text. Empty element color.

Initializes a new instance of the EmptyElement class with a label string, color and marker color.

Label text. Color Marker color.

Initializes a new instance of the EmptyElement class with a label string, color, marker color and type.

Label text. Color Marker color. Marker type.

Initializes a new instance of the EmptyElement class with a label string, color, and marker object.

Label text. Color Marker object.

Gets or sets the color of empty elements.

This property will also affect the colors of this empty element's Line, Marker, and SmartLabel objects.

Gets or sets the Hotspot of this EmptyElement.

Gets or sets a line which substitutes a series' Line object when empty elements are drawn.

Gets or sets the marker of empty elements.

To active this marker the following settings are required: EmptyElement.Mode = EmptyElementMode.Fill EmptyElement.Marker = ElementMarkerType.(any other than 'None')

Gets or sets the empty element mode.

Gets or sets the label of empty elements.

Gets or sets the tool tip of empty elements.

Gets or sets the URL of empty elements.

Gets or sets the target of URLs of empty elements.

Facilitates saving bitmap images and cleanup.

Saves a MemoryStream in the TempDirectory with the format set in chart.ImageFormat chart control.

Path of the saved file. for later chart display.

Saves a MemoryStream in the TempDirectory with the format set in chart.ImageFormat chart control.

Path of the saved file.

Saves a Bitmap in the TempDirectory and displays it in the chart control.

Path of the saved bitmap. Bitmap to save. for later chart display.

Causes the chart to generate and returns the path of the saved image.

Path of the saved image.

Saves a Metafile in the TempDirectory and displays it in the chart control.

Path of the saved image. Metafile to save.

Saves a Metafile in the TempDirectory and displays it in the chart control.

Path of the saved image. Metafile to save. for later chart display.

Saves a Bitmap in the TempDirectory and displays it in the chart control.

Path of the saved bitmap. Bitmap to save.

Gets a value indicating whether the chart was renderd or a cached image was used.

If false no special processing is required because a cached image will be displayed.

Gets or sets a TimeSpan object that determines the amount of time an image is cached and displayed on a page before a new one is generated.

When set, a given chart image will be generated on the first hit and on all subsequent hits within the cache duration period, the same image will be returned with no rendering work by the chart control.

Gets or sets a TimeSpan object that determines the minimum amount of time images are stored in the TempDirectory folder before they are deleted.

Gets or sets a TimeSpan object that determines the amount of time the TempDirectory folder would be checked for deleting old image files.

Sets the file name to save an image as, or gets the file name of an image that has been saved in the TempDirectory after a chart is generated.

When empty, a random name will be created. In order for the cleanup system to include custom file names they must start with 'dnc-', the mask is: 'dnc-*.*'.

Gets or sets Jpg file quality. (Worse quality) 0 - 100 (Best quality)

Gets or sets a ImageFormat Enumeration specifying the image file type.

Gets or sets the directory where images generated by the control are temporarily stored.

This property takes either an absolute path 'c:/inetpub/wwwroot/app/tmp', a relative path ('tmp', '../tmp',) or when started with '/' a relative path from c:/inetpub/wwwroot/ ('/app/tmp).

Provides a set of methods that perform financial analysis of series and series collections.

Evaluates the accumulation/distribution indicator for each of the (sub)collection of periods of a given length.

The accumulation/distribution indicator illustrates the degree to which an asset is being accumulated or distributed by the market over each of these collection of periods. The indicator uses the closing price's proximity to the high or low over the period to determine if accumulation or reduction is taking place in the market. The proximity measure if then multiplied by the volume over the period in order to give more weight to moves with correspondingly higher volume. Interpretation A divergence between the price action and the AccumulationDistribution indicator can signal that a trend is nearing completion, a trends continuation and break-outs from trading ranges. The actual value of this indicator is of no significance, what is significant is its change in value relative to the previous periods which can warn of a possible break-out during a trading range (falling/rising indicator), the continuation of a trend (higher highs in uptrend, or lower lows in downtrend) or a change/completion of a trend (divergence between the price action and the direction of the indicator). Example Say for example we know that: Highs = {3, 4, 3, 4, 5} (i.e. 3 is the latest high) Lows = {2, 1, 2, 1, 3}(i.e. 2 is the latest low) Volume = {300, 290, 295, 285, 290}(i.e. 300 is the volume in the latest period. Now if the lengthOfPeriod considered is 4, then this method will return an array of length two where the first term is the accumulation\distribution indicator (evaluated using AccumulationDistribution(string, Series)) when: Highs = {3, 4, 3, 4} (i.e. above highs with last element removed) Lows = {2, 1, 2, 1}(i.e. above highs with last element removed) Volume = {300, 290, 295, 285}(i.e. above highs with last element removed) and the second term is the accumulation/distribution indicator when: Highs = {4, 3, 4, 5} (i.e. the window moves one position back) Lows = {1, 2, 1, 3}(i.e. the window moves one position back) Volume = {290, 295, 285, 290}(i.e. the window moves one position back) The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A series where the first term is the most recent period, the second term is the previous period and so on. An integer which represents the number of periods within each of the (sub)collection of periods over which the indicator is evaluated.

Evaluates the accumulation/distribution indicator for each of the (sub)collection of periods of a given length.

The accumulation/distribution indicator illustrates the degree to which an asset is being accumulated or distributed by the market over each of these collection of periods. The indicator uses the closing price's proximity to the high or low over the period to determine if accumulation or reduction is taking place in the market. The proximity measure if then multiplied by the volume over the period in order to give more weight to moves with correspondingly higher volume. Interpretation A divergence between the price action and the AccumulationDistribution indicator can signal that a trend is nearing completion, a trends continuation and break-outs from trading ranges. The actual value of this indicator is of no significance, what is significant is its change in value relative to the previous periods which can warn of a possible break-out during a trading range (falling/rising indicator), the continuation of a trend (higher highs in uptrend, or lower lows in downtrend) or a change/completion of a trend (divergence between the price action and the direction of the indicator). Example Say for example we know that: Highs = {3, 4, 3, 4, 5} (i.e. 3 is the latest high) Lows = {2, 1, 2, 1, 3}(i.e. 2 is the latest low) Volume = {300, 290, 295, 285, 290}(i.e. 300 is the volume in the latest period. Now if the lengthOfPeriod considered is 4, then this method will return an array of length two where the first term is the accumulation\distribution indicator (evaluated using AccumulationDistribution) when: Highs = {3, 4, 3, 4} (i.e. above highs with last element removed) Lows = {2, 1, 2, 1}(i.e. above highs with last element removed) Volume = {300, 290, 295, 285}(i.e. above highs with last element removed) and the second term is the accumulation/distribution indicator when: Highs = {4, 3, 4, 5} (i.e. the window moves one position back) Lows = {1, 2, 1, 3}(i.e. the window moves one position back) Volume = {290, 295, 285, 290}(i.e. the window moves one position back) A series where the first term is the most recent period, the second term is the previous period and so on. An integer which represents the number of periods within each of the (sub)collection of periods over which the indicator is evaluated.

Evaluates the accumulation/distribution indicator for each of the (sub)collection of periods of a given length.

The accumulation/distribution indicator illustrates the degree to which an asset is being accumulated or distributed by the market over each of these collection of periods. The indicator uses the closing price's proximity to the high or low over the period to determine if accumulation or reduction is taking place in the market. The proximity measure if then multiplied by the volume over the period in order to give more weight to moves with correspondingly higher volume. Interpretation A divergence between the price action and the AccumulationDistribution indicator can signal that a trend is nearing completion, a trends continuation and break-outs from trading ranges. The actual value of this indicator is of no significance, what is significant is its change in value relative to the previous periods which can warn of a possible break-out during a trading range (falling/rising indicator), the continuation of a trend (higher highs in uptrend, or lower lows in downtrend) or a change/completion of a trend (divergence between the price action and the direction of the indicator). Example Say for example we know that: Highs = {3, 4, 3, 4, 5} (i.e. 3 is the latest high) Lows = {2, 1, 2, 1, 3}(i.e. 2 is the latest low) Volume = {300, 290, 295, 285, 290}(i.e. 300 is the volume in the latest period. Now if the lengthOfPeriod considered is 4, then this method will return an array of length two where the first term is the accumulation\distribution indicator (evaluated using AccumulationDistribution) when: Highs = {3, 4, 3, 4} (i.e. above highs with last element removed) Lows = {2, 1, 2, 1}(i.e. above highs with last element removed) Volume = {300, 290, 295, 285}(i.e. above highs with last element removed) and the second term is the accumulation/distribution indicator when: Highs = {4, 3, 4, 5} (i.e. the window moves one position back) Lows = {1, 2, 1, 3}(i.e. the window moves one position back) Volume = {290, 295, 285, 290}(i.e. the window moves one position back) A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. An integer which represents the number of periods within each of the (sub)collection of periods over which the indicator is evaluated.

Calculates the Aroon Down indicator which measures the relative time since the last lowest low for all periods for which sufficient data is provided.

The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A financial series.

Calculates the Aroon Down indicator which measures the relative time since the last lowest low for all periods for which sufficient data is provided.

A financial series.

Calculates the Aroon Down indicator which measures the relative time since the last lowest low for all periods for which sufficient data is provided.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Calculates the Aroon Down indicator which measures the relative time since the last lowest low for all periods for which sufficient data is provided.

The indicator for each period will return a value between 0 and 100, where a higher value indicates that the lowest low was achieved more recently. Persistent values between 70 and 100 are said to indicate weakness in the asset and in conjunction with a low range (i.e. 0-30) in the Aroon Up indicator, indicates an downward trend. Evaluation of the Aroon Down Indicator The Aroon Down indicator for each period is given by: 100(n - (number of days since last highest high over n days))/n where n is the number of days being considered (a reasonable default value for n is 14). The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A financial series where the first term is the traded high of the asset within the most recent trading period, the second term is the traded high of the asset within the previous period and so on. An integer which represents the length of the period over which the indicator will be iteratively evaluated.

Calculates the Aroon Down indicator which measures the relative time since the last lowest low for all periods for which sufficient data is provided.

The indicator for each period will return a value between 0 and 100, where a higher value indicates that the lowest low was achieved more recently. Persistent values between 70 and 100 are said to indicate weakness in the asset and in conjunction with a low range (i.e. 0-30) in the Aroon Up indicator, indicates an downward trend. Evaluation of the Aroon Down Indicator The Aroon Down indicator for each period is given by: 100(n - (number of days since last highest high over n days))/n where n is the number of days being considered (a reasonable default value for n is 14). A financial series where the first term is the traded high of the asset within the most recent trading period, the second term is the traded high of the asset within the previous period and so on. An integer which represents the length of the period over which the indicator will be iteratively evaluated.

Calculates the Aroon Down indicator which measures the relative time since the last lowest low for all periods for which sufficient data is provided.

The indicator for each period will return a value between 0 and 100, where a higher value indicates that the lowest low was achieved more recently. Persistent values between 70 and 100 are said to indicate weakness in the asset and in conjunction with a low range (i.e. 0-30) in the Aroon Up indicator, indicates an downward trend. Evaluation of the Aroon Down Indicator The Aroon Down indicator for each period is given by: 100(n - (number of days since last highest high over n days))/n where n is the number of days being considered (a reasonable default value for n is 14). A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. An integer which represents the length of the period over which the indicator will be iteratively evaluated.

Evaluates the Aroon Oscillator over the a given period.

Evaluation of the Aroon Oscillator The Aroon Oscillator over each period is evaluated using the following formulae: Aroon Oscillator = (Aroon Up Indicator) - (Aroon Down Indicator). The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A series where the first term is the traded low of the asset within the most recent trading period, the second term is the traded low of the asset within the previous period and so on.

Evaluates the Aroon Oscillator over the a given period.

Evaluation of the Aroon Oscillator The Aroon Oscillator over each period is evaluated using the following formulae: Aroon Oscillator = (Aroon Up Indicator) - (Aroon Down Indicator). A series where the first term is the traded low of the asset within the most recent trading period, the second term is the traded low of the asset within the previous period and so on.

Evaluates the Aroon Oscillator over the a given period.

Evaluation of the Aroon Oscillator The Aroon Oscillator over each period is evaluated using the following formulae: Aroon Oscillator = (Aroon Up Indicator) - (Aroon Down Indicator). The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Evaluates the Aroon Oscillator over the a given period.

Evaluation of the Aroon Oscillator The Aroon Oscillator over each period is evaluated using the following formulae: Aroon Oscillator = (Aroon Up Indicator) - (Aroon Down Indicator). A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Evaluates the Aroon Oscillator over all periods where sufficient historical data is provided.

Evaluation of the Aroon Oscillator The Aroon Oscillator over each period is evaluated using the following formulae: Aroon Oscillator = (Aroon Up Indicator) - (Aroon Down Indicator) where 'Aroon Up Indicator' and `Aroon Down Indicator' are evaluated using. The Aroon Up indicator is given by: 100(n - (number of days since last highest high over n days))/n where n is the number of days being considered (a reasonable default value for n is 14). The Aroon Down indicator is given by: 100(n - (number of days since last highest high over n days))/n where n is the number of days being considered (a reasonable default value for n is 14). A series where the first term is the value of the Aroon Oscillator for the most recent period, the second term is the value of the Aroon Oscillator for the previous period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A series where the first term is the traded high of the asset within the most recent trading period, the second term is the traded high of the asset within the previous period and so on. An integer which represents the length of the period over which the indicator will be iteratively evaluated.

Evaluates the Aroon Oscillator over all periods where sufficient historical data is provided.

Evaluation of the Aroon Oscillator The Aroon Oscillator over each period is evaluated using the following formulae: Aroon Oscillator = (Aroon Up Indicator) - (Aroon Down Indicator) where 'Aroon Up Indicator' and `Aroon Down Indicator' are evaluated using. The Aroon Up indicator is given by: 100(n - (number of days since last highest high over n days))/n where n is the number of days being considered (a reasonable default value for n is 14). The Aroon Down indicator is given by: 100(n - (number of days since last highest high over n days))/n where n is the number of days being considered (a reasonable default value for n is 14). A series where the first term is the value of the Aroon Oscillator for the most recent period, the second term is the value of the Aroon Oscillator for the previous period and so on. A series where the first term is the traded high of the asset within the most recent trading period, the second term is the traded high of the asset within the previous period and so on. An integer which represents the length of the period over which the indicator will be iteratively evaluated.

Evaluates the Aroon Oscillator over all periods where sufficient historical data is provided.

Evaluation of the Aroon Oscillator The Aroon Oscillator over each period is evaluated using the following formulae: Aroon Oscillator = (Aroon Up Indicator) - (Aroon Down Indicator) where 'Aroon Up Indicator' and `Aroon Down Indicator' are evaluated using. The Aroon Up indicator is given by: 100(n - (number of days since last highest high over n days))/n where n is the number of days being considered (a reasonable default value for n is 14). The Aroon Down indicator is given by: 100(n - (number of days since last highest high over n days))/n where n is the number of days being considered (a reasonable default value for n is 14). A series where the first term is the value of the Aroon Oscillator for the most recent period, the second term is the value of the Aroon Oscillator for the previous period and so on. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. An integer which represents the length of the period over which the indicator will be iteratively evaluated.

Evaluates the Aroon Up indicator which measures the relative time since the last highest high.

The indicator will return a value between 0 and 100, where a higher value indicates that the highest high was achieved more recently. Persistent values between 70 and 100 are said to indicate strength in the asset and in conjunction with a low range (i.e. 0-30) in the Aroon Down indicator, indicates an upward trend. Evaluation of the Aroon Up Indicator The Aroon Up indicator is given by: 100(n - (number of days since last highest high over n days))/n where n is the number of days being considered (a reasonable default value for n is 14). The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A series of the trading highs over the last n-periods where the k-th terms of the array if the trading high on the k-th previous period.

Evaluates the Aroon Up indicator which measures the relative time since the last highest high.

The indicator will return a value between 0 and 100, where a higher value indicates that the highest high was achieved more recently. Persistent values between 70 and 100 are said to indicate strength in the asset and in conjunction with a low range (i.e. 0-30) in the Aroon Down indicator, indicates an upward trend. Evaluation of the Aroon Up Indicator The Aroon Up indicator is given by: 100(n - (number of days since last highest high over n days))/n where n is the number of days being considered (a reasonable default value for n is 14). A series of the trading highs over the last n-periods where the k-th terms of the array if the trading high on the k-th previous period.

Evaluates the Aroon Up indicator which measures the relative time since the last highest high.

The indicator will return a value between 0 and 100, where a higher value indicates that the highest high was achieved more recently. Persistent values between 70 and 100 are said to indicate strength in the asset and in conjunction with a low range (i.e. 0-30) in the Aroon Down indicator, indicates an upward trend. Evaluation of the Aroon Up Indicator The Aroon Up indicator is given by: 100(n - (number of days since last highest high over n days))/n where n is the number of days being considered (a reasonable default value for n is 14). The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Evaluates the Aroon Up indicator which measures the relative time since the last highest high.

The indicator will return a value between 0 and 100, where a higher value indicates that the highest high was achieved more recently. Persistent values between 70 and 100 are said to indicate strength in the asset and in conjunction with a low range (i.e. 0-30) in the Aroon Down indicator, indicates an upward trend. Evaluation of the Aroon Up Indicator The Aroon Up indicator is given by: 100(n - (number of days since last highest high over n days))/n where n is the number of days being considered (a reasonable default value for n is 14). A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Evaluates the Aroon Up indicator which measures the relative time since the last highest high for all periods for which sufficient data is provided.

This indicator for each period will return a value between 0 and 100, where a higher value indicates that the highest high was achieved more recently. Persistent values between 70 and 100 are said to indicate strength in the asset and in conjunction with a low range(i.e. 0-30) of the Aroon Down indicator, indicates an upward trend. Evaluation of the Aroon Up Indicator The Aroon Up indicator for each period is given by: 100(n - (number of days since last highest high over n days))/n where n is the number of days being considered (a reasonable default value for n is 14). Returnsa series where the first term is the values of the Aroon Up indicator over the earliest set of consecutive periods and the second term is the value of the next set of the periods (i.e. the windows is moving one place along), and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An financial series of the trading highs over the last n-periods where the k-th term of the array if the trading high on the k-th previous period. An integer which represents the length of the period over which the indicator will be iteratively evaluated.

Evaluates the Aroon Up indicator which measures the relative time since the last highest high for all periods for which sufficient data is provided.

This indicator for each period will return a value between 0 and 100, where a higher value indicates that the highest high was achieved more recently. Persistent values between 70 and 100 are said to indicate strength in the asset and in conjunction with a low range(i.e. 0-30) of the Aroon Down indicator, indicates an upward trend. Evaluation of the Aroon Up Indicator The Aroon Up indicator for each period is given by: 100(n - (number of days since last highest high over n days))/n where n is the number of days being considered (a reasonable default value for n is 14). Returnsa series where the first term is the values of the Aroon Up indicator over the earliest set of consecutive periods and the second term is the value of the next set of the periods (i.e. the windows is moving one place along), and so on. An financial series of the trading highs over the last n-periods where the k-th term of the array if the trading high on the k-th previous period. An integer which represents the length of the period over which the indicator will be iteratively evaluated.

Evaluates the Aroon Up indicator which measures the relative time since the last highest high for all periods for which sufficient data is provided.

This indicator for each period will return a value between 0 and 100, where a higher value indicates that the highest high was achieved more recently. Persistent values between 70 and 100 are said to indicate strength in the asset and in conjunction with a low range(i.e. 0-30) of the Aroon Down indicator, indicates an upward trend. Evaluation of the Aroon Up Indicator The Aroon Up indicator for each period is given by: 100(n - (number of days since last highest high over n days))/n where n is the number of days being considered (a reasonable default value for n is 14). Returnsa series where the first term is the values of the Aroon Up indicator over the earliest set of consecutive periods and the second term is the value of the next set of the periods (i.e. the windows is moving one place along), and so on. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. An integer which represents the length of the period over which the indicator will be iteratively evaluated.

Evaluates the Average Price for each periods of a collection of periods.

The Average price is just the average of the High, Low, Open and Close of each of the trading periods ranges, where the period considered will generally a day, however the Average price is equally applicable to other time spans and hence the period considered could be (for example) a month or year. A series where the first element is the Average Price of the asset on the most recent period considered, the second term is the Average Price on the period before that and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A financial series, where the first element is the traded price on the most recent period, the second element is the traded price of the previous periods and so on, for the asset under consideration.

Evaluates the Average Price for each periods of a collection of periods.

The Average price is just the average of the High, Low, Open and Close of each of the trading periods ranges, where the period considered will generally a day, however the Average price is equally applicable to other time spans and hence the period considered could be (for example) a month or year. A series where the first element is the Average Price of the asset on the most recent period considered, the second term is the Average Price on the period before that and so on. A financial series where the first element is the traded price on the most recent period, the second element is the traded price of the previous periods and so on, for the asset under consideration.

Evaluates the Average Price for each periods of a collection of periods.

Evaluates the Balance of Power (BOP) indicator, created by Igor Livshin; which captures the struggle between the Bulls and Bears over a number of trading days.

An array is returned where the first term corresponds to the BOP of the last trading day, the second term gives the BOP on the previous trading day and so on. Interpretation The BOP indicator for each trading day lies within the range [-1,1]. When the BOP indicator is towards the high if its range it will signifies that the Bulls are in control, conversely when the indicator is towards the lows of its range it signifies that the bear are in control. If the indicator move from a high positive range to a lower positive range it signifies that the buying pressure is decreasing. Conversely, if the indicator move from a low negative range to a higher negative range it signifies that the selling pressure is decreasing. Evaluation The BOP indicator for each trading days is evaluated by the following formulae: BOP = (Close - Open)/(High - Low) where close is the days closing price, open is the days opening price, high is the highest traded price during the day and low is the lowest traded price during the day. A series is returned where the first term corresponds to the BOP of the last trading day, the second term gives the BOP on the previous trading day and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A series where the first element is the high in the last trading period, the second term is the high in the previous period and so on.

Evaluates the Balance of Power (BOP) indicator, created by Igor Livshin; which captures the struggle between the Bulls and Bears over a number of trading days.

An array is returned where the first term corresponds to the BOP of the last trading day, the second term gives the BOP on the previous trading day and so on. Interpretation The BOP indicator for each trading day lies within the range [-1,1]. When the BOP indicator is towards the high if its range it will signifies that the Bulls are in control, conversely when the indicator is towards the lows of its range it signifies that the bear are in control. If the indicator move from a high positive range to a lower positive range it signifies that the buying pressure is decreasing. Conversely, if the indicator move from a low negative range to a higher negative range it signifies that the selling pressure is decreasing. Evaluation The BOP indicator for each trading days is evaluated by the following formulae: BOP = (Close - Open)/(High - Low) where close is the days closing price, open is the days opening price, high is the highest traded price during the day and low is the lowest traded price during the day. A series is returned where the first term corresponds to the BOP of the last trading day, the second term gives the BOP on the previous trading day and so on. A series where the first element is the high in the last trading period, the second term is the high in the previous period and so on.

Evaluates the Balance of Power (BOP) indicator, created by Igor Livshin; which captures the struggle between the Bulls and Bears over a number of trading days.

An array is returned where the first term corresponds to the BOP of the last trading day, the second term gives the BOP on the previous trading day and so on. Interpretation The BOP indicator for each trading day lies within the range [-1,1]. When the BOP indicator is towards the high if its range it will signifies that the Bulls are in control, conversely when the indicator is towards the lows of its range it signifies that the bear are in control. If the indicator move from a high positive range to a lower positive range it signifies that the buying pressure is decreasing. Conversely, if the indicator move from a low negative range to a higher negative range it signifies that the selling pressure is decreasing. Evaluation The BOP indicator for each trading days is evaluated by the following formulae: BOP = (Close - Open)/(High - Low) where close is the days closing price, open is the days opening price, high is the highest traded price during the day and low is the lowest traded price during the day. A series is returned where the first term corresponds to the BOP of the last trading day, the second term gives the BOP on the previous trading day and so on. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Within this class we offer procedures which evaluate the upper and lower Bollinger Bands.

Iteratively evaluate the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF)indicator over all (sub)collections of periods of a given length for all periods for which data is provided.

In particular, this method returns an array where the 1st term of the CMF indicator for the latest period, the second term of the CMF in the previous period and so on. Please note that the CMF will be evaluated for all periods for which there is sufficient data (see example below for more details). Remark: The form in which the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF) in provided here is particularly suitable when wishing to integrated this functionality within a Client side GUI Charting Application. Details of Chaikin Money Flow (CMF) Chaikin Money Flow (CMF) is a volume weighted average of Accumulation/Distribution over a specified period, which is usually taken to be 21 days. The CMF offers a volume weighted indicator on the following two principles: The nearer the close is to the high the more accumulation is taking place. The nearer the close is to the low the more distribution is taking place. Evaluation The CMF indicator is evaluated for the following steps: Evaluate the Volume Weighted Accumulation/Distribution over each of the days within the period considered for the calculation. The Volume Weighted Accumulation/Distribution on each day is given by: (((Close - Low)-(High - Close))/(High - Low)) * Volume Sum the Volume Weighted Accumulation/Distribution over the period and the divide the result by the sum of the volume over the period. Example of Application Within this example we illustrate the way this method works when we consider a given 10 period in which the length of period over which the CHM is evaluated is 4. In this case the result will be an array of 7 elements as follows: result[0]: CMF calculated over the last four periods result[1]: CMF calculated over previous four periods ... result[7]: CMF calculated using the periods between the earliest period and the fourth from earliest period. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A financial series. An integer which represents the number of periods over which the indicator is calculated.

Iteratively evaluate the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF)indicator over all (sub)collections of periods of a given length for all periods for which data is provided.

In particular, this method returns an array where the 1st term of the CMF indicator for the latest period, the second term of the CMF in the previous period and so on. Please note that the CMF will be evaluated for all periods for which there is sufficient data (see example below for more details). Remark: The form in which the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF) in provided here is particularly suitable when wishing to integrated this functionality within a Client side GUI Charting Application. Details of Chaikin Money Flow (CMF) Chaikin Money Flow (CMF) is a volume weighted average of Accumulation/Distribution over a specified period, which is usually taken to be 21 days. The CMF offers a volume weighted indicator on the following two principles: The nearer the close is to the high the more accumulation is taking place. The nearer the close is to the low the more distribution is taking place. Evaluation The CMF indicator is evaluated for the following steps: Evaluate the Volume Weighted Accumulation/Distribution over each of the days within the period considered for the calculation. The Volume Weighted Accumulation/Distribution on each day is given by: (((Close - Low)-(High - Close))/(High - Low)) * Volume Sum the Volume Weighted Accumulation/Distribution over the period and the divide the result by the sum of the volume over the period. Example of Application Within this example we illustrate the way this method works when we consider a given 10 period in which the length of period over which the CHM is evaluated is 4. In this case the result will be an array of 7 elements as follows: result[0]: CMF calculated over the last four periods result[1]: CMF calculated over previous four periods ... result[7]: CMF calculated using the periods between the earliest period and the fourth from earliest period. A financial series. An integer which represents the number of periods over which the indicator is calculated.

Iteratively evaluate the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF)indicator over all (sub)collections of periods of a given length for all periods for which data is provided.

In particular, this method returns an array where the 1st term of the CMF indicator for the latest period, the second term of the CMF in the previous period and so on. Please note that the CMF will be evaluated for all periods for which there is sufficient data (see example below for more details). Remark: The form in which the Chaikin Money Flow (CMF) in provided here is particularly suitable when wishing to integrated this functionality within a Client side GUI Charting Application. Details of Chaikin Money Flow (CMF) Chaikin Money Flow (CMF) is a volume weighted average of Accumulation/Distribution over a specified period, which is usually taken to be 21 days. The CMF offers a volume weighted indicator on the following two principles: The nearer the close is to the high the more accumulation is taking place. The nearer the close is to the low the more distribution is taking place. Evaluation The CMF indicator is evaluated for the following steps: Evaluate the Volume Weighted Accumulation/Distribution over each of the days within the period considered for the calculation. The Volume Weighted Accumulation/Distribution on each day is given by: (((Close - Low)-(High - Close))/(High - Low)) * Volume Sum the Volume Weighted Accumulation/Distribution over the period and the divide the result by the sum of the volume over the period. Example of Application Within this example we illustrate the way this method works when we consider a given 10 period in which the length of period over which the CHM is evaluated is 4. In this case the result will be an array of 7 elements as follows: result[0]: CMF calculated over the last four periods result[1]: CMF calculated over previous four periods ... result[7]: CMF calculated using the periods between the earliest period and the fourth from earliest period. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. An integer which represents the number of periods over which the indicator is calculated.

This method implements the Chaikin Oscillator (also known as the Chaikin A/D Oscillator) and evaluates this indicator for the latest and all previous periods for which there exists sufficient data.

The Chaikin Oscillator presents the information contained within the A/D indicator in the convenient form of an oscillator. That is, the Chaikin Oscillator is simply the Moving Average Convergence Divergence indicator (MACD) applied to the Accumulation/Distribution Line. Interpretation A sell signal is when price action develops a higher high into overbought zones and the Chaikin Oscillator diverges with a lower high and begins to fall. Conversely, a buy signal is generated when price action develops a lower low into oversold zones and the oscillator diverges with a higher low and begins to rise. The Chaikin Oscillator can also be used to time entry to existing trends by either buying the dip (when the oscillator turns down) or selling the rally (when the oscillator turns up). Evaluation The Chaiken Oscillator for a given period is given by: EMA_3(Accumulate/Distribution) - EMA_10(Accumulate/Distribution), where EMA_3 and EMA_10 is the exponential moving average over 3 and 10 days respectively; and Accumulate/Distribution is the corresponding indicator over those 3 or 10 days respectively. Illustration If we are provided within the high, low and volume over the last 15 periods, then we will be able to evaluate the Chaikin Oscillator on the previous 5 trading days. Since the evaluation of the oscillator on a given period requires knowledge of the 10 previous periods data. A series where the first term is the value of the oscillator using the last 10 days data, the previous term is the value of the oscillator on the previous period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A financial series. The number between 0 and 1. The lower the number the more sensitive the indicator is.

This method implements the Chaikin Oscillator (also known as the Chaikin A/D Oscillator) and evaluates this indicator for the latest and all previous periods for which there exists sufficient data.

The Chaikin Oscillator presents the information contained within the A/D indicator in the convenient form of an oscillator. That is, the Chaikin Oscillator is simply the Moving Average Convergence Divergence indicator (MACD) applied to the Accumulation/Distribution Line. Interpretation A sell signal is when price action develops a higher high into overbought zones and the Chaikin Oscillator diverges with a lower high and begins to fall. Conversely, a buy signal is generated when price action develops a lower low into oversold zones and the oscillator diverges with a higher low and begins to rise. The Chaikin Oscillator can also be used to time entry to existing trends by either buying the dip (when the oscillator turns down) or selling the rally (when the oscillator turns up). Evaluation The Chaiken Oscillator for a given period is given by: EMA_3(Accumulate/Distribution) - EMA_10(Accumulate/Distribution), where EMA_3 and EMA_10 is the exponential moving average over 3 and 10 days respectively; and Accumulate/Distribution is the corresponding indicator over those 3 or 10 days respectively. Illustration If we are provided within the high, low and volume over the last 15 periods, then we will be able to evaluate the Chaikin Oscillator on the previous 5 trading days. Since the evaluation of the oscillator on a given period requires knowledge of the 10 previous periods data. A series where the first term is the value of the oscillator using the last 10 days data, the previous term is the value of the oscillator on the previous period and so on. A financial series. The number between 0 and 1. The lower the number the more sensitive the indicator is.

This method implements the Chaikin Oscillator (also known as the Chaikin A/D Oscillator) and evaluates this indicator for the latest and all previous periods for which there exists sufficient data.

The Chaikin Oscillator presents the information contained within the A/D indicator in the convenient form of an oscillator. That is, the Chaikin Oscillator is simply the Moving Average Convergence Divergence indicator (MACD) applied to the Accumulation/Distribution Line. Interpretation A sell signal is when price action develops a higher high into overbought zones and the Chaikin Oscillator diverges with a lower high and begins to fall. Conversely, a buy signal is generated when price action develops a lower low into oversold zones and the oscillator diverges with a higher low and begins to rise. The Chaikin Oscillator can also be used to time entry to existing trends by either buying the dip (when the oscillator turns down) or selling the rally (when the oscillator turns up). Evaluation The Chaiken Oscillator for a given period is given by: EMA_3(Accumulate/Distribution) - EMA_10(Accumulate/Distribution), where EMA_3 and EMA_10 is the exponential moving average over 3 and 10 days respectively; and Accumulate/Distribution is the corresponding indicator over those 3 or 10 days respectively. Illustration If we are provided within the high, low and volume over the last 15 periods, then we will be able to evaluate the Chaikin Oscillator on the previous 5 trading days. Since the evaluation of the oscillator on a given period requires knowledge of the 10 previous periods data. A series where the first term is the value of the oscillator using the last 10 days data, the previous term is the value of the oscillator on the previous period and so on. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. The number between 0 and 1. The lower the number the more sensitive the indicator is.

Chaikin's Volatility indicator compares the spread between a security's high and low prices.

It quantifies volatility as a widening of the range between the high and the low price. Indicator Formula The formula for this indicator is: chaikinVolatility = ((H-LAverage - H-LAverage_n_periods_ago)/H-LAverage_n_periods_ago)*100 The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A financial series. The number of periods considered within the evaluation of the moving average for each of the periods on which it can be evaluated. An integer which represents the number of previous time periods used over which the comparing moving average is taken.

Chaikin's Volatility indicator compares the spread between a security's high and low prices.

It quantifies volatility as a widening of the range between the high and the low price. Indicator Formula The formula for this indicator is: chaikinVolatility = ((H-LAverage - H-LAverage_n_periods_ago)/H-LAverage_n_periods_ago)*100 A financial series. The number of periods considered within the evaluation of the moving average for each of the periods on which it can be evaluated. An integer which represents the number of previous time periods used over which the comparing moving average is taken.

Chaikin's Volatility indicator compares the spread between a security's high and low prices.

It quantifies volatility as a widening of the range between the high and the low price. Indicator Formula The formula for this indicator is: chaikinVolatility = ((H-LAverage - H-LAverage_n_periods_ago)/H-LAverage_n_periods_ago)*100 A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. The number of periods considered within the evaluation of the moving average for each of the periods on which it can be evaluated. An integer which represents the number of previous time periods used over which the comparing moving average is taken.

This indicator is a generalization of the CommodityChannelIndex indicator and calculates the values of the commodityChannelIndex indicator over all sub-periods of a given length.

The CCI measures the variation of a security's price from its statistical mean. High values show that prices are unusually high compared to average prices whereas low values indicate that prices are unusually low. The CCI can be used effectively on any type of security, but clearly it is most applicable where the security has should a strong degree on mean reversion. Lambert originally commended that the CCI was designed to capture the trade cycle (i.e. low-to-low or high-to-high) turns in commodity markets. The system assumes that commodities move in cycles and uses 1/3 of the cycle period for the evaluation of the CCI. We allow the uses to specify the length of the calculation period used but we advise that you take the calculation cycle to be approximately one third of your estimate for the length of the trade cycle. Calculation Period: the number of days used in the evaluation of the CCI. In Donald Lambert's original system this was taken to be one third of the estimate length of the trade cycle. Remark: Within the evaluation procedure (step 2), we multiply the result by the constant 0.015. The constant was originally used in Lambert's system and has been found to ensure that around 70-80 percent of all the values given by the CCI lie the range [-100,+100]. Hence, the constant is just used to calibrate the indicator with respect to the range [-100, +100]. Interpretation Significant signals are generated when either the CCI starts to diverge from the price action which will signify a correlation in the price, or when the CCI extended (typically above 100 or below -100) which indicates oversold or over brought conditions. Further details concerning the CCI can be found in an article by Donald Lambert that appeared in the October 1980 issue of Commodities (now known as Futures) Magazine. Evaluation Procedure We summaries our basic evaluation procedure by the following three steps: First evaluate the simple moving average (SMA) of the Typical Price Indicator (see Filters) over the calculation period. Evaluate the SMA over the calculation period of the absolute value on each on the calculation period days between the Typical Price on that day and the SMA found in step 1 above, and multiply the result by 0.015. Divide todays typical price minus the SMA of the typical price found in step 1, by the result given by step 2. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A series where the first element is the high in the last trading period, the second term is the high in the previous period and so on. An integer which represents the length of the period over which the indicator will be iteratively evaluated.

This indicator is a generalization of the CommodityChannelIndex indicator and calculates the values of the commodityChannelIndex indicator over all sub-periods of a given length.

The CCI measures the variation of a security's price from its statistical mean. High values show that prices are unusually high compared to average prices whereas low values indicate that prices are unusually low. The CCI can be used effectively on any type of security, but clearly it is most applicable where the security has should a strong degree on mean reversion. Lambert originally commended that the CCI was designed to capture the trade cycle (i.e. low-to-low or high-to-high) turns in commodity markets. The system assumes that commodities move in cycles and uses 1/3 of the cycle period for the evaluation of the CCI. We allow the uses to specify the length of the calculation period used but we advise that you take the calculation cycle to be approximately one third of your estimate for the length of the trade cycle. Calculation Period: the number of days used in the evaluation of the CCI. In Donald Lambert's original system this was taken to be one third of the estimate length of the trade cycle. Remark: Within the evaluation procedure (step 2), we multiply the result by the constant 0.015. The constant was originally used in Lambert's system and has been found to ensure that around 70-80 percent of all the values given by the CCI lie the range [-100,+100]. Hence, the constant is just used to calibrate the indicator with respect to the range [-100, +100]. Interpretation Significant signals are generated when either the CCI starts to diverge from the price action which will signify a correlation in the price, or when the CCI extended (typically above 100 or below -100) which indicates oversold or over brought conditions. Further details concerning the CCI can be found in an article by Donald Lambert that appeared in the October 1980 issue of Commodities (now known as Futures) Magazine. Evaluation Procedure We summaries our basic evaluation procedure by the following three steps: First evaluate the simple moving average (SMA) of the Typical Price Indicator (see Filters) over the calculation period. Evaluate the SMA over the calculation period of the absolute value on each on the calculation period days between the Typical Price on that day and the SMA found in step 1 above, and multiply the result by 0.015. Divide todays typical price minus the SMA of the typical price found in step 1, by the result given by step 2. A series where the first element is the high in the last trading period, the second term is the high in the previous period and so on. An integer which represents the length of the period over which the indicator will be iteratively evaluated.

This indicator is a generalization of the CommodityChannelIndex indicator and calculates the values of the commodityChannelIndex indicator over all sub-periods of a given length.

The CCI measures the variation of a security's price from its statistical mean. High values show that prices are unusually high compared to average prices whereas low values indicate that prices are unusually low. The CCI can be used effectively on any type of security, but clearly it is most applicable where the security has should a strong degree on mean reversion. Lambert originally commended that the CCI was designed to capture the trade cycle (i.e. low-to-low or high-to-high) turns in commodity markets. The system assumes that commodities move in cycles and uses 1/3 of the cycle period for the evaluation of the CCI. We allow the uses to specify the length of the calculation period used but we advise that you take the calculation cycle to be approximately one third of your estimate for the length of the trade cycle. Calculation Period: the number of days used in the evaluation of the CCI. In Donald Lambert's original system this was taken to be one third of the estimate length of the trade cycle. Remark: Within the evaluation procedure (step 2), we multiply the result by the constant 0.015. The constant was originally used in Lambert's system and has been found to ensure that around 70-80 percent of all the values given by the CCI lie the range [-100,+100]. Hence, the constant is just used to calibrate the indicator with respect to the range [-100, +100]. Interpretation Significant signals are generated when either the CCI starts to diverge from the price action which will signify a correlation in the price, or when the CCI extended (typically above 100 or below -100) which indicates oversold or over brought conditions. Further details concerning the CCI can be found in an article by Donald Lambert that appeared in the October 1980 issue of Commodities (now known as Futures) Magazine. Evaluation Procedure We summaries our basic evaluation procedure by the following three steps: First evaluate the simple moving average (SMA) of the Typical Price Indicator (see Filters) over the calculation period. Evaluate the SMA over the calculation period of the absolute value on each on the calculation period days between the Typical Price on that day and the SMA found in step 1 above, and multiply the result by 0.015. Divide todays typical price minus the SMA of the typical price found in step 1, by the result given by step 2. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. An integer which represents the length of the period over which the indicator will be iteratively evaluated.

This trading system combines the features of the crossing and extremum value trading systems by requiring that a signal will only be generated if the fast K Stochastic crosses the slow D Stochastic either above or below the extremal values.

Trading System Rules This system generates buy and sell signals respectively when one of the following is triggered: Buy Signal: When the fast K Stochastic crosses above the slow D Stochastic and this crossing takes place at a value lower than the extremumLow, then a buy signal is generated. Sell Signal: When the fast K Stochastic crosses above the slow D Stochastic and this crossing takes place at a value higher than the extremumHigh, then a sell signal in generated. -1, 0, 1 - this method returns either -1, 0, 1 to indicate that either a sell, no action or buy signal was generated. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An financial series where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on. This is the level at which the Stochastic is believed to indicate an oversold level. The Stochastic always lies between 0 and 100, and a suggested extreme low value to take is 20. This is the level at which the Stochastic is believed to indicate an over brought level. The Stochastic always lies between 0 and 100, and a suggested extreme high value is 80. An integer which represents the number of periods used over which the closing price is compared. Determines the methods used for the evaluation of the moving average in accordance with the following key: 1 = Simple moving average 2 = Geometric moving average 3 = Linearly weighted moving average 4 = Exponentially Weighted Moving average within smoothing fact set to be 0.5. For further details concerning the definition of these moving averages please see the accompanying PDF documentation or the API documentation for Int32).. The number of periods over which the moving average is considered.

Trading System Rules This system generates buy and sell signals respectively when one of the following is triggered: Buy Signal: When the fast K Stochastic crosses above the slow D Stochastic and this crossing takes place at a value lower than the extremumLow, then a buy signal is generated. Sell Signal: When the fast K Stochastic crosses above the slow D Stochastic and this crossing takes place at a value higher than the extremumHigh, then a sell signal in generated. -1, 0, 1 - this method returns either -1, 0, 1 to indicate that either a sell, no action or buy signal was generated. An financial series where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on. This is the level at which the Stochastic is believed to indicate an oversold level. The Stochastic always lies between 0 and 100, and a suggested extreme low value to take is 20. This is the level at which the Stochastic is believed to indicate an over brought level. The Stochastic always lies between 0 and 100, and a suggested extreme high value is 80. An integer which represents the number of periods used over which the closing price is compared. Determines the methods used for the evaluation of the moving average in accordance with the following key: 1 = Simple moving average 2 = Geometric moving average 3 = Linearly weighted moving average 4 = Exponentially Weighted Moving average within smoothing fact set to be 0.5. For further details concerning the definition of these moving averages please see the accompanying PDF documentation or the API documentation for Int32).. The number of periods over which the moving average is considered.

Trading System Rules This system generates buy and sell signals respectively when one of the following is triggered: Buy Signal: When the fast K Stochastic crosses above the slow D Stochastic and this crossing takes place at a value lower than the extremumLow, then a buy signal is generated. Sell Signal: When the fast K Stochastic crosses above the slow D Stochastic and this crossing takes place at a value higher than the extremumHigh, then a sell signal in generated. -1, 0, 1 - this method returns either -1, 0, 1 to indicate that either a sell, no action or buy signal was generated. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. This is the level at which the Stochastic is believed to indicate an oversold level. The Stochastic always lies between 0 and 100, and a suggested extreme low value to take is 20. This is the level at which the Stochastic is believed to indicate an over brought level. The Stochastic always lies between 0 and 100, and a suggested extreme high value is 80. An integer which represents the number of periods used over which the closing price is compared. Determines the methods used for the evaluation of the moving average in accordance with the following key: 1 = Simple moving average 2 = Geometric moving average 3 = Linearly weighted moving average 4 = Exponentially Weighted Moving average within smoothing fact set to be 0.5. For further details concerning the definition of these moving averages please see the accompanying PDF documentation or the API documentation for Int32).. The number of periods over which the moving average is considered.

Implements a general framework for producing trading signals based on the crossing of two Stochastics.

Methodology Buy when the Stochastic K, crosses above the MA D and sell when the Stochastic K falls below the MA of Stochastic D. Since this approach is prone to being whip-sawed we use two (general) Stochastics so that a MA of the K Stochastic of the first Stochastic and an even more smoothed second Stochastic. In this case a sell signal is generated if the first (more sensitive) Stochastic cross below the second (smoothed) Stochastic, and a buy signal is generated if the first Stochastic crosses above the second Stochastic. -1, 0, 1 - this method returns either -1, 0, 1 to indicate that either a sell, no action or buy signal was generated. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An financial series where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on. An integer which represents the number of periods used over which the closing price is compared. Determines the methods used for the evaluation of the moving average in accordance with the following key: 1 = Simple moving average 2 = Geometric moving average 3 = Linearly weighted moving average 4 = Exponentially Weighted Moving average within smoothing fact set to be 0.5. The number of periods over which the moving average is considered.

Implements a general framework for producing trading signals based on the crossing of two Stochastics.

Methodology Buy when the Stochastic K, crosses above the MA D and sell when the Stochastic K falls below the MA of Stochastic D. Since this approach is prone to being whip-sawed we use two (general) Stochastics so that a MA of the K Stochastic of the first Stochastic and an even more smoothed second Stochastic. In this case a sell signal is generated if the first (more sensitive) Stochastic cross below the second (smoothed) Stochastic, and a buy signal is generated if the first Stochastic crosses above the second Stochastic. -1, 0, 1 - this method returns either -1, 0, 1 to indicate that either a sell, no action or buy signal was generated. An series where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on. An integer which represents the number of periods used over which the closing price is compared. Determines the methods used for the evaluation of the moving average in accordance with the following key: 1 = Simple moving average 2 = Geometric moving average 3 = Linearly weighted moving average 4 = Exponentially Weighted Moving average within smoothing fact set to be 0.5. The number of periods over which the moving average is considered.

Implements a general framework for producing trading signals based on the crossing of two Stochastics.

Methodology Buy when the Stochastic K, crosses above the MA D and sell when the Stochastic K falls below the MA of Stochastic D. Since this approach is prone to being whip-sawed we use two (general) Stochastics so that a MA of the K Stochastic of the first Stochastic and an even more smoothed second Stochastic. In this case a sell signal is generated if the first (more sensitive) Stochastic cross below the second (smoothed) Stochastic, and a buy signal is generated if the first Stochastic crosses above the second Stochastic. -1, 0, 1 - this method returns either -1, 0, 1 to indicate that either a sell, no action or buy signal was generated. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. An integer which represents the number of periods used over which the closing price is compared. Determines the methods used for the evaluation of the moving average in accordance with the following key: 1 = Simple moving average 2 = Geometric moving average 3 = Linearly weighted moving average 4 = Exponentially Weighted Moving average within smoothing fact set to be 0.5. The number of periods over which the moving average is considered.

Calculates the Directional Indicator which forms the main part of the Directional Movement System developed by Wellas Wilder.

This indicator is generally evaluated using 14 periods and is used with the PlusDirectionalMovement and MinusDirectionalMovement indicators. Evaluation The Directional Movement Indicator can be summarized by the following formula: Directional Movement Indicator = 100 * ( (PDM - MDM) / (PDM + MDM) ), where PDM is the Plus Directional Movement (PDM) indicator over the last two trading periods which can be evaluated using PlusDirectionalMovement and MDM is the Minus Directional Movement (MDM) indicator over the last two trading periods which can be evaluated using MinusDirectionalMovement. Interpretation The directional indicator has a range of [0,100], where to higher the value returned the stronger the trend is said to be. If a trend is reliable then the smoothed directional lines (PDM and MDM) will diverge and the indicator will increase. If on the other hand a trend starts to fail and price whip-saws (for example with price is within a trading range) the difference between the smoothed direction lines will decrease and the overall index will decrease. A series with the k-th term corresponds to the DM of the k-th Bar. That is, where the PDM and MDM parameters where both evaluated with respect to the last two trading periods. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A financial series where the first element contain the prices of last trading period, the second element represents the prices of the previous periods and so on. Please note that in order to calculate this indicator the elements of the financial series must contain High, Low and Close values.

Calculates the Directional Indicator which forms the main part of the Directional Movement System developed by Wellas Wilder.

This indicator is generally evaluated using 14 periods and is used with the PlusDirectionalMovement and MinusDirectionalMovement indicators. Evaluation The Directional Movement Indicator can be summarized by the following formula: Directional Movement Indicator = 100 * ( (PDM - MDM) / (PDM + MDM) ), where PDM is the Plus Directional Movement (PDM) indicator over the last two trading periods which can be evaluated using PlusDirectionalMovement and MDM is the Minus Directional Movement (MDM) indicator over the last two trading periods which can be evaluated using MinusDirectionalMovement. Interpretation The directional indicator has a range of [0,100], where to higher the value returned the stronger the trend is said to be. If a trend is reliable then the smoothed directional lines (PDM and MDM) will diverge and the indicator will increase. If on the other hand a trend starts to fail and price whip-saws (for example with price is within a trading range) the difference between the smoothed direction lines will decrease and the overall index will decrease. A series with the k-th term corresponds to the DM of the k-th Bar. That is, where the PDM and MDM parameters where both evaluated with respect to the last two trading periods. A financial series where the first element contain the prices of last trading period, the second element represents the prices of the previous periods and so on. Please note that in order to calculate this indicator the elements of the financial series must contain High, Low and Close values.

Calculates the Directional Indicator which forms the main part of the Directional Movement System developed by Wellas Wilder.

This indicator is generally evaluated using 14 periods and is used with the PlusDirectionalMovement and MinusDirectionalMovement indicators. Evaluation The Directional Movement Indicator can be summarized by the following formula: Directional Movement Indicator = 100 * ( (PDM - MDM) / (PDM + MDM) ), where PDM is the Plus Directional Movement (PDM) indicator over the last two trading periods which can be evaluated using PlusDirectionalMovement and MDM is the Minus Directional Movement (MDM) indicator over the last two trading periods which can be evaluated using MinusDirectionalMovement. Interpretation The directional indicator has a range of [0,100], where to higher the value returned the stronger the trend is said to be. If a trend is reliable then the smoothed directional lines (PDM and MDM) will diverge and the indicator will increase. If on the other hand a trend starts to fail and price whip-saws (for example with price is within a trading range) the difference between the smoothed direction lines will decrease and the overall index will decrease. A collections of series. Each series has the k-th term corresponds to the DM of the k-th Bar. That is, where the PDM and MDM parameters where both evaluated with respect to the last two trading periods. A collection of financial series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.Please note that in order to calculate this indicator the elements of the financial series must contain High, Low and Close values.

Evaluates what is know as the Directional Motion Indicator (MDI) Trading Signal.

This signal determines whether a given asset or index should be sold, brought or no action should be taken for a given asset under consideration. This trading signal forms the basis of the DMI Trading System which was developed by Welles Wilder. At its simplest level to DMI system states that when the PDI crosses above the MDI a buy signal is generated and when the MDI crosses above the PMI then a sell signal is generated. This however may generate an excessive number of signals and hence we offer the possibility to smooth out these indicators according to a moving average which will help to reduce to sensitivity of the trading system. Advantages to this Approach This trading approach will reveal a trend before it is detected by most market participants. Once the trend becomes more widely recognized other market participants will tend to buy the tend and hence re-enforcing the trend dynamics. Hence the DMI system offers a good risk/reward trend following system. Returns -1, 0, or 1 respectively according to whether a sell, no action or buy signal is generated. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A financial series where the first element contain the prices of last trading period, the second element represents the prices of the previous periods and so on. Please note that in order to calculate this indicator the elements of the financial series must contain High, Low and Close values. Determines the methods used for the evaluation of the moving average in accordance with the following key: 1 = Simple moving average 2 = Geometric moving average 3 = Linearly weighted moving average 4 = Exponentially Weighted Moving average within smoothing fact set to be 0.5. For further details concerning the definition of these moving averages please see the accompanying PDF documentation or the API documentation for Int32). The number of periods over which the moving average is considered.

Evaluates what is know as the Directional Motion Indicator (MDI) Trading Signal.

This signal determines whether a given asset or index should be sold, brought or no action should be taken for a given asset under consideration. This trading signal forms the basis of the DMI Trading System which was developed by Welles Wilder. At its simplest level to DMI system states that when the PDI crosses above the MDI a buy signal is generated and when the MDI crosses above the PMI then a sell signal is generated. This however may generate an excessive number of signals and hence we offer the possibility to smooth out these indicators according to a moving average which will help to reduce to sensitivity of the trading system. Advantages to this Approach This trading approach will reveal a trend before it is detected by most market participants. Once the trend becomes more widely recognized other market participants will tend to buy the tend and hence re-enforcing the trend dynamics. Hence the DMI system offers a good risk/reward trend following system. Returns -1, 0, or 1 respectively according to whether a sell, no action or buy signal is generated. A financial series where the first element contain the prices of last trading period, the second element represents the prices of the previous periods and so on. Please note that in order to calculate this indicator the elements of the financial series must contain High, Low and Close values. Determines the methods used for the evaluation of the moving average in accordance with the following key: 1 = Simple moving average 2 = Geometric moving average 3 = Linearly weighted moving average 4 = Exponentially Weighted Moving average within smoothing fact set to be 0.5. For further details concerning the definition of these moving averages please see the accompanying PDF documentation or the API documentation for Int32). The number of periods over which the moving average is considered.

Evaluates what is know as the Directional Motion Indicator (MDI) Trading Signal.

This signal determines whether a given asset or index should be sold, brought or no action should be taken for a given asset under consideration. This trading signal forms the basis of the DMI Trading System which was developed by Welles Wilder. At its simplest level to DMI system states that when the PDI crosses above the MDI a buy signal is generated and when the MDI crosses above the PMI then a sell signal is generated. This however may generate an excessive number of signals and hence we offer the possibility to smooth out these indicators according to a moving average which will help to reduce to sensitivity of the trading system. Advantages to this Approach This trading approach will reveal a trend before it is detected by most market participants. Once the trend becomes more widely recognized other market participants will tend to buy the tend and hence re-enforcing the trend dynamics. Hence the DMI system offers a good risk/reward trend following system. Returns -1, 0, or 1 respectively according to whether a sell, no action or buy signal is generated. A collection of financial series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.Please note that in order to calculate this indicator the elements of the financial series must contain High, Low and Close values. Determines the methods used for the evaluation of the moving average in accordance with the following key: 1 = Simple moving average 2 = Geometric moving average 3 = Linearly weighted moving average 4 = Exponentially Weighted Moving average within smoothing fact set to be 0.5. For further details concerning the definition of these moving averages please see the accompanying PDF documentation or the API documentation for Int32). The number of periods over which the moving average is considered.

Evaluate the (general) D Stochastic.

This is just the moving average of the (fast) K Stochastic. When the simple moving average is used and the moving average is take over three days, the resulting indicator to referred to as the (slow) K Stochastic. As one would expect the Moving Average D of the K Stochastic depends on: D Periods - The number of periods over which the moving average is evaluated. MA Method - This is the method by which the moving average of the Stochastic K is evaluated. We offer a range of methods for the evaluation of the moving average, these include: simple, exponential, geometric, weighted, linearly weighted and exponentially weighted. Remark When the simple moving average is used and it is evaluated over 3-days, then the D Stochastic reduces to what is known as the slow K Stochastic. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An financial series where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on. An integer which represents the number of periods used over which the closing price is compared. Determines the methods used for the evaluation of the moving average in accordance with the following key: 1 = Simple moving average 2 = Geometric moving average 3 = Linearly weighted moving average 4 = Exponentially Weighted Moving average within smoothing fact set to be 0.5. For further details concerning the definition of these moving averages please see the accompanying PDF documentation or the API documentation for Int32). The number of periods over which the moving average is considered.

Evaluate the (general) D Stochastic.

This is just the moving average of the (fast) K Stochastic. When the simple moving average is used and the moving average is take over three days, the resulting indicator to referred to as the (slow) K Stochastic. As one would expect the Moving Average D of the K Stochastic depends on: D Periods - The number of periods over which the moving average is evaluated. MA Method - This is the method by which the moving average of the Stochastic K is evaluated. We offer a range of methods for the evaluation of the moving average, these include: simple, exponential, geometric, weighted, linearly weighted and exponentially weighted. Remark When the simple moving average is used and it is evaluated over 3-days, then the D Stochastic reduces to what is known as the slow K Stochastic. An financial series where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on. An integer which represents the number of periods used over which the closing price is compared. Determines the methods used for the evaluation of the moving average in accordance with the following key: 1 = Simple moving average 2 = Geometric moving average 3 = Linearly weighted moving average 4 = Exponentially Weighted Moving average within smoothing fact set to be 0.5. For further details concerning the definition of these moving averages please see the accompanying PDF documentation or the API documentation for Int32). The number of periods over which the moving average is considered.

Evaluate the (general) D Stochastic.

This is just the moving average of the (fast) K Stochastic. When the simple moving average is used and the moving average is take over three days, the resulting indicator to referred to as the (slow) K Stochastic. As one would expect the Moving Average D of the K Stochastic depends on: D Periods - The number of periods over which the moving average is evaluated. MA Method - This is the method by which the moving average of the Stochastic K is evaluated. We offer a range of methods for the evaluation of the moving average, these include: simple, exponential, geometric, weighted, linearly weighted and exponentially weighted. Remark When the simple moving average is used and it is evaluated over 3-days, then the D Stochastic reduces to what is known as the slow K Stochastic. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. An integer which represents the number of periods used over which the closing price is compared. Determines the methods used for the evaluation of the moving average in accordance with the following key: 1 = Simple moving average 2 = Geometric moving average 3 = Linearly weighted moving average 4 = Exponentially Weighted Moving average within smoothing fact set to be 0.5. For further details concerning the definition of these moving averages please see the accompanying PDF documentation or the API documentation for Int32). The number of periods over which the moving average is considered.

Evaluates the (x-day) Exponentially Weighted Moving Average(EWMA) of a time series provided where x is the length of the time series array which is provided as a parameter, for all periods for which sufficient data is provided.

A series where the first term is the EWMA for the most recent period, the second term is the EWMA for the previous period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A series where the first value corresponds to the value of the asset in the tth period, and the second value corresponds to the value of the asset in the t-1-th period and so on. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The number between 0 and 1 which is known as a smoothing factor. The closer the value is to zero the more influence more resent measurements will have on the EWMA. The number of periods over which the moving average is evaluated for each period.

A series where the first term is the EWMA for the most recent period, the second term is the EWMA for the previous period and so on. A series where the first value corresponds to the value of the asset in the tth period, and the second value corresponds to the value of the asset in the t-1-th period and so on. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The number between 0 and 1 which is known as a smoothing factor. The closer the value is to zero the more influence more resent measurements will have on the EWMA. The number of periods over which the moving average is evaluated for each period.

A series where the first term is the EWMA for the most recent period, the second term is the EWMA for the previous period and so on. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The number between 0 and 1 which is known as a smoothing factor. The closer the value is to zero the more influence more resent measurements will have on the EWMA. The number of periods over which the moving average is evaluated for each period.

Implements a general framework for producing extreme value trading signals using Stochastic indicators.

Note, that the general ides of this approach is to seek points which are oversold or over brought levels which are turning. Methodology Buy when the Oscillator the Stochastic D falls below a specific level (e.g. 20) and then rises above that level. Sell when the Oscillator rises above a specific level (e.g. 80) and then falls below that level. This approach is the preferred method of the Stochastics original creator George Lane. -1, 0, 1 - this method returns either -1, 0, 1 to indicate that either a sell, no action or buy signal was generated. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A financial series where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on. This is the level at which the Stochastic is believed to indicate an oversold level. The Stochastic always lies between 0 and 100, and a suggested extreme low value to take is 20. This is the level at which the Stochastic is believed to indicate an over brought level. The Stochastic always lies between 0 and 100, and a suggested extreme high value is 80. An integer which represents the number of periods used over which the closing price is compared. Determines the methods used for the evaluation of the moving average in accordance with the following key: 1 = Simple moving average 2 = Geometric moving average 3 = Linearly weighted moving average 4 = Exponentially Weighted Moving average within smoothing fact set to be 0.5. For further details concerning the definition of these moving averages please see the accompanying PDF documentation or the API documentation for Int32). The number of periods over which the moving average is considered.

Implements a general framework for producing extreme value trading signals using Stochastic indicators.

Note, that the general ides of this approach is to seek points which are oversold or over brought levels which are turning. Methodology Buy when the Oscillator the Stochastic D falls below a specific level (e.g. 20) and then rises above that level. Sell when the Oscillator rises above a specific level (e.g. 80) and then falls below that level. This approach is the preferred method of the Stochastics original creator George Lane. -1, 0, 1 - this method returns either -1, 0, 1 to indicate that either a sell, no action or buy signal was generated. A financial series where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on. This is the level at which the Stochastic is believed to indicate an oversold level. The Stochastic always lies between 0 and 100, and a suggested extreme low value to take is 20. This is the level at which the Stochastic is believed to indicate an over brought level. The Stochastic always lies between 0 and 100, and a suggested extreme high value is 80. An integer which represents the number of periods used over which the closing price is compared. Determines the methods used for the evaluation of the moving average in accordance with the following key: 1 = Simple moving average 2 = Geometric moving average 3 = Linearly weighted moving average 4 = Exponentially Weighted Moving average within smoothing fact set to be 0.5. For further details concerning the definition of these moving averages please see the accompanying PDF documentation or the API documentation for Int32). The number of periods over which the moving average is considered.

Implements a general framework for producing extreme value trading signals using Stochastic indicators.

Note, that the general ides of this approach is to seek points which are oversold or over brought levels which are turning. Methodology Buy when the Oscillator the Stochastic D falls below a specific level (e.g. 20) and then rises above that level. Sell when the Oscillator rises above a specific level (e.g. 80) and then falls below that level. This approach is the preferred method of the Stochastics original creator George Lane. -1, 0, 1 - this method returns either -1, 0, 1 to indicate that either a sell, no action or buy signal was generated. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. This is the level at which the Stochastic is believed to indicate an oversold level. The Stochastic always lies between 0 and 100, and a suggested extreme low value to take is 20. This is the level at which the Stochastic is believed to indicate an over brought level. The Stochastic always lies between 0 and 100, and a suggested extreme high value is 80. An integer which represents the number of periods used over which the closing price is compared. Determines the methods used for the evaluation of the moving average in accordance with the following key: 1 = Simple moving average 2 = Geometric moving average 3 = Linearly weighted moving average 4 = Exponentially Weighted Moving average within smoothing fact set to be 0.5. For further details concerning the definition of these moving averages please see the accompanying PDF documentation or the API documentation for Int32). The number of periods over which the moving average is considered.

Implements a general framework for producing extreme value trading signals using Stochastic indicators.

Note, that the general ideea of this approach is to seek points which are oversold or over brought levels which are turning. Methodology Buy when the the Stochastic K falls below a specific level (e.g. 20) and then rises above that level. Sell when the Oscillator rises above a specific level (e.g. 80) and then falls below that level. This approach is the preferred method of the Stochastics original creator George Lane. -1, 0, 1 - this method returns either -1, 0, 1 to indicate that either a sell, no action or buy signal was generated. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An financial series where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on. This is the level at which the Stochastic is believed to indicate an oversold level. The Stochastic always lies between 0 and 100, and a suggested extreme low value to take is 20. This is the level at which the Stochastic is believed to indicate an over brought level. The Stochastic always lies between 0 and 100, and a suggested extreme high value is 80. An integer which represents the number of periods used over which the closing price is compared.

Implements a general framework for producing extreme value trading signals using Stochastic indicators.

Note, that the general ideea of this approach is to seek points which are oversold or over brought levels which are turning. Methodology Buy when the the Stochastic K falls below a specific level (e.g. 20) and then rises above that level. Sell when the Oscillator rises above a specific level (e.g. 80) and then falls below that level. This approach is the preferred method of the Stochastics original creator George Lane. -1, 0, 1 - this method returns either -1, 0, 1 to indicate that either a sell, no action or buy signal was generated. A financial series where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on. This is the level at which the Stochastic is believed to indicate an oversold level. The Stochastic always lies between 0 and 100, and a suggested extreme low value to take is 20. This is the level at which the Stochastic is believed to indicate an over brought level. The Stochastic always lies between 0 and 100, and a suggested extreme high value is 80. An integer which represents the number of periods used over which the closing price is compared.

Implements a general framework for producing extreme value trading signals using Stochastic indicators.

Note, that the general ideea of this approach is to seek points which are oversold or over brought levels which are turning. Methodology Buy when the the Stochastic K falls below a specific level (e.g. 20) and then rises above that level. Sell when the Oscillator rises above a specific level (e.g. 80) and then falls below that level. This approach is the preferred method of the Stochastics original creator George Lane. -1, 0, 1 - this method returns either -1, 0, 1 to indicate that either a sell, no action or buy signal was generated. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. This is the level at which the Stochastic is believed to indicate an oversold level. The Stochastic always lies between 0 and 100, and a suggested extreme low value to take is 20. This is the level at which the Stochastic is believed to indicate an over brought level. The Stochastic always lies between 0 and 100, and a suggested extreme high value is 80. An integer which represents the number of periods used over which the closing price is compared.

Calculates a Finite Impulse Response Filter.

This is a type of smoothing filter that assigns different weights to prices from the past. Evaluation The FIR indicator is evaluated by the following formula: FIR = ((historicalValues[i]*weights[0]) + historicalValues[i-1]*wights[1] + ...)/(Sum of weights) A series where the first element is the FIR of the asset on the most recent period considered, the second term is the FIR on the period before that and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. The financial series where the first element is the traded price on the most recent period, the second element is the traded price of the previous periods and so on, for the asset under consideration. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. A double array which represent the different weights associated with the given prices.

Calculates a Finite Impulse Response Filter.

This is a type of smoothing filter that assigns different weights to prices from the past. Evaluation The FIR indicator is evaluated by the following formula: FIR = ((historicalValues[i]*weights[0]) + historicalValues[i-1]*wights[1] + ...)/(Sum of weights) A series where the first element is the FIR of the asset on the most recent period considered, the second term is the FIR on the period before that and so on. The financial series where the first element is the traded price on the most recent period, the second element is the traded price of the previous periods and so on, for the asset under consideration. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. A double array which represent the different weights associated with the given prices.

Calculates a Finite Impulse Response Filter.

This is a type of smoothing filter that assigns different weights to prices from the past. Evaluation The FIR indicator is evaluated by the following formula: FIR = ((historicalValues[i]*weights[0]) + historicalValues[i-1]*wights[1] + ...)/(Sum of weights) A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. A double array which represent the different weights associated with the given prices.

Calculates the geometric mean of the series's elements values.

The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A financial series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the geometric mean of the series's elements values.

A financial series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the geometric mean of the series's elements values.

The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the geometric mean of the series's elements values.

Calculates the Geometric Moving Average(GMA) for a given period for all possible data points (i.e. periods) for which there is sufficient historical data provided.

Illustration If we are considering a traded asset and the periods considered are days then by passing an array containing the closing daily prices of a given asset, and by choosing to use the 5-day Geometric Moving Average (i.e. passing the length of the GMA of 5), then this method will evaluate the Geometric Moving Average (GMA) for all days for which the closing price on that day and the four previous days is known. A series where the first term corresponds to the Moving Average on the last period and the previous value is the value of the Moving average on the previous period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A series containing the values of the time series being considered. Where the first element gives the last historical value, the second term the previous periods value and so on. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The number of periods considered within the evaluation of the moving average of each of the periods on which it can be evaluated.

Calculates the Geometric Moving Average(GMA) for a given period for all possible data points (i.e. periods) for which there is sufficient historical data provided.

Illustration If we are considering a traded asset and the periods considered are days then by passing an array containing the closing daily prices of a given asset, and by choosing to use the 5-day Geometric Moving Average (i.e. passing the length of the GMA of 5), then this method will evaluate the Geometric Moving Average (GMA) for all days for which the closing price on that day and the four previous days is known. A series where the first term corresponds to the Moving Average on the last period and the previous value is the value of the Moving average on the previous period and so on. A series containing the values of the time series being considered. Where the first element gives the last historical value, the second term the previous periods value and so on. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The number of periods considered within the evaluation of the moving average of each of the periods on which it can be evaluated.

Calculates the Geometric Moving Average(GMA) for a given period for all possible data points (i.e. periods) for which there is sufficient historical data provided.

Illustration If we are considering a traded asset and the periods considered are days then by passing an array containing the closing daily prices of a given asset, and by choosing to use the 5-day Geometric Moving Average (i.e. passing the length of the GMA of 5), then this method will evaluate the Geometric Moving Average (GMA) for all days for which the closing price on that day and the four previous days is known. A series where the first term corresponds to the Moving Average on the last period and the previous value is the value of the Moving average on the previous period and so on. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The number of periods considered within the evaluation of the moving average of each of the periods on which it can be evaluated.

Returns the highest value of prices over all values given. Returns a series which contains the higher highs values of prices array within a given period considering a look back period of n days.

a series where the first term is the high calculated for the most recent trading period, the second term is the high for the previous trading period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An series of length equal or greater to the number of periods considered in the indicator evaluation where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on. The number of days before to which the closing price is compared.

Returns the highest value of prices over all values given. Returns a series which contains the higher highs values of prices array within a given period considering a look back period of n days.

a series where the first term is the high calculated for the most recent trading period, the second term is the high for the previous trading period and so on. An series of length equal or greater to the number of periods considered in the indicator evaluation where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on. The number of days before to which the closing price is compared.

Returns the highest value of prices over all values given. Returns a series which contains the higher highs values of prices array within a given period considering a look back period of n days.

a series where the first term is the high calculated for the most recent trading period, the second term is the high for the previous trading period and so on. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. The number of days before to which the closing price is compared.

Calculates the Inter-Quartile Range(IQR) of the currently registered data set.

Recall that the IQR is the difference between the 1-st quartile (i.e. 25-th percentile) and the 2-nd quartile (i.e. the 75-th percentile). The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A financial series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the Inter-Quartile Range(IQR) of the currently registered data set.

Recall that the IQR is the difference between the 1-st quartile (i.e. 25-th percentile) and the 2-nd quartile (i.e. the 75-th percentile). A financial series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the Inter-Quartile Range(IQR) of the currently registered data set.

Recall that the IQR is the difference between the 1-st quartile (i.e. 25-th percentile) and the 2-nd quartile (i.e. the 75-th percentile). The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the Inter-Quartile Range(IQR) of the currently registered data set.

Recall that the IQR is the difference between the 1-st quartile (i.e. 25-th percentile) and the 2-nd quartile (i.e. the 75-th percentile). A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the Kairi Indicator measure as a percentage of the price, the divergence between the a moving average (generally the simple moving average) of the price and the price itself for each period for which there is sufficient historical values.

Remark: The Kairi Indicator is often used with conjunction with other moving averages within trading systems. Evaluation The formulae for the Kairi Indicator is as follows: Kairi Indicator = (MA - price) / price where MA is the moving average being considered and price is the present price of the underlying asset. Application The Kairi Indicator can be used in order to take advantage of an over extended trending market. For example, in an upwardly trending market when the price gets say more than 10 above the simple moving average, the asset could be sold and repurchased when the next hits the simple moving average again. The Kairi Indicator could also be used in order to detect market tops and bottom. The idea being that market tops and bottoms often occur when the price is at an extreme value in relation to its moving average. That is, the Kairi Indicator should take an extreme value at market tops and bottoms. An series where the first term returns the Kairi indicator expressed as decimal format (i.e. 0.01 = 1 percent) for the most recent period, the second term returns the Kairi indicator for the previous period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An series where the first term corresponds to the present price of the underlying asset for the most recent period, the second term corresponds to the present price of the underlying asset for the previous period and so on. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. An series where the first term corresponds to the most recent value of the moving average (generally the simple moving average) of the underlying asset, the second term to the previous value and so on.

Remark: The Kairi Indicator is often used with conjunction with other moving averages within trading systems. Evaluation The formulae for the Kairi Indicator is as follows: Kairi Indicator = (MA - price) / price where MA is the moving average being considered and price is the present price of the underlying asset. Application The Kairi Indicator can be used in order to take advantage of an over extended trending market. For example, in an upwardly trending market when the price gets say more than 10 above the simple moving average, the asset could be sold and repurchased when the next hits the simple moving average again. The Kairi Indicator could also be used in order to detect market tops and bottom. The idea being that market tops and bottoms often occur when the price is at an extreme value in relation to its moving average. That is, the Kairi Indicator should take an extreme value at market tops and bottoms. An series where the first term returns the Kairi indicator expressed as decimal format (i.e. 0.01 = 1 percent) for the most recent period, the second term returns the Kairi indicator for the previous period and so on. An series where the first term corresponds to the present price of the underlying asset for the most recent period, the second term corresponds to the present price of the underlying asset for the previous period and so on. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. An series where the first term corresponds to the most recent value of the moving average (generally the simple moving average) of the underlying asset, the second term to the previous value and so on.

Evaluation of the Fast K Stochastic when the number of previous time periods used over which the closing price is compared is given. Indicator variables The Stochastic K depends on the following variable: Periods - the number of previous time periods used over which the closing price is compared. Now the formulae for the Stochastic K over a is: 100 x (Last Close - Lowest low)/(Highest high - Lowest low) where the "lowest low" (respec. "highest high") is the highest (respec. lowest) close of the asset over the period under consideration. Since the "Last close", will lie between the highest high and lowest low this indicator will lie between 0 and 100.

A series where the first term is the KFastStochastic calculated for the most recent period, the second term is the KFastStochastic calculated for the previous period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An financial series where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on. An integer which represents the number of previous time periods used over which the closing price is compared.

A series where the first term is the KFastStochastic calculated for the most recent period, the second term is the KFastStochastic calculated for the previous period and so on. An financial series where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on. An integer which represents the number of previous time periods used over which the closing price is compared.

A series where the first term is the KFastStochastic calculated for the most recent period, the second term is the KFastStochastic calculated for the previous period and so on. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. An integer which represents the number of previous time periods used over which the closing price is compared.

Calculates the kurtosis of the currently registered data set.

Returns the value of the Linearly Weighted Moving Average(LWMA) for all periods for which sufficient historical data is provided.

The Linearly Weighted Moving Average(LWMA) weights the time series by assigning a weight of 1, to the oldest price and a weight of 2, to the second oldest price and so on... Until the weight of the most recent value is assigned to be the parameter lengthOfMA, after which the LWMA is given by the sum of the weighted prices divided by the sum of the weights. This indicator then shifts the window (one place back) over which the MA is evaluated and the indicator is then re-evaluated. A series where the first term is the LWMA of length lengthOfMA for the latest period, the second term is the LWMA of length lengthOfMA for the previous period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A series where the first element is the price on the earliest period, the second element is the price on the next earliest period and on so. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the FinancialEngine time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The number of periods over which the moving average is evaluated for each period.

Returns the value of the Linearly Weighted Moving Average(LWMA) for all periods for which sufficient historical data is provided.

The Linearly Weighted Moving Average(LWMA) weights the time series by assigning a weight of 1, to the oldest price and a weight of 2, to the second oldest price and so on... Until the weight of the most recent value is assigned to be the parameter lengthOfMA, after which the LWMA is given by the sum of the weighted prices divided by the sum of the weights. This indicator then shifts the window (one place back) over which the MA is evaluated and the indicator is then re-evaluated. A series where the first term is the LWMA of length lengthOfMA for the latest period, the second term is the LWMA of length lengthOfMA for the previous period and so on. A series where the first element is the price on the earliest period, the second element is the price on the next earliest period and on so. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The number of periods over which the moving average is evaluated for each period.

Returns the value of the Linearly Weighted Moving Average(LWMA) for all periods for which sufficient historical data is provided.

The Linearly Weighted Moving Average(LWMA) weights the time series by assigning a weight of 1, to the oldest price and a weight of 2, to the second oldest price and so on... Until the weight of the most recent value is assigned to be the parameter lengthOfMA, after which the LWMA is given by the sum of the weighted prices divided by the sum of the weights. This indicator then shifts the window (one place back) over which the MA is evaluated and the indicator is then re-evaluated. A series where the first term is the LWMA of length lengthOfMA for the latest period, the second term is the LWMA of length lengthOfMA for the previous period and so on. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The number of periods considered within the evaluation of the moving average of each of the days on which it can be evaluated.

Evaluates the position of the Lower Bollinger Band for a given standard deviation level.

Please note that by standard deviation level we not only refer to the number of standard deviations shifts away from the moving average at which the Lower Bollinger Band is drawn but also the number of time series points which are used in the evaluation of the standard deviation and the moving average. A series where the first term corresponds to the value of the Upper Bollinger Band for the latest periods, the second terms to the previous period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A series where the first term correspond the latest periods price and the previous element is the value of the element before that and so on... The length of this series is equal to the number of periods used in the evaluation of the standard deviation and the moving average. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The number of standard deviation which the lower band in shifted from the moving average. The length of the moving average used within the evaluation of the Bollinger Bands. Note that this also corresponds to the length of the period over which the standard deviation is evaluated.

Evaluates the position of the Lower Bollinger Band for a given standard deviation level.

Please note that by standard deviation level we not only refer to the number of standard deviations shifts away from the moving average at which the Lower Bollinger Band is drawn but also the number of time series points which are used in the evaluation of the standard deviation and the moving average. A series where the first term corresponds to the value of the Upper Bollinger Band for the latest periods, the second terms to the previous period and so on. A series where the first term correspond the latest periods price and the previous element is the value of the element before that and so on... The length of this series is equal to the number of periods used in the evaluation of the standard deviation and the moving average. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The number of standard deviation which the lower band in shifted from the moving average. The length of the moving average used within the evaluation of the Bollinger Bands. Note that this also corresponds to the length of the period over which the standard deviation is evaluated.

Evaluates the position of the Lower Bollinger Band for a given standard deviation level.

Please note that by standard deviation level we not only refer to the number of standard deviations shifts away from the moving average at which the Lower Bollinger Band is drawn but also the number of time series points which are used in the evaluation of the standard deviation and the moving average. A series where the first term corresponds to the value of the Upper Bollinger Band for the latest periods, the second terms to the previous period and so on. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The number of standard deviation which the lower band in shifted from the moving average. The length of the moving average used within the evaluation of the Bollinger Bands. Note that this also corresponds to the length of the period over which the standard deviation is evaluated.

Returns an array which contains the lower lows values of prices array within a given period considering a look back period of n days.

A series where the first term is the low calculated for the most recent trading period, the second term is the low for the previous trading period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An series where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on. The number of days before to which the closing price is compared.

Returns an array which contains the lower lows values of prices array within a given period considering a look back period of n days.

A series where the first term is the low calculated for the most recent trading period, the second term is the low for the previous trading period and so on. An series where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on. The number of days before to which the closing price is compared.

Returns an array which contains the lower lows values of prices array within a given period considering a look back period of n days.

A series where the first term is the low calculated for the most recent trading period, the second term is the low for the previous trading period and so on. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. The number of days before to which the closing price is compared.

Market Facilitation Index was developed by Dr. Bill Williams and take into consideration the price and volume.

Evaluation The formula for the calculation of MFI is: MFI = (high - low)/volume where high is the highest traded price during the period, low is the lowest traded price during the period and, volume is the overall volume traded on that period. Interpretation There are four types of trading sessions called: Fakes - volume is low but MFI is rising Fades - both volume and MFI is down (the price might move in the opposite direction) Squats - the volume is up, MFI is down Greens - when the MFI and volume are up which represent a strong signal to follow the trendline The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. The financial series where the first element is the traded price on the most recent period, the second element is the traded price of the previous periods and so on, for the asset under consideration.

Market Facilitation Index was developed by Dr. Bill Williams and take into consideration the price and volume.

Evaluation The formula for the calculation of MFI is: MFI = (high - low)/volume where high is the highest traded price during the period, low is the lowest traded price during the period and, volume is the overall volume traded on that period. Interpretation There are four types of trading sessions called: Fakes - volume is low but MFI is rising Fades - both volume and MFI is down (the price might move in the opposite direction) Squats - the volume is up, MFI is down Greens - when the MFI and volume are up which represent a strong signal to follow the trendline The financial series where the first element is the traded price on the most recent period, the second element is the traded price of the previous periods and so on, for the asset under consideration.

Market Facilitation Index was developed by Dr. Bill Williams and take into consideration the price and volume.

Evaluation The formula for the calculation of MFI is: MFI = (high - low)/volume where high is the highest traded price during the period, low is the lowest traded price during the period and, volume is the overall volume traded on that period. Interpretation There are four types of trading sessions called: Fakes - volume is low but MFI is rising Fades - both volume and MFI is down (the price might move in the opposite direction) Squats - the volume is up, MFI is down Greens - when the MFI and volume are up which represent a strong signal to follow the trendline A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Calculates the arithmetic mean of the elements values of the series.

The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A financial series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High . In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the arithmetic mean of the elements values of the series.

Calculates the mean deviation of the series's element values.

The mean deviation is exactly what the name implies, that is, it is the arithmetic average of the differences from each of the elements of the series to the mean of the series. The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A financial series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the mean deviation of the series's element values.

The mean deviation is exactly what the name implies, that is, it is the arithmetic average of the differences from each of the elements of the series to the mean of the series. A financial series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the mean deviation of the series's element values.

The mean deviation is exactly what the name implies, that is, it is the arithmetic average of the differences from each of the elements of the series to the mean of the series. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the mean deviation of the series's element values.

The mean deviation is exactly what the name implies, that is, it is the arithmetic average of the differences from each of the elements of the series to the mean of the series. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the mean deviation of the series's element YValues.

The mean deviation is exactly what the name implies, that is, it is the arithmetic average of the differences from each of the elements of the series to the mean of the series. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the mean deviation of the series's element YValues.

Returns the Median Moving Average of a given period of the data series provided for all possible periods for the data given.

For example, if we are considering a trading asset and the periods considered are days then by passing an series containing the closing daily prices of a given asset, and by choosing to use the 5-day median moving average (i.e. passing a length of the MA of 5), then we will evaluate the Median Moving Average(GMA) for all days for which the closing price on that day and the four previous days is known. Remark: This indicator is particularly appropriate for traded assets where the opening and closing prices are unreliable. Such an instance are FTSE stocks which in the first hour of trading experience relatively low volumes and the closing prices are settled through an auction process. Hence for the FTSE market the quoted market price at the beginning and end of the market may not be indicative of where a given stock is trading within a given period. In such markets it may be more appropriate to use the Median Moving Average which will smooth out the effect of uncharacteristic shifts at the ends of the trading day. A series where the first term is the value of the Median Moving Average for the most recent period, the second term is the value of the Median Moving Average for the previous period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An array where the first element corresponds to the highest market price during the last trading period, the second element corresponds to the highest market price in the previous period, and so on. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. An array where the first element corresponds to the lowest market price during the last trading period, the second term corresponds to the lowest market price in the previous period, and so on. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The number of periods considered within the evaluation of the moving average of each of the days on which it can be evaluated.

Returns the Median Moving Average of a given period of the data series provided for all possible periods for the data given.

For example, if we are considering a trading asset and the periods considered are days then by passing an series containing the closing daily prices of a given asset, and by choosing to use the 5-day median moving average (i.e. passing a length of the MA of 5), then we will evaluate the Median Moving Average(GMA) for all days for which the closing price on that day and the four previous days is known. Remark: This indicator is particularly appropriate for traded assets where the opening and closing prices are unreliable. Such an instance are FTSE stocks which in the first hour of trading experience relatively low volumes and the closing prices are settled through an auction process. Hence for the FTSE market the quoted market price at the beginning and end of the market may not be indicative of where a given stock is trading within a given period. In such markets it may be more appropriate to use the Median Moving Average which will smooth out the effect of uncharacteristic shifts at the ends of the trading day. A series where the first term is the value of the Median Moving Average for the most recent period, the second term is the value of the Median Moving Average for the previous period and so on. An array where the first element corresponds to the highest market price during the last trading period, the second element corresponds to the highest market price in the previous period, and so on. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. An array where the first element corresponds to the lowest market price during the last trading period, the second term corresponds to the lowest market price in the previous period, and so on. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The number of periods considered within the evaluation of the moving average of each of the days on which it can be evaluated.

Returns the Median Moving Average of a given period of the data series provided for all possible periods for the data given.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The number of periods considered within the evaluation of the moving average of each of the days on which it can be evaluated.

Evaluates the Median Price of an asset for a given trading period.

The Median price is just the midpoint of the trading periods range, where the period considered is generally a day, however the Median price is equally applicable to other time spans and hence the period considered could be (for example) a month or year. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. The financial series under consideration.

Evaluates the Median Price of an asset for a given trading period.

The Median price is just the midpoint of the trading periods range, where the period considered is generally a day, however the Median price is equally applicable to other time spans and hence the period considered could be (for example) a month or year. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Evaluates the Minus Directional Movement Indicator (MDMI) over a number of periods using price data only.

A series with the k-th term corresponds to the MDMI of the k-th Bar. Please note that if the asset price is constant over any period considered then the Minus Directional Movement Indicator for that period is taken to be zero. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A financial series where the first element contain the prices of last trading period, the second element represents the prices of the previous periods and so on. Please note that in order to calculate this indicator the elements of the financial series must contain High, Low and Close values.

Evaluates the Minus Directional Movement Indicator (MDMI) over a number of periods using price data only.

A series with the k-th term corresponds to the MDMI of the k-th Bar. Please note that if the asset price is constant over any period considered then the Directional Movement Indicator for that period is taken to be zero. A financial series where the first element contain the prices of last trading period, the second element represents the prices of the previous periods and so on. Please note that in order to calculate this indicator the elements of the financial series must contain High, Low and Close values.

Evaluates the Minus Directional Movement Indicator (MDMI) over a number of periods using price data only.

A collections of series. Each series has the k-th term corresponds to the MDMI of the k-th Bar. Please note that if the asset price is constant over any period considered then the Minus Directional Movement Indicator for that period is taken to be zero. A collection of financial series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.Please note that in order to calculate this indicator the elements of the financial series must contain High, Low and Close values.

We evaluate the n-day momentum which is simply the difference between today's closing price and the close price n days ago, for all days for which sufficient historical data is given.

The Momentum indicator as the name suggests is the velocity with which the price is rising or falling, and hence will reflect how aggressively the asset is being purchased or sold. Remark: Extended values and/or turning points of the momentum are good indicators of oversold or over brought conditions(respectively). A series where the first term is the momentum for the most recent trading period, the second term is the momentum for the previous trading period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An series of length greate or equal to the number of periods considered in the indicator evaluation where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on. The number of days before to which the closing price is compared.

We evaluate the n-day momentum which is simply the difference between today's closing price and the close price n days ago, for all days for which sufficient historical data is given.

The Momentum indicator as the name suggests is the velocity with which the price is rising or falling, and hence will reflect how aggressively the asset is being purchased or sold. Remark: Extended values and/or turning points of the momentum are good indicators of oversold or over brought conditions(respectively). A series where the first term is the momentum for the most recent trading period, the second term is the momentum for the previous trading period and so on. An series of length greate or equal to the number of periods considered in the indicator evaluation where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on. The number of days before to which the closing price is compared.

We evaluate the n-day momentum which is simply the difference between today's closing price and the close price n days ago, for all days for which sufficient historical data is given.

The Momentum indicator as the name suggests is the velocity with which the price is rising or falling, and hence will reflect how aggressively the asset is being purchased or sold. Remark: Extended values and/or turning points of the momentum are good indicators of oversold or over brought conditions(respectively). A series where the first term is the momentum for the most recent trading period, the second term is the momentum for the previous trading period and so on. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. The number of days before to which the closing price is compared.

We calculate the momentum pergentage over a given period.

The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An series of length equal or greater to the number of periods considered in the indicator evaluation where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on. The number of days before to which the closing price is compared.

We calculate the momentum pergentage over a given period.

An series of length equal or greater to the number of periods considered in the indicator evaluation where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on. The number of days before to which the closing price is compared.

We calculate the momentum pergentage over a given period.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. The number of days before to which the closing price is compared.

Evaluates the Money Flow Index (MFI) which measures the strength of money flowing in and out of a security over all periods for which sufficient data is provided.

The MFI is related to the Directional Movement Indicator of Wellas Wilder, but the MFI system also takes into account the volume as well as the price action. Interpretation Divergence of the indicator within a continuing trend indicates that a reversal is imminent. The MFI also is a good means to signal market tops and bottoms. A reasonable rule is a market top is given more significance when the MFI is above 80 and a market bottom is given more significance when the MFI is below 20. Evaluation The Money Flow Index (MFI) is evaluated over a given user defined number of trading periods. The evaluation of the MFI follows the below steps: Evaluates the Money Flow on each day. The Money Flow is the product of the Typical Value Indicator (see Filters) for that day and the volume. Each day is either classified as either a Positive Money Flow day, Negative Money Flow day or no Flow day. If the typical price increases then the day is a said to be a Positive Money Day, if it decreasing then it is said to be a negative money day and if it stays then same then it is said the be a no flow day. The Positive Money and Negative Money Flow's are calculated by summing the Money Flow over the Positive Money Flow Days or the Negative Money Flow days respectively. The Money Flow Index (MFI) is evaluated by dividing the Positive Money Flow by the Negative Money Flow. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An series where the first element is the high in the last trading period, the second term is the high in the previous period and so on. An integer which represents the length of the period over which the indicator will be iteratively evaluated.

Evaluates the Money Flow Index (MFI) which measures the strength of money flowing in and out of a security over all periods for which sufficient data is provided.

The MFI is related to the Directional Movement Indicator of Wellas Wilder, but the MFI system also takes into account the volume as well as the price action. Interpretation Divergence of the indicator within a continuing trend indicates that a reversal is imminent. The MFI also is a good means to signal market tops and bottoms. A reasonable rule is a market top is given more significance when the MFI is above 80 and a market bottom is given more significance when the MFI is below 20. Evaluation The Money Flow Index (MFI) is evaluated over a given user defined number of trading periods. The evaluation of the MFI follows the below steps: Evaluates the Money Flow on each day. The Money Flow is the product of the Typical Value Indicator (see Filters) for that day and the volume. Each day is either classified as either a Positive Money Flow day, Negative Money Flow day or no Flow day. If the typical price increases then the day is a said to be a Positive Money Day, if it decreasing then it is said to be a negative money day and if it stays then same then it is said the be a no flow day. The Positive Money and Negative Money Flow's are calculated by summing the Money Flow over the Positive Money Flow Days or the Negative Money Flow days respectively. The Money Flow Index (MFI) is evaluated by dividing the Positive Money Flow by the Negative Money Flow. An series where the first element is the high in the last trading period, the second term is the high in the previous period and so on. An integer which represents the length of the period over which the indicator will be iteratively evaluated.

Evaluates the Money Flow Index (MFI) which measures the strength of money flowing in and out of a security over all periods for which sufficient data is provided.

The MFI is related to the Directional Movement Indicator of Wellas Wilder, but the MFI system also takes into account the volume as well as the price action. Interpretation Divergence of the indicator within a continuing trend indicates that a reversal is imminent. The MFI also is a good means to signal market tops and bottoms. A reasonable rule is a market top is given more significance when the MFI is above 80 and a market bottom is given more significance when the MFI is below 20. Evaluation The Money Flow Index (MFI) is evaluated over a given user defined number of trading periods. The evaluation of the MFI follows the below steps: Evaluates the Money Flow on each day. The Money Flow is the product of the Typical Value Indicator (see Filters) for that day and the volume. Each day is either classified as either a Positive Money Flow day, Negative Money Flow day or no Flow day. If the typical price increases then the day is a said to be a Positive Money Day, if it decreasing then it is said to be a negative money day and if it stays then same then it is said the be a no flow day. The Positive Money and Negative Money Flow's are calculated by summing the Money Flow over the Positive Money Flow Days or the Negative Money Flow days respectively. The Money Flow Index (MFI) is evaluated by dividing the Positive Money Flow by the Negative Money Flow. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. An integer which represents the length of the period over which the indicator will be iteratively evaluated.

We evaluate the Negative Volume Index(NVI) wich take in the consideration the days where volume decrease from the prevoius day.

Indicator Formula The formula for this indicator is: If the volume is less then the yesterday volume then: NVI = Yesterday's NVI + (((Close - Yesterday's Close)/Yesterday's Close) *Yesterday's NVI) If today's volume is greater than or equal to yesterday's volume then: NVI = Yesterday's NVI Allways the first element of an financial array will be a value of the most recent period considered. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An series where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on.

We evaluate the Negative Volume Index(NVI) wich take in the consideration the days where volume decrease from the prevoius day.

Indicator Formula The formula for this indicator is: If the volume is less then the yesterday volume then: NVI = Yesterday's NVI + (((Close - Yesterday's Close)/Yesterday's Close) *Yesterday's NVI) If today's volume is greater than or equal to yesterday's volume then: NVI = Yesterday's NVI Allways the first element of an financial array will be a value of the most recent period considered. An series where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on.

We evaluate the Negative Volume Index(NVI) wich take in the consideration the days where volume decrease from the prevoius day.

Indicator Formula The formula for this indicator is: If the volume is less then the yesterday volume then: NVI = Yesterday's NVI + (((Close - Yesterday's Close)/Yesterday's Close) *Yesterday's NVI) If today's volume is greater than or equal to yesterday's volume then: NVI = Yesterday's NVI Allways the first element of an financial array will be a value of the most recent period considered. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

On Balance Volume ("OBV") is a momentum indicator developed by Joe Granville that relates volume to price change.

Indicator Formula The formula for this indicator is: If today's close is greater than yesterday's close then: OBV = Yesterday's OBV + Today's Volume If today's close is less than yesterday's close then: OBV = Yesterday's OBV - Today's Volume If today's close is equal to yesterday's close then: OBV = Yesterday's OBV The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An series where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on.

On Balance Volume ("OBV") is a momentum indicator developed by Joe Granville that relates volume to price change.

Indicator Formula The formula for this indicator is: If today's close is greater than yesterday's close then: OBV = Yesterday's OBV + Today's Volume If today's close is less than yesterday's close then: OBV = Yesterday's OBV - Today's Volume If today's close is equal to yesterday's close then: OBV = Yesterday's OBV An series where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on.

On Balance Volume ("OBV") is a momentum indicator developed by Joe Granville that relates volume to price change.

Indicator Formula The formula for this indicator is: If today's close is greater than yesterday's close then: OBV = Yesterday's OBV + Today's Volume If today's close is less than yesterday's close then: OBV = Yesterday's OBV - Today's Volume If today's close is equal to yesterday's close then: OBV = Yesterday's OBV A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Calculates the n-th percentile of the series.

Recall that the percentile is the value such that at least interest-percent of the data set items are less than or equal to this value, or equivalently if at least (100-interest) percent of the items are greater than or equal to this value. Remarks: The 50-th percentile is the measure of centrality of a data set known as the median. The median can also be evaluated using ElementValue). The 25-th, 50-th, 75-th percentiles are often referred to as the 1-st, 2-nd (median) and 3-rd quartile respectively. The term quartile refers to the fact that these three values will roughly divide the data set considered into four equal parts. The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A financial series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. A value between 1 and 100 which reprezent the percentile of the series.

Calculates the n-th percentile of the series.

Recall that the percentile is the value such that at least interest-percent of the data set items are less than or equal to this value, or equivalently if at least (100-interest) percent of the items are greater than or equal to this value. Remarks: The 50-th percentile is the measure of centrality of a data set known as the median. The median can also be evaluated using ElementValue). The 25-th, 50-th, 75-th percentiles are often referred to as the 1-st, 2-nd (median) and 3-rd quartile respectively. The term quartile refers to the fact that these three values will roughly divide the data set considered into four equal parts. A FinancialEngine series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the FinancialEngine time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. A value between 1 and 100 which reprezent the percentile of the series.

Calculates the n-th percentile of the series.

Recall that the percentile is the value such that at least interest-percent of the data set items are less than or equal to this value, or equivalently if at least (100-interest) percent of the items are greater than or equal to this value. Remarks: The 50-th percentile is the measure of centrality of a data set known as the median. The median can also be evaluated using ElementValue). The 25-th, 50-th, 75-th percentiles are often referred to as the 1-st, 2-nd (median) and 3-rd quartile respectively. The term quartile refers to the fact that these three values will roughly divide the data set considered into four equal parts. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. A value between 1 and 100 which reprezent the percentile of the series.

Calculates the n-th percentile of the series.

Recall that the percentile is the value such that at least interest-percent of the data set items are less than or equal to this value, or equivalently if at least (100-interest) percent of the items are greater than or equal to this value. Remarks: The 50-th percentile is the measure of centrality of a data set known as the median. The median can also be evaluated using ElementValue). The 25-th, 50-th, 75-th percentiles are often referred to as the 1-st, 2-nd (median) and 3-rd quartile respectively. The term quartile refers to the fact that these three values will roughly divide the data set considered into four equal parts. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. A value between 1 and 100 which reprezent the percentile of the series.

Calculates the first percentile of the series.

Recall that the percentile is the value such that at least interest-percent of the data set items are less than or equal to this value, or equivalently if at least (100-interest) percent of the items are greater than or equal to this value. Remarks: The 50-th percentile is the measure of centrality of a data set known as the median. The median can also be evaluated using ElementValue). The 25-th, 50-th, 75-th percentiles are often referred to as the 1-st, 2-nd (median) and 3-rd quartile respectively. The term quartile refers to the fact that these three values will roughly divide the data set considered into four equal parts. A financial series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the first percentile of the series.

Recall that the percentile is the value such that at least interest-percent of the data set items are less than or equal to this value, or equivalently if at least (100-interest) percent of the items are greater than or equal to this value. Remarks: The 50-th percentile is the measure of centrality of a data set known as the median. The median can also be evaluated using ElementValue). The 25-th, 50-th, 75-th percentiles are often referred to as the 1-st, 2-nd (median) and 3-rd quartile respectively. The term quartile refers to the fact that these three values will roughly divide the data set considered into four equal parts. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the first percentile of the series.

Recall that the percentile is the value such that at least interest-percent of the data set items are less than or equal to this value, or equivalently if at least (100-interest) percent of the items are greater than or equal to this value. Remarks: The 50-th percentile is the measure of centrality of a data set known as the median. The median can also be evaluated using ElementValue). The 25-th, 50-th, 75-th percentiles are often referred to as the 1-st, 2-nd (median) and 3-rd quartile respectively. The term quartile refers to the fact that these three values will roughly divide the data set considered into four equal parts. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the second percentile of the series.

Recall that the percentile is the value such that at least interest-percent of the data set items are less than or equal to this value, or equivalently if at least (100-interest) percent of the items are greater than or equal to this value. Remarks: The 50-th percentile is the measure of centrality of a data set known as the median. The median can also be evaluated using ElementValue). The 25-th, 50-th, 75-th percentiles are often referred to as the 1-st, 2-nd (median) and 3-rd quartile respectively. The term quartile refers to the fact that these three values will roughly divide the data set considered into four equal parts. A financial series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the second percentile of the series.

Recall that the percentile is the value such that at least interest-percent of the data set items are less than or equal to this value, or equivalently if at least (100-interest) percent of the items are greater than or equal to this value. Remarks: The 50-th percentile is the measure of centrality of a data set known as the median. The median can also be evaluated using ElementValue). The 25-th, 50-th, 75-th percentiles are often referred to as the 1-st, 2-nd (median) and 3-rd quartile respectively. The term quartile refers to the fact that these three values will roughly divide the data set considered into four equal parts. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the second percentile of the series.

Recall that the percentile is the value such that at least interest-percent of the data set items are less than or equal to this value, or equivalently if at least (100-interest) percent of the items are greater than or equal to this value. Remarks: The 50-th percentile is the measure of centrality of a data set known as the median. The median can also be evaluated using ElementValue). The 25-th, 50-th, 75-th percentiles are often referred to as the 1-st, 2-nd (median) and 3-rd quartile respectively. The term quartile refers to the fact that these three values will roughly divide the data set considered into four equal parts. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the third percentile of the series.

Recall that the percentile is the value such that at least interest-percent of the data set items are less than or equal to this value, or equivalently if at least (100-interest) percent of the items are greater than or equal to this value. Remarks: The 50-th percentile is the measure of centrality of a data set known as the median. The median can also be evaluated using ElementValue). The 25-th, 50-th, 75-th percentiles are often referred to as the 1-st, 2-nd (median) and 3-rd quartile respectively. The term quartile refers to the fact that these three values will roughly divide the data set considered into four equal parts. A FinancialEngine series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the FinancialEngine time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the third percentile of the series.

Recall that the percentile is the value such that at least interest-percent of the data set items are less than or equal to this value, or equivalently if at least (100-interest) percent of the items are greater than or equal to this value. Remarks: The 50-th percentile is the measure of centrality of a data set known as the median. The median can also be evaluated using ElementValue). The 25-th, 50-th, 75-th percentiles are often referred to as the 1-st, 2-nd (median) and 3-rd quartile respectively. The term quartile refers to the fact that these three values will roughly divide the data set considered into four equal parts. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the third percentile of the series.

Recall that the percentile is the value such that at least interest-percent of the data set items are less than or equal to this value, or equivalently if at least (100-interest) percent of the items are greater than or equal to this value. Remarks: The 50-th percentile is the measure of centrality of a data set known as the median. The median can also be evaluated using ElementValue). The 25-th, 50-th, 75-th percentiles are often referred to as the 1-st, 2-nd (median) and 3-rd quartile respectively. The term quartile refers to the fact that these three values will roughly divide the data set considered into four equal parts. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Evaluates the Plus Directional Movement Indicator (PDMI) over a number of periods using price data only.

A series with the k-th term corresponds to the PDMI of the k-th Bar. Please note that if the asset price is constant over any period considered then the Plus Directional Movement Indicator for that period is taken to be zero. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A financial series where the first element contain the prices of last trading period, the second element represents the prices of the previous periods and so on. Please note that in order to calculate this indicator the elements of the financial series must contain High, Low and Close values.

Evaluates the Plus Directional Movement Indicator (PDMI) over a number of periods using price data only.

A series with the k-th term corresponds to the PDMI of the k-th Bar. Please note that if the asset price is constant over any period considered then the Plus Directional Movement Indicator for that period is taken to be zero. A financial series where the first element contain the prices of last trading period, the second element represents the prices of the previous periods and so on. Please note that in order to calculate this indicator the elements of the financial series must contain High, Low and Close values.

Evaluates the Plus Directional Movement Indicator (PDMI) over a number of periods using price data only.

A collections of series. Each series has the k-th term corresponds to the PDMI of the k-th Bar. Please note that if the asset price is constant over any period considered then the Plus Directional Movement Indicator for that period is taken to be zero. A collection of financial series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.Please note that in order to calculate this indicator the elements of the financial series must contain High, Low and Close values.

We evaluate the Positive Volume Index(PVI) wich take in the consideration the days where volume increase from the previous day.

Indicator Formula The formula for this indicator is: If the volume is greater then the yesterday volume then: PVI = Yesterday's PVI + (((Close - Yesterday's Close)/Yesterday's Close) *Yesterday's PVI) If today's volume is less than or equal to yesterday's volume then: PVI = Yesterday's PVI Allways the first element of an financial array will be a value of the most recent period considered. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An series where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on.

We evaluate the Positive Volume Index(PVI) wich take in the consideration the days where volume increase from the previous day.

Indicator Formula The formula for this indicator is: If the volume is greater then the yesterday volume then: PVI = Yesterday's PVI + (((Close - Yesterday's Close)/Yesterday's Close) *Yesterday's PVI) If today's volume is less than or equal to yesterday's volume then: PVI = Yesterday's PVI Allways the first element of an financial array will be a value of the most recent period considered. An series where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on.

We evaluate the Positive Volume Index(PVI) wich take in the consideration the days where volume increase from the previous day.

Indicator Formula The formula for this indicator is: If the volume is greater then the yesterday volume then: PVI = Yesterday's PVI + (((Close - Yesterday's Close)/Yesterday's Close) *Yesterday's PVI) If today's volume is less than or equal to yesterday's volume then: PVI = Yesterday's PVI Allways the first element of an financial array will be a value of the most recent period considered. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Evaluates the Price Action Indicator (PAIN) of an asset for a given trading period.

Evaluation The PAIN indicator is evaluated by the following formula: PAIN = ((Close-Open)+(Close-High)+(Close-Low))/2 where: (Close-Open) defines Intra-Day Momentum (Close-Low) defines Late Selling Pressure (LSP) (Close-High) defines Late Buying Pressure (LBP) Close is the period closing price, Open is the period opening price, High is the highest traded price during the period and Low is the lowest traded price during the period. Interpretation When the close is near the low, the assets's price is under selling pressure. If the close is near the high the asset's price is price is under buying pressure A series where the first element is the PAIN of the asset on the most recent period considered, the second term is the PAIN on the period before that and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A financial series where the first element is the traded price on the most recent period, the second element is the traded price of the previous periods and so on, for the asset under consideration.

Evaluates the Price Action Indicator (PAIN) of an asset for a given trading period.

Evaluation The PAIN indicator is evaluated by the following formula: PAIN = ((Close-Open)+(Close-High)+(Close-Low))/2 where: (Close-Open) defines Intra-Day Momentum (Close-Low) defines Late Selling Pressure (LSP) (Close-High) defines Late Buying Pressure (LBP) Close is the period closing price, Open is the period opening price, High is the highest traded price during the period and Low is the lowest traded price during the period. Interpretation When the close is near the low, the assets's price is under selling pressure. If the close is near the high the asset's price is price is under buying pressure A series where the first element is the PAIN of the asset on the most recent period considered, the second term is the PAIN on the period before that and so on. A financial series, where the first element is the traded price on the most recent period, the second element is the traded price of the previous periods and so on, for the asset under consideration.

Evaluates the Price Action Indicator (PAIN) of an asset for a given trading period.

Evaluation The PAIN indicator is evaluated by the following formula: PAIN = ((Close-Open)+(Close-High)+(Close-Low))/2 where: (Close-Open) defines Intra-Day Momentum (Close-Low) defines Late Selling Pressure (LSP) (Close-High) defines Late Buying Pressure (LBP) Close is the period closing price, Open is the period opening price, High is the highest traded price during the period and Low is the lowest traded price during the period. Interpretation When the close is near the low, the assets's price is under selling pressure. If the close is near the high the asset's price is price is under buying pressure A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Calculates the range of the series's elements values.

The range is the difference of a discrete data set is the difference between the largest and smallest members of the data set considered. The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A financial series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the range of the series's elements values.

The range is the difference of a discrete data set is the difference between the largest and smallest members of the data set considered. A financial series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the range of the series's elements values.

The range is the difference of a discrete data set is the difference between the largest and smallest members of the data set considered. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the range of the series's elements values.

The range is the difference of a discrete data set is the difference between the largest and smallest members of the data set considered. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculate the n-day rate of change (ROC) for all periods for which there is sufficient data.

The (n-day) rate of change (ROC) is just the last closing price divided by the closing price n-days ago. As with the case with the momentum indicator the rate of change (ROC) indicator on extended values and/or turning points indicates oversold or over brought conditions (respectively). A series where the first term is the rate of change for the most recent period, the second term is the rate of change for the previous period and so on. An series where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on. The number of days before to which the closing price is compared.

Calculate the n-day rate of change (ROC) for all periods for which there is sufficient data.

The (n-day) rate of change (ROC) is just the last closing price divided by the closing price n-days ago. As with the case with the momentum indicator the rate of change (ROC) indicator on extended values and/or turning points indicates oversold or over brought conditions (respectively). A series where the first term is the rate of change for the most recent period, the second term is the rate of change for the previous period and so on. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. The number of days before to which the closing price is compared.

Calculate the n-day rate of change (ROC) for all periods for which there is sufficient data.

The (n-day) rate of change (ROC) is just the last closing price divided by the closing price n-days ago. As with the case with the momentum indicator the rate of change (ROC) indicator on extended values and/or turning points indicates oversold or over brought conditions (respectively). A series where the first term is the rate of change for the most recent period, the second term is the rate of change for the previous period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An series where the first element is the closing price in the last trading period, the second term is the closing price in the previous trading period and so on. The number of days before to which the closing price is compared.

Implements the Relative Strength Indicator (RSI), developed by J. Welles Wilder in 1978; which measures the relative internal strength of a market. Please note that this indicator is not measured against another market or index. RSI measures the relative changes between higher and lower closing prices.

Evaluation The RSI indicator is calculated by the following formula: RSI = 100 - 100/(1+RS), where: RS = (Average of noOfPeriods days up closes) / (Average of noOfPeriods days' down closes), Interpretation An RSI above 70 is considered overbought and below 30 is considered oversold. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An series where the first element is the high in the last trading period, the second term is the high in the previous period and so on. An integer which represents the length of the period over which the indicator will be iteratively evaluated.

Evaluation The RSI indicator is calculated by the following formula: RSI = 100 - 100/(1+RS), where: RS = (Average of noOfPeriods days up closes) / (Average of noOfPeriods days' down closes), Interpretation An RSI above 70 is considered overbought and below 30 is considered oversold. An series where the first element is the high in the last trading period, the second term is the high in the previous period and so on. An integer which represents the length of the period over which the indicator will be iteratively evaluated.

Evaluation The RSI indicator is calculated by the following formula: RSI = 100 - 100/(1+RS), where: RS = (Average of noOfPeriods days up closes) / (Average of noOfPeriods days' down closes), Interpretation An RSI above 70 is considered overbought and below 30 is considered oversold. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. An integer which represents the length of the period over which the indicator will be iteratively evaluated.

Calculates the arithmetic(or simple) Moving Average(MA) of a given period for all possible data points (i.e. periods) for which there is sufficient historical data provided.

Illustration If we are considering a traded asset and the periods considered are days then by passing an array containing the closing daily prices of a given asset, and by choosing to use the 5-day moving average (i.e. passing a length of the MA of 5), then this method will evaluate the Moving Average (MA) for all days for which the closing price on that day and the four previous days is known. A series where the first term corresponds to the Moving Average on the last period and the previous value is the value of the Moving average on the previous period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A series where the first term is the most recent historical price, the second term is the previous historical price and so on. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The number of periods considered within the evaluation of the moving average for each of the periods on which it can be evaluated.

Calculates the arithmetic(or simple) Moving Average(MA) of a given period for all possible data points (i.e. periods) for which there is sufficient historical data provided.

Illustration If we are considering a traded asset and the periods considered are days then by passing an array containing the closing daily prices of a given asset, and by choosing to use the 5-day moving average (i.e. passing a length of the MA of 5), then this method will evaluate the Moving Average (MA) for all days for which the closing price on that day and the four previous days is known. A series where the first term corresponds to the Moving Average on the last period and the previous value is the value of the Moving average on the previous period and so on. A series where the first term is the most recent historical price, the second term is the previous historical price and so on. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The number of periods considered within the evaluation of the moving average for each of the periods on which it can be evaluated.

Calculates the arithmetic(or simple) Moving Average(MA) of a given period for all possible data points (i.e. periods) for which there is sufficient historical data provided.

Illustration If we are considering a traded asset and the periods considered are days then by passing an array containing the closing daily prices of a given asset, and by choosing to use the 5-day moving average (i.e. passing a length of the MA of 5), then this method will evaluate the Moving Average (MA) for all days for which the closing price on that day and the four previous days is known. A series where the first term corresponds to the Moving Average on the last period and the previous value is the value of the Moving average on the previous period and so on. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The number of periods considered within the evaluation of the moving average for each of the periods on which it can be evaluated.

Calculates the skewness of the currently registered data set.

Calculates the sample standard variance of the series's elements values.

Remark: The units of the Sample Standard Deviation will correspond to the units used by the observations (i.e. the units of the members of the data set). In many instances it is convenient that the units used for the observations corresponds to the units used for a measure of the sets deviations. This differs from the ElementValue) in which the deviation is measured in units which are the squares of the units of the observations. The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A financial series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the sample standard variance of the series's elements values.

Remark: The units of the Sample Standard Deviation will correspond to the units used by the observations (i.e. the units of the members of the data set). In many instances it is convenient that the units used for the observations corresponds to the units used for a measure of the sets deviations. This differs from the ElementValue) in which the deviation is measured in units which are the squares of the units of the observations. A financial series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the sample standard variance of the series's elements values.

Remark: The units of the Sample Standard Deviation will correspond to the units used by the observations (i.e. the units of the members of the data set). In many instances it is convenient that the units used for the observations corresponds to the units used for a measure of the sets deviations. This differs from the ElementValue) in which the deviation is measured in units which are the squares of the units of the observations. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the FinancialEngine time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Calculates the sample standard variance of the series's elements values.

Remark: The units of the Sample Standard Deviation will correspond to the units used by the observations (i.e. the units of the members of the data set). In many instances it is convenient that the units used for the observations corresponds to the units used for a measure of the sets deviations. This differs from the ElementValue) in which the deviation is measured in units which are the squares of the units of the observations. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Evaluates the x-period Triangular Moving Average(TMA) where x corresponds to the length of the time series array given as a parameter, for all periods for which sufficient data is provided.

Further Explanation The TMA is a special case of the WeightedMovingAverage, where the term triangular is motivated by the way in which the weights are chosen for the elements of the time series array. For example, for a 7-period TMA, that is when the time series has length 7, the corresponding weights of the time series elements are: 1, 2, 3, 4, 3, 2, 1. In the case of the 6 period TMA the weights would be 1, 2, 3, 3, 2, 1. A series where the first term is the value of the MA corresponding to the most recent period, the second term is the value of the MA on the previous period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An series where the first term corresponds to value of the market variable (for example, closing price) in the last period, the second term corresponds to the value of the market variable in the previous period and so on. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The number of periods over which the moving average is evaluated for each period.

Evaluates the x-period Triangular Moving Average(TMA) where x corresponds to the length of the time series array given as a parameter, for all periods for which sufficient data is provided.

Further Explanation The TMA is a special case of the WeightedMovingAverage, where the term triangular is motivated by the way in which the weights are chosen for the elements of the time series array. For example, for a 7-period TMA, that is when the time series has length 7, the corresponding weights of the time series elements are: 1, 2, 3, 4, 3, 2, 1. In the case of the 6 period TMA the weights would be 1, 2, 3, 3, 2, 1. A series where the first term is the value of the MA corresponding to the most recent period, the second term is the value of the MA on the previous period and so on. An series where the first term corresponds to value of the market variable (for example, closing price) in the last period, the second term corresponds to the value of the market variable in the previous period and so on. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the FinancialEngine time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The number of periods over which the moving average is evaluated for each period.

Evaluates the x-period Triangular Moving Average(TMA) where x corresponds to the length of the time series array given as a parameter, for all periods for which sufficient data is provided.

Further Explanation The TMA is a special case of the WeightedMovingAverage, where the term triangular is motivated by the way in which the weights are chosen for the elements of the time series array. For example, for a 7-period TMA, that is when the time series has length 7, the corresponding weights of the time series elements are: 1, 2, 3, 4, 3, 2, 1. In the case of the 6 period TMA the weights would be 1, 2, 3, 3, 2, 1. A series where the first term is the value of the MA corresponding to the most recent period, the second term is the value of the MA on the previous period and so on. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the FinancialEngine time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The number of periods over which the moving average is evaluated for each period.

True Range (TR) of a traded asset over a number of periods.

An array where the k-term corresponds to the True Range (TR) on the k-th previous period. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A financial series where the first element contain the prices of last trading period, the second element represents the prices of the previous periods and so on. Please note that in order to calculate this indicator the elements of the financial series must contain High, Low and Close values.

True Range (TR) of a traded asset over a number of periods.

An array where the k-term corresponds to the True Range (TR) on the k-th previous period. A financial series where the first element contain the prices of last trading period, the second element represents the prices of the previous periods and so on. Please note that in order to calculate this indicator the elements of the financial series must contain High, Low and Close values.

True Range (TR) of a traded asset over a number of periods.

A collections of series. Each series has the k-th term corresponds to the True Range (TR) on the k-th previous period. A collection of financial series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.Please note that in order to calculate this indicator the elements of the financial series must contain High, Low and Close values.

Evaluates the Typical Price of an asset within a given trading period.

The typical price is just the arithmetic average of the high, low and closing price for the trading period considered. Generally speaking the period considered will be a single trading day, however the typical price is equally applicable to other time spans and hence the period considered could be (for example) a month or year. Applications The Typical Price is often used in place of the closing price in the development of trading systems in which either another intra-day system is used from the intra-period timing of trades, or when the trading party is given discretion on intra-period trading decisions. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. The financial series.

Evaluates the Typical Price of an asset within a given trading period.

The typical price is just the arithmetic average of the high, low and closing price for the trading period considered. Generally speaking the period considered will be a single trading day, however the typical price is equally applicable to other time spans and hence the period considered could be (for example) a month or year. Applications The Typical Price is often used in place of the closing price in the development of trading systems in which either another intra-day system is used from the intra-period timing of trades, or when the trading party is given discretion on intra-period trading decisions. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Evaluates the position of the Upper Bollinger Band for a given standard deviation level.

Please note that by standard deviation level we not only refer to the number of standard deviations shifts away from the moving average at which the Higher Bollinger Band is drawn but also the number of time series points which are used in the evaluation of the standard deviation and the moving average. A series where the first term corresponds to the value of the Upper Bollinger Band for the latest periods, the second terms to the previous period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An series where the first term correspond the latest periods price and the previous element is the value of the element before that and so on... The length of this series is equal to the number of periods used in the evaluation of the standard deviation. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The (positive) number of standard deviations which the lower band in shifted from the moving average. The length of the moving average used within the evaluation of the Bollinger Bands. Note that this also corresponds to the length of the period over which the standard deviation is evaluated.

Evaluates the position of the Upper Bollinger Band for a given standard deviation level.

Please note that by standard deviation level we not only refer to the number of standard deviations shifts away from the moving average at which the Higher Bollinger Band is drawn but also the number of time series points which are used in the evaluation of the standard deviation and the moving average. A series where the first term corresponds to the value of the Upper Bollinger Band for the latest periods, the second terms to the previous period and so on. An series where the first term correspond the latest periods price and the previous element is the value of the element before that and so on... The length of this series is equal to the number of periods used in the evaluation of the standard deviation. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The (positive) number of standard deviations which the lower band in shifted from the moving average. The length of the moving average used within the evaluation of the Bollinger Bands. Note that this also corresponds to the length of the period over which the standard deviation is evaluated.

Evaluates the position of the Upper Bollinger Band for a given standard deviation level.

Please note that by standard deviation level we not only refer to the number of standard deviations shifts away from the moving average at which the Higher Bollinger Band is drawn but also the number of time series points which are used in the evaluation of the standard deviation and the moving average. A series where the first term corresponds to the value of the Upper Bollinger Band for the latest periods, the second terms to the previous period and so on. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The (positive) number of standard deviations which the lower band in shifted from the moving average. The length of the moving average used within the evaluation of the Bollinger Bands. Note that this also corresponds to the length of the period over which the standard deviation is evaluated.

Calculates the sample variance of the series's elements values.

Evaluate the Weighted Moving Average(WMA) where the weights associated to all the elements of the historical values are given and the WMA is evaluated for all periods for which there is sufficient historical data.

That is, the weights are fixed for all given historical values and the window of length lengthOfMA over which the GMA is evaluated is shifted along the series. Application Generally speaking the WMA where the weights are all set and the window over which GMA is evaluated is shifted is used when you wish to give emphasis to particular dates. Note: The length of the weights array must equal or be greater than the length of the historicalPrices series. If it's greater than we ignore the supplementary values. A series where the first term is the value of the moving average corresponding of the latest period, the second term is the value for the previous period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An series of historical values, where the first element corresponds to the market on the last period, the second term to the value on previous period and so on. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. Array of doubles which assigns weights to the k-th previous historical values for the given period on which the moving average is being evaluated. Here k is just the length of the weights array given. The number of periods over which the weighted moving average is evaluated.

That is, the weights are fixed for all given historical values and the window of length lengthOfMA over which the GMA is evaluated is shifted along the series. Application Generally speaking the WMA where the weights are all set and the window over which GMA is evaluated is shifted is used when you wish to give emphasis to particular dates. Note: The length of the weights array must equal or be greater than the length of the historicalPrices series. If it's greater than we ignore the supplementary values. A series where the first term is the value of the moving average corresponding of the latest period, the second term is the value for the previous period and so on. An series of historical values, where the first element corresponds to the market on the last period, the second term to the value on previous period and so on. A series which assigns weights to the k-th previous historical values for the given period on which the moving average is being evaluated. Here k is just the length of the weights array given. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. The number of periods over which the weighted moving average is evaluated.

That is, the weights are fixed for all given historical values and the window of length lengthOfMA over which the GMA is evaluated is shifted along the series. Application Generally speaking the WMA where the weights are all set and the window over which GMA is evaluated is shifted is used when you wish to give emphasis to particular dates. Note: The length of the weights array must equal or be greater than the length of the historicalPrices series. If it's greater than we ignore the supplementary values. A series where the first term is the value of the moving average corresponding of the latest period, the second term is the value for the previous period and so on. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. A series which assigns weights to the k-th previous historical values for the given period on which the moving average is being evaluated. Here k is just the length of the weights array given. The number of periods over which the weighted moving average is evaluated.

Here we evaluate the Weighted Moving Average(WMA) where for each period for which the WMA is evaluated the historical terms are weighted in accordance with the same set of weights.

I.e. The weights shift with the window of the historical values. Application Generally speaking the WMA is used in order to allow more weight to be assigned to more resent price dynamics. Here the length of the weights array is used as the length of the period over which the moving average is calculated. If you wish to control the number of periods used within the moving average then we refer you to (historicalPrices, weights, lengthOfMovingAverage). A series where the first term is the value of the moving average corresponding of the latest period, the second term is the value for the previous period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An series of historical values, where the first element corresponds to the market on the last period, the second term to the value on previous period and so on. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. Array of doubles which assigns weights to the k-th previous historical values for the given period on which the moving average is being evaluated. Here k is just the length of the weights array given.

Here we evaluate the Weighted Moving Average(WMA) where for each period for which the WMA is evaluated the historical terms are weighted in accordance with the same set of weights.

I.e. The weights shift with the window of the historical values. Application Generally speaking the WMA is used in order to allow more weight to be assigned to more resent price dynamics. Here the length of the weights array is used as the length of the period over which the moving average is calculated. If you wish to control the number of periods used within the moving average then we refer you to FinancialWeightedMovingAverage A series where the first term is the value of the moving average corresponding of the latest period, the second term is the value for the previous period and so on. An series of historical values, where the first element corresponds to the market on the last period, the second term to the value on previous period and so on. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. Array of doubles which assigns weights to the k-th previous historical values for the given period on which the moving average is being evaluated. Here k is just the length of the weights array given.

Here we evaluate the Weighted Moving Average(WMA) where for each period for which the WMA is evaluated the historical terms are weighted in accordance with the same set of weights.

I.e. The weights shift with the window of the historical values. Application Generally speaking the WMA is used in order to allow more weight to be assigned to more resent price dynamics. Here the length of the weights array is used as the length of the period over which the moving average is calculated. If you wish to control the number of periods used within the moving average then we refer you to Double[]) A series where the first term is the value of the moving average corresponding of the latest period, the second term is the value for the previous period and so on. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively. Array of doubles which assigns weights to the k-th previous historical values for the given period on which the moving average is being evaluated. Here k is just the length of the weights array given.

Evaluates the z-score (often referred to as the standardized value) of an element series's element values.

The z-score denotes the number of standard deviations of a given element of the data set is from the mean of the data set. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Evaluates the z-score (often referred to as the standardized value) of an element series's element values.

The z-score denotes the number of standard deviations of a given element of the data set is from the mean of the data set. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A financial series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Evaluates the z-score (often referred to as the standardized value) of an element series's element values.

The z-score denotes the number of standard deviations of a given element of the data set is from the mean of the data set. A financial series. Specifies the particular element value (for example High, Low, Close or Open of the financial time series) which will be considered within this indicator evaluation. In particular, if you wish to use the element value high then you should pass the parameter High. In a similarly fashion if you wish to use the low, close or open, then you should pass the parameter Low, Close, Open, respectively.

Defines a set of static options used with FinancialEngine calculations.

Resets the options to default settings.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether calculated elements will use the same colors that are assigned to original series. Both, the original and derived data objects must be placed on the same chart to enable this feature.

Gets or sets a static value that determines whether elements derived from series will contain values of the original elements as dotnetCHARTING.SubValue objects.

Provides a set of methods that find the best fit curve of a data set.

Given a set of data points x[0..ndata-1],y[0..ndata-1] with individual standard deviations sig[0..ndata-1], fit them to a straight line y = a + bx by minimizing ¥ö2. Returned are a,b and their respective probable uncertainties siga and sigb, the chi-square chi2, and the goodness-of-fit probability q (that the fit would have ¥ö2 this large or larger). If mwt=0 on input, then the standard deviations are assumed to be unavailable: q is returned as 1.0 and the normalization of chi2 is to unit standard deviation on all points.

The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. A series wich contains the standard deviations of the given data point. When this parameter is 0 the standard deviation will not be considered.

A statistical series. A series wich contains the standard deviations of the given data point. When this parameter is 0 the standard deviation will not be considered.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. A series wich contains the standard deviations of the given data point. When this parameter is 0 the standard deviation will not be considered.

Find the best fit for the function f(x) = A * pow(e, B*x ) where B = b and A = exp( a).

The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series.

Find the best fit for the function f(x) = A * pow(e, B*x ) where B = b and A = exp( a).

A statistical series.

Find the best fit for the function f(x) = A * pow(e, B*x ) where B = b and A = exp( a).

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Find the best fit for the function f(x) = A * pow(e, B*x ) where B = b and A = exp( a).

A series where the k-th element of the array represents of k-th point (i.e. { x_k, y_k }) of the total set over which the fitted function is evaluated. The total set over which the fitted function is evaluated consists of the `backward' points, original data set points and the `forward' points. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. The distance in the x-coordinate between two adjacent extended points. Please note that this also corresponds to the distance in the x-coordinate between the highest and lowest original data point and the first (above or below) additional evaluation point. The number of additional evaluation points which are evaluated above the x-coordinates of the original given data set. The number of additional evaluation points which are evaluated below the x-coordinates of the original given data set.

Find the best fit for the function f(x) = A * pow(e, B*x ) where B = b and A = exp( a).

A series where the k-th element of the array represents of k-th point (i.e. { x_k, y_k }) of the total set over which the fitted function is evaluated. The total set over which the fitted function is evaluated consists of the `backward' points, original data set points and the `forward' points. A statistical series. The distance in the x-coordinate between two adjacent extended points. Please note that this also corresponds to the distance in the x-coordinate between the highest and lowest original data point and the first (above or below) additional evaluation point. The number of additional evaluation points which are evaluated above the x-coordinates of the original given data set. The number of additional evaluation points which are evaluated below the x-coordinates of the original given data set.

Find the best fit for the function f(x) = A * pow(e, B*x ) where B = b and A = exp( a).

A series where the k-th element of the array represents of k-th point (i.e. { x_k, y_k }) of the total set over which the fitted function is evaluated. The total set over which the fitted function is evaluated consists of the `backward' points, original data set points and the `forward' points. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. The distance in the x-coordinate between two adjacent extended points. Please note that this also corresponds to the distance in the x-coordinate between the highest and lowest original data point and the first (above or below) additional evaluation point. The number of additional evaluation points which are evaluated above the x-coordinates of the original given data set. The number of additional evaluation points which are evaluated below the x-coordinates of the original given data set.

Find the best fit for the function f(x) = a + b * ln(x).

The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series.

Find the best fit for the function f(x) = a + b * ln(x).

A statistical series.

Find the best fit for the function f(x) = a + b * ln(x).

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Find the best fit for the function f(x) = a + b * ln(x).

A series where the k-th element of the array represents of k-th point (i.e. { x_k, y_k }) of the total set over which the fitted function is evaluated. The total set over which the fitted function is evaluated consists of the `backward' points, original data set points and the `forward' points. Remark: This methods corresponds in functionality to the method of the same name within Microsoft Excel. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. The distance in the x-coordinate between two adjacent extended points. Please note that this also corresponds to the distance in the x-coordinate between the highest and lowest original data point and the first (above or below) additional evaluation point. The number of additional evaluation points which are evaluated above the x-coordinates of the original given data set. The number of additional evaluation points which are evaluated below the x-coordinates of the original given data set.

Find the best fit for the function f(x) = a + b * ln(x).

A series where the k-th element of the array represents of k-th point (i.e. { x_k, y_k }) of the total set over which the fitted function is evaluated. The total set over which the fitted function is evaluated consists of the `backward' points, original data set points and the `forward' points. Remark: This methods corresponds in functionality to the method of the same name within Microsoft Excel. A statistical series. The distance in the x-coordinate between two adjacent extended points. Please note that this also corresponds to the distance in the x-coordinate between the highest and lowest original data point and the first (above or below) additional evaluation point. The number of additional evaluation points which are evaluated above the x-coordinates of the original given data set. The number of additional evaluation points which are evaluated below the x-coordinates of the original given data set.

Find the best fit for the function f(x) = a + b * ln(x).

A series where the k-th element of the array represents of k-th point (i.e. { x_k, y_k }) of the total set over which the fitted function is evaluated. The total set over which the fitted function is evaluated consists of the `backward' points, original data set points and the `forward' points. Remark: This methods corresponds in functionality to the method of the same name within Microsoft Excel. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. The distance in the x-coordinate between two adjacent extended points. Please note that this also corresponds to the distance in the x-coordinate between the highest and lowest original data point and the first (above or below) additional evaluation point. The number of additional evaluation points which are evaluated above the x-coordinates of the original given data set. The number of additional evaluation points which are evaluated below the x-coordinates of the original given data set.

Fits a polynomial of a given degree to a data set in accordance with the least squares approach and returned the values of the fitted function over the same range of the x-coordinate as the given data set.

For example, if we fit a polynomial of degree 2, then we fit the quadratic polynomial (i.e. f(x) = a_0 + a_1 x + a_2 x^2); similarly if we fit a polynomial of degree 3, then we fit the cubic polynomial (i.e. f(x) = a_0 + a_1 x + a_2 x^2 + a_3 x^3). The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. The degree of the polynomial which is fitted to the data set given (i.e. if degree is 2, then a quadratic is fitted).

For example, if we fit a polynomial of degree 2, then we fit the quadratic polynomial (i.e. f(x) = a_0 + a_1 x + a_2 x^2); similarly if we fit a polynomial of degree 3, then we fit the cubic polynomial (i.e. f(x) = a_0 + a_1 x + a_2 x^2 + a_3 x^3). A statistical series. The degree of the polynomial which is fitted to the data set given (i.e. if degree is 2, then a quadratic is fitted).

For example, if we fit a polynomial of degree 2, then we fit the quadratic polynomial (i.e. f(x) = a_0 + a_1 x + a_2 x^2); similarly if we fit a polynomial of degree 3, then we fit the cubic polynomial (i.e. f(x) = a_0 + a_1 x + a_2 x^2 + a_3 x^3). A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. The degree of the polynomial which is fitted to the data set given (i.e. if degree is 2, then a quadratic is fitted).

Fits a polynomial of a given degree to a data set in accordance with the least squares approach and returns the value of the fitted function over an extended (i.e. above, below or both) range of the x-coordinate values of the given data set.

For example, if we fit a polynomial of degree 2, then we fit the quadratic polynomial (i.e. f(x) = a_0 + a_1 x + a_2 x^2); similarly if we fit a polynomial of degree 3, then we fit the cubic polynomial (i.e. f(x) = a_0 + a_1 x + a_2 x^2 + a_3 x^3). Remark: The difference between this method and Int32), is that it allows the values of the fitted function to be evaluated over an extended range. That is, a range in the x-coordinate greater than the original given data set. Where the extended values are evaluated? The parameters step, forward, backward allows the position and number of additional points above and/or below the range of the values in the x-coordinate of the original data set to be given. The forward parameter specifies the number of the additional evaluation points of the fitted function which are greater than the values of the x-coordinates of the original data set. Similarly, the backward parameter specifies the number of the additional evaluation points of the fitted function which are lower than the values of the x-coordinates of the original data set. The step specifies the distance in the x-coordinate between each of the additional data points, where the first additional data point either above or below is exactly a distance of step from the points of the original data set which the highest and lowest values in the x-coordinate. For example, consider the data set x = 1, 2, 3; y = 1, 2, 3. Now if step = 1, forward = 2, and backward = 3, then this method when applied will return a two dimensional array. This two dimensional array will have the following structure: { { -2, f(-2) } { -1, f(-1) } { 0, f(0) }{ 1, 1 } { 2, 2 }{ 3, 3 } { 4, f(4) } { 5, f(5) } }, where f(-2), f(-1), f(0), f(4), f(5) correspond to the value of the fitted functions at the points x = -2, -1, 0, 4, 5, respectively. A series where the k-th element of the array represents of k-th point (i.e. { x_k, y_k }) of the total set over which the fitted function is evaluated. The total set over which the fitted function is evaluated consists of the `backward' points, original data set points and the `forward' points. Remark: This methods corresponds in functionality to the method of the same name within Microsoft Excel. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. The degree of the polynomial which is fitted to the data set given (i.e. if degree is 2, then a quadratic is fitted). The distance in the x-coordinate between two adjacent extended points. Please note that this also corresponds to the distance in the x-coordinate between the highest and lowest original data point and the first (above or below) additional evaluation point. The number of additional evaluation points which are evaluated above the x-coordinates of the original given data set. The number of additional evaluation points which are evaluated below the x-coordinates of the original given data set.

For example, if we fit a polynomial of degree 2, then we fit the quadratic polynomial (i.e. f(x) = a_0 + a_1 x + a_2 x^2); similarly if we fit a polynomial of degree 3, then we fit the cubic polynomial (i.e. f(x) = a_0 + a_1 x + a_2 x^2 + a_3 x^3). Remark: The difference between this method and Int32), is that it allows the values of the fitted function to be evaluated over an extended range. That is, a range in the x-coordinate greater than the original given data set. Where the extended values are evaluated? The parameters step, forward, backward allows the position and number of additional points above and/or below the range of the values in the x-coordinate of the original data set to be given. The forward parameter specifies the number of the additional evaluation points of the fitted function which are greater than the values of the x-coordinates of the original data set. Similarly, the backward parameter specifies the number of the additional evaluation points of the fitted function which are lower than the values of the x-coordinates of the original data set. The step specifies the distance in the x-coordinate between each of the additional data points, where the first additional data point either above or below is exactly a distance of step from the points of the original data set which the highest and lowest values in the x-coordinate. For example, consider the data set x = 1, 2, 3; y = 1, 2, 3. Now if step = 1, forward = 2, and backward = 3, then this method when applied will return a two dimensional array. This two dimensional array will have the following structure: { { -2, f(-2) } { -1, f(-1) } { 0, f(0) }{ 1, 1 } { 2, 2 }{ 3, 3 } { 4, f(4) } { 5, f(5) } }, where f(-2), f(-1), f(0), f(4), f(5) correspond to the value of the fitted functions at the points x = -2, -1, 0, 4, 5, respectively. A series where the k-th element of the array represents of k-th point (i.e. { x_k, y_k }) of the total set over which the fitted function is evaluated. The total set over which the fitted function is evaluated consists of the `backward' points, original data set points and the `forward' points. Remark: This methods corresponds in functionality to the method of the same name within Microsoft Excel. A statistical series. The degree of the polynomial which is fitted to the data set given (i.e. if degree is 2, then a quadratic is fitted). The distance in the x-coordinate between two adjacent extended points. Please note that this also corresponds to the distance in the x-coordinate between the highest and lowest original data point and the first (above or below) additional evaluation point. The number of additional evaluation points which are evaluated above the x-coordinates of the original given data set. The number of additional evaluation points which are evaluated below the x-coordinates of the original given data set.

For example, if we fit a polynomial of degree 2, then we fit the quadratic polynomial (i.e. f(x) = a_0 + a_1 x + a_2 x^2); similarly if we fit a polynomial of degree 3, then we fit the cubic polynomial (i.e. f(x) = a_0 + a_1 x + a_2 x^2 + a_3 x^3). Remark: The difference between this method and Int32), is that it allows the values of the fitted function to be evaluated over an extended range. That is, a range in the x-coordinate greater than the original given data set. Where the extended values are evaluated? The parameters step, forward, backward allows the position and number of additional points above and/or below the range of the values in the x-coordinate of the original data set to be given. The forward parameter specifies the number of the additional evaluation points of the fitted function which are greater than the values of the x-coordinates of the original data set. Similarly, the backward parameter specifies the number of the additional evaluation points of the fitted function which are lower than the values of the x-coordinates of the original data set. The step specifies the distance in the x-coordinate between each of the additional data points, where the first additional data point either above or below is exactly a distance of step from the points of the original data set which the highest and lowest values in the x-coordinate. For example, consider the data set x = 1, 2, 3; y = 1, 2, 3. Now if step = 1, forward = 2, and backward = 3, then this method when applied will return a two dimensional array. This two dimensional array will have the following structure: { { -2, f(-2) } { -1, f(-1) } { 0, f(0) }{ 1, 1 } { 2, 2 }{ 3, 3 } { 4, f(4) } { 5, f(5) } }, where f(-2), f(-1), f(0), f(4), f(5) correspond to the value of the fitted functions at the points x = -2, -1, 0, 4, 5, respectively. A series where the k-th element of the array represents of k-th point (i.e. { x_k, y_k }) of the total set over which the fitted function is evaluated. The total set over which the fitted function is evaluated consists of the `backward' points, original data set points and the `forward' points. Remark: This methods corresponds in functionality to the method of the same name within Microsoft Excel. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. The degree of the polynomial which is fitted to the data set given (i.e. if degree is 2, then a quadratic is fitted). The distance in the x-coordinate between two adjacent extended points. Please note that this also corresponds to the distance in the x-coordinate between the highest and lowest original data point and the first (above or below) additional evaluation point. The number of additional evaluation points which are evaluated above the x-coordinates of the original given data set. The number of additional evaluation points which are evaluated below the x-coordinates of the original given data set.

For example, if we fit a polynomial of degree 2, then we fit the quadratic polynomial (i.e. f(x) = a_0 + a_1 x + a_2 x^2); similarly if we fit a polynomial of degree 3, then we fit the cubic polynomial (i.e. f(x) = a_0 + a_1 x + a_2 x^2 + a_3 x^3). Remark: The difference between this method and Int32), is that it allows the values of the fitted function to be evaluated over an extended range. That is, a range in the x-coordinate greater than the original given data set. Where the extended values are evaluated? The parameters step, forward, backward allows the position and number of additional points above and/or below the range of the values in the x-coordinate of the original data set to be given. The forward parameter specifies the number of the additional evaluation points of the fitted function which are greater than the values of the x-coordinates of the original data set. Similarly, the backward parameter specifies the number of the additional evaluation points of the fitted function which are lower than the values of the x-coordinates of the original data set. The step specifies the distance in the x-coordinate between each of the additional data points, where the first additional data point either above or below is exactly a distance of step from the points of the original data set which the highest and lowest values in the x-coordinate. For example, consider the data set x = 1, 2, 3; y = 1, 2, 3. Now if step = 1, forward = 2, and backward = 3, then this method when applied will return a two dimensional array. This two dimensional array will have the following structure: { { -2, f(-2) } { -1, f(-1) } { 0, f(0) }{ 1, 1 } { 2, 2 }{ 3, 3 } { 4, f(4) } { 5, f(5) } }, where f(-2), f(-1), f(0), f(4), f(5) correspond to the value of the fitted functions at the points x = -2, -1, 0, 4, 5, respectively. A series where the k-th element of the array represents of k-th point (i.e. { x_k, y_k }) of the total set over which the fitted function is evaluated. The total set over which the fitted function is evaluated consists of the `backward' points, original data set points and the `forward' points. Remark: This methods corresponds in functionality to the method of the same name within Microsoft Excel. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. The degree of the polynomial which is fitted to the data set given (i.e. if degree is 2, then a quadratic is fitted). The start date of the trend line The end date of the trend line

For example, if we fit a polynomial of degree 2, then we fit the quadratic polynomial (i.e. f(x) = a_0 + a_1 x + a_2 x^2); similarly if we fit a polynomial of degree 3, then we fit the cubic polynomial (i.e. f(x) = a_0 + a_1 x + a_2 x^2 + a_3 x^3). Remark: The difference between this method and Int32), is that it allows the values of the fitted function to be evaluated over an extended range. That is, a range in the x-coordinate greater than the original given data set. Where the extended values are evaluated? The parameters step, forward, backward allows the position and number of additional points above and/or below the range of the values in the x-coordinate of the original data set to be given. The forward parameter specifies the number of the additional evaluation points of the fitted function which are greater than the values of the x-coordinates of the original data set. Similarly, the backward parameter specifies the number of the additional evaluation points of the fitted function which are lower than the values of the x-coordinates of the original data set. The step specifies the distance in the x-coordinate between each of the additional data points, where the first additional data point either above or below is exactly a distance of step from the points of the original data set which the highest and lowest values in the x-coordinate. For example, consider the data set x = 1, 2, 3; y = 1, 2, 3. Now if step = 1, forward = 2, and backward = 3, then this method when applied will return a two dimensional array. This two dimensional array will have the following structure: { { -2, f(-2) } { -1, f(-1) } { 0, f(0) }{ 1, 1 } { 2, 2 }{ 3, 3 } { 4, f(4) } { 5, f(5) } }, where f(-2), f(-1), f(0), f(4), f(5) correspond to the value of the fitted functions at the points x = -2, -1, 0, 4, 5, respectively. A series where the k-th element of the array represents of k-th point (i.e. { x_k, y_k }) of the total set over which the fitted function is evaluated. The total set over which the fitted function is evaluated consists of the `backward' points, original data set points and the `forward' points. Remark: This methods corresponds in functionality to the method of the same name within Microsoft Excel. A statistical series. The degree of the polynomial which is fitted to the data set given (i.e. if degree is 2, then a quadratic is fitted). The start date of the trend line The end date of the trend line

For example, if we fit a polynomial of degree 2, then we fit the quadratic polynomial (i.e. f(x) = a_0 + a_1 x + a_2 x^2); similarly if we fit a polynomial of degree 3, then we fit the cubic polynomial (i.e. f(x) = a_0 + a_1 x + a_2 x^2 + a_3 x^3). Remark: The difference between this method and Int32), is that it allows the values of the fitted function to be evaluated over an extended range. That is, a range in the x-coordinate greater than the original given data set. Where the extended values are evaluated? The parameters step, forward, backward allows the position and number of additional points above and/or below the range of the values in the x-coordinate of the original data set to be given. The forward parameter specifies the number of the additional evaluation points of the fitted function which are greater than the values of the x-coordinates of the original data set. Similarly, the backward parameter specifies the number of the additional evaluation points of the fitted function which are lower than the values of the x-coordinates of the original data set. The step specifies the distance in the x-coordinate between each of the additional data points, where the first additional data point either above or below is exactly a distance of step from the points of the original data set which the highest and lowest values in the x-coordinate. For example, consider the data set x = 1, 2, 3; y = 1, 2, 3. Now if step = 1, forward = 2, and backward = 3, then this method when applied will return a two dimensional array. This two dimensional array will have the following structure: { { -2, f(-2) } { -1, f(-1) } { 0, f(0) }{ 1, 1 } { 2, 2 }{ 3, 3 } { 4, f(4) } { 5, f(5) } }, where f(-2), f(-1), f(0), f(4), f(5) correspond to the value of the fitted functions at the points x = -2, -1, 0, 4, 5, respectively. A series where the k-th element of the array represents of k-th point (i.e. { x_k, y_k }) of the total set over which the fitted function is evaluated. The total set over which the fitted function is evaluated consists of the `backward' points, original data set points and the `forward' points. Remark: This methods corresponds in functionality to the method of the same name within Microsoft Excel. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. The degree of the polynomial which is fitted to the data set given (i.e. if degree is 2, then a quadratic is fitted). The start date of the trend line The end date of the trend line

Find the best fit for the function f(x) = A * pow (x, B ) where B = b and A = pow(e, a).

The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series.

Find the best fit for the function f(x) = A * pow (x, B ) where B = b and A = pow(e, a).

A statistical series.

Find the best fit for the function f(x) = A * pow (x, B ) where B = b and A = pow(e, a).

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Find the best fit for the function f(x) = A * pow (x, B ) where B = b and A = pow(e, a).

A series where the k-th element of the array represents of k-th point (i.e. { x_k, y_k }) of the total set over which the fitted function is evaluated. The total set over which the fitted function is evaluated consists of the `backward' points, original data set points and the `forward' points. A statistical series. The distance in the x-coordinate between two adjacent extended points. Please note that this also corresponds to the distance in the x-coordinate between the highest and lowest original data point and the first (above or below) additional evaluation point. The number of additional evaluation points which are evaluated above the x-coordinates of the original given data set. The number of additional evaluation points which are evaluated below the x-coordinates of the original given data set.

Find the best fit for the function f(x) = A * pow (x, B ) where B = b and A = pow(e, a).

A series where the k-th element of the array represents of k-th point (i.e. { x_k, y_k }) of the total set over which the fitted function is evaluated. The total set over which the fitted function is evaluated consists of the `backward' points, original data set points and the `forward' points. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. The distance in the x-coordinate between two adjacent extended points. Please note that this also corresponds to the distance in the x-coordinate between the highest and lowest original data point and the first (above or below) additional evaluation point. The number of additional evaluation points which are evaluated above the x-coordinates of the original given data set. The number of additional evaluation points which are evaluated below the x-coordinates of the original given data set.

This class contains advanced methods for calculating the best fitting curve of a data set. It allows the user to construct his own function.

Calcuates the modified Bessel function Ix(x) for any real x and n ≥ 2.

In(x) ≅ (1/√2πx)exp(x) Returns the modified Bessel function Ix(x) for any real x and n ≥ 2. The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. The grade of the function.

Calcuates the modified Bessel function Ix(x) for any real x and n ≥ 2.

In(x) ≅ (1/√2πx)exp(x) A statistical series. The grade of the function.

Calcuates the modified Bessel function Ix(x) for any real x and n ≥ 2.

In(x) ≅ (1/√2πx)exp(x) A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. The grade of the function.

Calcuates the modified Bessel function Jx(x) for any real x and n ≥ 2.

Jn(x) = √ (1/2πx)[Pn(8/x)cos(Xn) - Qn(8/x)sin(Xn)] where P,Q are polynomials and Xn ࣕ x - (2n+1)π/4 . Returns the modified Bessel function Ix(x) for any real x and n ≥ 2. The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. The grade of the function.

Calcuates the modified Bessel function Jx(x) for any real x and n ≥ 2.

Jn(x) = √ (1/2πx)[Pn(8/x)cos(Xn) - Qn(8/x)sin(Xn)] where P,Q are polynomials and Xn ࣕ x - (2n+1)π/4 . A statistical series. The grade of the function.

Calcuates the modified Bessel function Jx(x) for any real x and n ≥ 2.

Jn(x) = √ (1/2πx)[Pn(8/x)cos(Xn) - Qn(8/x)sin(Xn)] where P,Q are polynomials and Xn ࣕ x - (2n+1)π/4 . A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. The grade of the function.

Calcuates the modified Bessel function Kx(x) for any real x and n ≥ 2.

Kn(x) ≅ (1/√2πx)exp(-x) Returns the modified Bessel function Ix(x) for any real x and n ≥ 2. The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. The grade of the function.

Calcuates the modified Bessel function Kx(x) for any real x and n ≥ 2.

Kn(x) ≅ (1/√2πx)exp(-x) A statistical series. The grade of the function.

Calcuates the modified Bessel function Kx(x) for any real x and n ≥ 2.

Kn(x) ≅ (1/√2πx)exp(-x) A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. The grade of the function.

Calcuates the modified Bessel function n(x)]]> for any real x and n ≥ 0.

Yn(x) = √ (1/2πx)[Pn(8/x)cos(Xn) + Qn(8/x)sin(Xn)] where P,Q are polynomials and Xn ࣕ x - (2n+1)π/4 . Returns the modified Bessel function Ix(x) for any real x and n ≥ 2. The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. The grade of the function.

Calcuates the modified Bessel function Yx(x) for any real x and n ≥ 0.

n(x) = √ (1/2πx)[Pn(8/x)cos(Xn) + Qn(8/x)sin(Xn)]]]> where P,Q are polynomials and Xn ࣕ x - (2n+1)π/4. A statistical series. The grade of the function.

Calcuates the modified Bessel function Yx(x) for any real x and n ≥ 0.

n(x) = √ (1/2πx)[Pn(8/x)cos(Xn) + Qn(8/x)sin(Xn)]]]> where P,Q are polynomials and Xn ࣕ x - (2n+1)π/4. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. The grade of the function.

Calcuates the Beta function: B(z,w) = B(w,z) = ∫01 tz-1(1-t)w-1dt;.

The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. A series.

Calcuates the Beta function: B(z,w) = B(w,z) = ∫01 tz-1(1-t)w-1dt;.

A statistical series. A series.

Calcuates the Beta function: B(z,w) = B(w,z) = ∫01 tz-1(1-t)w-1dt;.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. A series.

Calcuates the complementary error function erfc(x).

erfc(x) = 1- erf(x) = 2/√π∫x∞e-t2> Returns the complementary error function which is a special case of incomplete gamma function. The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series.

Calcuates the complementary error function erfc(x).

erfc(x) = 1- erf(x) = 2/√π∫x∞e-t2> Returns the complementary error function which is a special case of incomplete gamma function. A statistical series.

Calcuates the complementary error function erfc(x).

erfc(x) = 1- erf(x) = 2/√π∫x∞e-t2> Returns the complementary error function which is a special case of incomplete gamma function. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Calcuates the error function erf(x).

erf(x) = 2/√π∫0xe-t2> Returns error function which is a special case of incomplete gamma function. The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series.

Calcuates the error function erf(x).

erf(x) = 2/√π∫0xe-t2> Returns error function which is a special case of incomplete gamma function. A statistical series.

Calcuates the error function erf(x).

erf(x) = 2/√π∫0xe-t2> Returns error function which is a special case of incomplete gamma function. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Calcuates the logarithm of Gamma function.

Gamma function is described below: Γ(z) = ∫0∞tz-1e-tdt The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series.

Calcuates the logarithm of Gamma function.

Gamma function is described below: Γ(z) = ∫0∞tz-1e-tdt A statistical series.

Calcuates the logarithm of Gamma function.

Gamma function is described below: Γ(z) = ∫0∞tz-1e-tdt A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Calcuates the incomplete Gamma function P(a, x).

The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. A double.

Calcuates the incomplete Gamma function P(a, x).

A statistical series. A double.

Calcuates the incomplete Gamma function P(a, x).

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. A double.

Calcuates the incomplete Gamma function Q(a, x).

The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series.

Calcuates the incomplete Gamma function Q(a, x).

A statistical series.

Calcuates the incomplete Gamma function Q(a, x).

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Evaluates the greatest likelyhood coefficients of the function of best fit in accordance with the least squares approach for the function basis given.

Further Details In its simplest case this method given a data set (x_i, y_i), for i=0, ..., m, are are able to find the coefficients a_1, ..., a_n such that the function: f(x) = a_1 * f_1(x) + a_2 * f_2 + ... + x_n * f_n(x) where f_1,...f_n are the function basis set using SetFunctionBasis method, and the function f(x), is best fit in accordance with the least square approach. That is, coefficients are selected such the points (x_i, f(x_i)), for i=1,...,m; are a best fit for the given data set (x_i, y_i), i=1,...,m. Fixing some Coefficients Please note that within this implementation we reserve the right to fix some of the coefficients before the function is fitted. In such instances the above described fitting is performed with some of the coefficients fixed to the initial value which they are given. The fit parameter is used in order to determine which (if any) of the coefficient are kept fixed during the fitting. Measure Errors or Weighted Best Fit In addition as mentioned within the overview of this class you are able to incorporate one of the following features when determining the greatest likelyhood coefficients: Measure Error: You are able to find the greatest likelyhood coefficients when the measure error (i.e. the standard deviations of the errors of the observation so the y_i's). In order to fit the function taking into account the measurment error you are required to provide the k-th term of the parameter sigma as the measurement error of the y_k(i.e. the value of the y-axis corrdinate of the k-th data point which in used within the fitting of the function. Weighted Best Fit: If you wish you are also able to apply this class with the view of finding the best weighted fit where the sigma_icorresponds the weight applied to the i-th data point. Returns an array of doubles where the k-th term corresponds to the value of the k-th coefficient within the function of best fit. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. An array where the k-th term depending on your point of view to one of the following: Measure Error View: is the standard deviation of the value in the y-axis of the k-th data point. Weighted Fitting View: is inverse of the weight given to the k-th data point. .

Evaluates the greatest likelyhood coefficients of the function of best fit in accordance with the least squares approach for the function basis given.

Further Details In its simplest case this method given a data set (x_i, y_i), for i=0, ..., m, are are able to find the coefficients a_1, ..., a_n such that the function: f(x) = a_1 * f_1(x) + a_2 * f_2 + ... + x_n * f_n(x) where f_1,...f_n are the function basis set using SetFunctionBasis method, and the function f(x), is best fit in accordance with the least square approach. That is, coefficients are selected such the points (x_i, f(x_i)), for i=1,...,m; are a best fit for the given data set (x_i, y_i), i=1,...,m. Fixing some Coefficients Please note that within this implementation we reserve the right to fix some of the coefficients before the function is fitted. In such instances the above described fitting is performed with some of the coefficients fixed to the initial value which they are given. The fit parameter is used in order to determine which (if any) of the coefficient are kept fixed during the fitting. Measure Errors or Weighted Best Fit In addition as mentioned within the overview of this class you are able to incorporate one of the following features when determining the greatest likelyhood coefficients: Measure Error: You are able to find the greatest likelyhood coefficients when the measure error (i.e. the standard deviations of the errors of the observation so the y_i's). In order to fit the function taking into account the measurment error you are required to provide the k-th term of the parameter sigma as the measurement error of the y_k(i.e. the value of the y-axis corrdinate of the k-th data point which in used within the fitting of the function. Weighted Best Fit: If you wish you are also able to apply this class with the view of finding the best weighted fit where the sigma_icorresponds the weight applied to the i-th data point. Returns an array of doubles where the k-th term corresponds to the value of the k-th coefficient within the function of best fit. A statistical series. An array where the k-th term depending on your point of view to one of the following: Measure Error View: is the standard deviation of the value in the y-axis of the k-th data point. Weighted Fitting View: is inverse of the weight given to the k-th data point. .

Evaluates the greatest likelyhood coefficients of the function of best fit in accordance with the least squares approach for the function basis given.

Further Details In its simplest case this method given a data set (x_i, y_i), for i=0, ..., m, are are able to find the coefficients a_1, ..., a_n such that the function: f(x) = a_1 * f_1(x) + a_2 * f_2 + ... + x_n * f_n(x) where f_1,...f_n are the function basis set using SetFunctionBasis method, and the function f(x), is best fit in accordance with the least square approach. That is, coefficients are selected such the points (x_i, f(x_i)), for i=1,...,m; are a best fit for the given data set (x_i, y_i), i=1,...,m. Fixing some Coefficients Please note that within this implementation we reserve the right to fix some of the coefficients before the function is fitted. In such instances the above described fitting is performed with some of the coefficients fixed to the initial value which they are given. The fit parameter is used in order to determine which (if any) of the coefficient are kept fixed during the fitting. Measure Errors or Weighted Best Fit In addition as mentioned within the overview of this class you are able to incorporate one of the following features when determining the greatest likelyhood coefficients: Measure Error: You are able to find the greatest likelyhood coefficients when the measure error (i.e. the standard deviations of the errors of the observation so the y_i's). In order to fit the function taking into account the measurment error you are required to provide the k-th term of the parameter sigma as the measurement error of the y_k(i.e. the value of the y-axis corrdinate of the k-th data point which in used within the fitting of the function. Weighted Best Fit: If you wish you are also able to apply this class with the view of finding the best weighted fit where the sigma_icorresponds the weight applied to the i-th data point. Returns an array of doubles where the k-th term corresponds to the value of the k-th coefficient within the function of best fit. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. An array where the k-th term depending on your point of view to one of the following: Measure Error View: is the standard deviation of the value in the y-axis of the k-th data point. Weighted Fitting View: is inverse of the weight given to the k-th data point. .

Evaluates the greatest likelyhood coefficients of the function of best fit in accordance with the least squares approach for the function basis given.

Further Details In its simplest case this method given a data set (x_i, y_i), for i=0, ..., m, are are able to find the coefficients a_1, ..., a_n such that the function: f(x) = a_1 * f_1(x) + a_2 * f_2 + ... + x_n * f_n(x) where f_1,...f_n are the function basis set using SetFunctionBasis method, and the function f(x), is best fit in accordance with the least square approach. That is, coefficients are selected such the points (x_i, f(x_i)), for i=1,...,m; are a best fit for the given data set (x_i, y_i), i=1,...,m. Fixing some Coefficients Please note that within this implementation we reserve the right to fix some of the coefficients before the function is fitted. In such instances the above described fitting is performed with some of the coefficients fixed to the initial value which they are given. The fit parameter is used in order to determine which (if any) of the coefficient are kept fixed during the fitting. Measure Errors or Weighted Best Fit In addition as mentioned within the overview of this class you are able to incorporate one of the following features when determining the greatest likelyhood coefficients: Measure Error: You are able to find the greatest likelyhood coefficients when the measure error (i.e. the standard deviations of the errors of the observation so the y_i's). In order to fit the function taking into account the measurment error you are required to provide the k-th term of the parameter sigma as the measurement error of the y_k(i.e. the value of the y-axis corrdinate of the k-th data point which in used within the fitting of the function. Weighted Best Fit: If you wish you are also able to apply this class with the view of finding the best weighted fit where the sigma_icorresponds the weight applied to the i-th data point. Returns an array of doubles where the k-th term corresponds to the value of the k-th coefficient within the function of best fit. A statistical series. An array where the k-th term depending on your point of view to one of the following: Measure Error View: is the standard deviation of the value in the y-axis of the k-th data point. Weighted Fitting View: is inverse of the weight given to the k-th data point. . The XValue of the starting point of the evaluation of best fitting curve. The XValue of the ending point of the evaluation of best fitting curve. The distance between two points.

Evaluates the greatest likelyhood coefficients of the function of best fit in accordance with the least squares approach for the function basis given.

Further Details In its simplest case this method given a data set (x_i, y_i), for i=0, ..., m, are are able to find the coefficients a_1, ..., a_n such that the function: f(x) = a_1 * f_1(x) + a_2 * f_2 + ... + x_n * f_n(x) where f_1,...f_n are the function basis set using SetFunctionBasis method, and the function f(x), is best fit in accordance with the least square approach. That is, coefficients are selected such the points (x_i, f(x_i)), for i=1,...,m; are a best fit for the given data set (x_i, y_i), i=1,...,m. Fixing some Coefficients Please note that within this implementation we reserve the right to fix some of the coefficients before the function is fitted. In such instances the above described fitting is performed with some of the coefficients fixed to the initial value which they are given. The fit parameter is used in order to determine which (if any) of the coefficient are kept fixed during the fitting. Measure Errors or Weighted Best Fit In addition as mentioned within the overview of this class you are able to incorporate one of the following features when determining the greatest likelyhood coefficients: Measure Error: You are able to find the greatest likelyhood coefficients when the measure error (i.e. the standard deviations of the errors of the observation so the y_i's). In order to fit the function taking into account the measurment error you are required to provide the k-th term of the parameter sigma as the measurement error of the y_k(i.e. the value of the y-axis corrdinate of the k-th data point which in used within the fitting of the function. Weighted Best Fit: If you wish you are also able to apply this class with the view of finding the best weighted fit where the sigma_icorresponds the weight applied to the i-th data point. Returns an array of doubles where the k-th term corresponds to the value of the k-th coefficient within the function of best fit. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. An array where the k-th term depending on your point of view to one of the following: Measure Error View: is the standard deviation of the value in the y-axis of the k-th data point. Weighted Fitting View: is inverse of the weight given to the k-th data point. . The XValue of the starting point of the evaluation of best fitting curve. The XValue of the ending point of the evaluation of best fitting curve. The distance between two points.

Here we offer the Levenberg - Marquardt algorithm which fits a given non-linear function set in accordance with the least squares approach.

This examlpe finds the real valued function of best fit, of the type considered in accordance with the least squares approach. That is, for the functon f, which depends on the parameters (or variables a[]), we find the variables such that: E = sum_k {(y[k] - f(x[k],a)) / s[k]}^2 is minimal, where: x[] - are the domain points, i.e. the points at which the values of the real valued function are evaluated. y[] - are the values of the data points at the domain values. a[] - the models parameters, that is the variables which the function which is being fitted depends on. s[] - the scale (or weight) which is applied to each error. That is, s[k] is the scale applied the error for the k-th data set point. Remark: The implemention of the function interface, implements two methods which return the value and the gradient of the function f(x,a), and not the functional E given above. Features of the Algorithm The algorithm for the non-linear framework finds the local minimum in accordance with the least squares approach. This mean that the initial point given from which the minimum is sort lies within the same basin of attraction of the global minimum. In practice, this means in particularly when a non-linear function with many terms is considered that the initial starting point is very carefully chosen. This is not a consequence of our implementation but the nature of the algorithm and problem at hand. The algorithms is of greedy type and essentially uses an abstraction of calculus based methods in which the best point in a neighbourhood of a point a chosen at each step. Remark: As a side note, the reason why the linear algorithm work so well is that it is based on a simplex algorithm which is combinatorial in nature. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. An array of doubles where the k-th terms corresponding to the weighting given to the model errors associated within the k-th data point. The parameters/state of the model. False to indicate the corresponding modelParameters[k] is to be held fixed.

Here we offer the Levenberg - Marquardt algorithm which fits a given non-linear function set in accordance with the least squares approach.

This examlpe finds the real valued function of best fit, of the type considered in accordance with the least squares approach. That is, for the functon f, which depends on the parameters (or variables a[]), we find the variables such that: E = sum_k {(y[k] - f(x[k],a)) / s[k]}^2 is minimal, where: x[] - are the domain points, i.e. the points at which the values of the real valued function are evaluated. y[] - are the values of the data points at the domain values. a[] - the models parameters, that is the variables which the function which is being fitted depends on. s[] - the scale (or weight) which is applied to each error. That is, s[k] is the scale applied the error for the k-th data set point. Remark: The implemention of the function interface, implements two methods which return the value and the gradient of the function f(x,a), and not the functional E given above. Features of the Algorithm The algorithm for the non-linear framework finds the local minimum in accordance with the least squares approach. This mean that the initial point given from which the minimum is sort lies within the same basin of attraction of the global minimum. In practice, this means in particularly when a non-linear function with many terms is considered that the initial starting point is very carefully chosen. This is not a consequence of our implementation but the nature of the algorithm and problem at hand. The algorithms is of greedy type and essentially uses an abstraction of calculus based methods in which the best point in a neighbourhood of a point a chosen at each step. Remark: As a side note, the reason why the linear algorithm work so well is that it is based on a simplex algorithm which is combinatorial in nature. A statistical series. An array of doubles where the k-th terms corresponding to the weighting given to the model errors associated within the k-th data point. The parameters/state of the model. False to indicate the corresponding modelParameters[k] is to be held fixed.

Here we offer the Levenberg - Marquardt algorithm which fits a given non-linear function set in accordance with the least squares approach.

This examlpe finds the real valued function of best fit, of the type considered in accordance with the least squares approach. That is, for the functon f, which depends on the parameters (or variables a[]), we find the variables such that: E = sum_k {(y[k] - f(x[k],a)) / s[k]}^2 is minimal, where: x[] - are the domain points, i.e. the points at which the values of the real valued function are evaluated. y[] - are the values of the data points at the domain values. a[] - the models parameters, that is the variables which the function which is being fitted depends on. s[] - the scale (or weight) which is applied to each error. That is, s[k] is the scale applied the error for the k-th data set point. Remark: The implemention of the function interface, implements two methods which return the value and the gradient of the function f(x,a), and not the functional E given above. Features of the Algorithm The algorithm for the non-linear framework finds the local minimum in accordance with the least squares approach. This mean that the initial point given from which the minimum is sort lies within the same basin of attraction of the global minimum. In practice, this means in particularly when a non-linear function with many terms is considered that the initial starting point is very carefully chosen. This is not a consequence of our implementation but the nature of the algorithm and problem at hand. The algorithms is of greedy type and essentially uses an abstraction of calculus based methods in which the best point in a neighbourhood of a point a chosen at each step. Remark: As a side note, the reason why the linear algorithm work so well is that it is based on a simplex algorithm which is combinatorial in nature. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. An array of doubles where the k-th terms corresponding to the weighting given to the model errors associated within the k-th data point. The parameters/state of the model. False to indicate the corresponding modelParameters[k] is to be held fixed.

Defines a set of static options used with FinancialEngine calculations.

Creates an instance of the componentname object.

Adds a sum of absolute functions to be used as basis element.

Where each of the elements of this sum takes the following form: absCoeff * Absn(coefficient * x + constant) where the Abs is the absolute functions given by: Abs(x) = x, if x > 0 Abs(x) = -x, if x < 0 An array where the k-th term is the coefficient of the whole k-th absolute function term within the sum. An array where the k-th term is the coefficient of the variable within the k-th absolute function term within the sum (i.e. coefficient as shown above). An array where the k-th term is the constant shift of the absolute function of the k-th term within the sum (i.e. the constant term as shown above). An array where the k-th term is the exponent of the absolute function term within the k-th element of the sum (i.e. n as shown above).

Adds a constant function on one real variable to the function basis.

The constant function takes the form: f(x) = constant where x is the variable and constant is a real number. The constant value taken by the constant function.

Adds a sum a Cosine functions to an elements of the function basis.

Please note that the k-th term of the sum which makes up the basis function will take to form: k-th Term = a_k * (Cosn_k (b_k * x + c_k)), where the Cosine function is in terms of radians, and a_k, n_k, b_k, c_k are real numbers. Please, in order to construct the sum you just sum over k starting at 0. Notes on the Radian measure Radians are a means by which to describe the angle and are related to the more commonly used degrees as follows: 360 degrees = 2 * Pi * radians therefore, 1 radian = 180 / Pi degrees = 57.295... degrees. An array where the k-th term is the coefficient of the (k+1)-th term of the sum of Cosine terms (i.e. a_k). An array where the k-th term is the coefficient of the Cosine term of the (k+1)-th term of the sum of the Cosine terms (i.e. b_k). An array where the k-th term is the constant shift in the x-axis of the Cosine term of the (k+1)-th term of the sum of Cosine terms (i.e. c_k). An array where the k-th term is the exponent of the Cosine term within the (k+1)-th term of the sum of the Cosine terms (i.e. n_k).

Adds a sum of exponential functions to be used as basis elements.

Where each of the elements of the sum given will take the following form: expCoeff * expn (coefficient * x + constant)) An array where the k-th term is the coefficient of the whole k-th exponential term within the sum. An array where the k-th term is the coefficient of the variable within the k-th exponential term within the sum (i.e. coefficient as shown above). An array where the k-th term is the constant shift of the exponential function of the k-th term within the sum (i.e. the constant term as shown above). An array where the k-th term is the exponent of the exponential term within the k-th element of the sum (i.e. n as shown above).

Adds a sum of (natural) log functions to be used as basis elements.

Where each of the elements of the sum given will take the following form: logCoeff * logn (coefficient * x + constant)) An array where the k-th term is the coefficient of the whole k-th logarithm term within the sum. An array where the k-th term is the coefficient of the variable within the k-th logarithm term within the sum (i.e. coefficient as shown above). An array where the k-th term is the constant shift of the logarithm function of the k-th term within the sum (i.e. the constant term as shown above). An array where the k-th term is the exponent of the logarithm term within the k-th element of the sum (i.e. n as shown above).

Adds a sum a Cosine functions as an element of the function basis.

Please note that the k-th term of the sum which makes up the basis function will take to form: k-th Term = r_k * a_(4k) * (Cosn_k + a_(4k+1) (b_k * a_(4k+2) * x + c_k + a_(4k+3))), (*) where the Cosine function is in terms of radians, and r_k, n_k, b_k, c_k are real numbers which are given by the parameters and a_(4k), a_(4k+1), a_(4k+2), a_(4k+3), a_(4k+4), are the variables which are to be fitted. In order to construct the sum you just sum over k starting at 0. That is, the term from which the basis elements will be constructed is: f(x, a_0, ..., a_4, ...., a_(4n+3)) = (sum of k of n-terms given by (*) above), where a_0,....., a_(4n+3) are the variables of the function which are to be fitted, and x is the variable which will not be fitted. Example In order to clarify the above explanation we provide an explicit example. In particular, in order to represent the following sum of cosine terms: f(x, a_0, a_1, ..., a_7) = a_0 * Cos2 * a_1 (b_0 * a_2 * x + a_3) + a_4 * Cos(1 * a_5) (b_1 * a_6 * x + 2 + a_7), you are required to pass the following parameters: Notes on the Radian measure Radians are a means by which to describe the angle and are related to the more commonly used degrees as follows: 360 degrees = 2 * Pi * radians therefore, 1 radian = 180 / Pi degrees = 57.295... degrees. An array where the k-th term is the coefficient of the (k+1)-th term of the sum of Cosine terms (i.e. a_k). An array where the k-th term is the coefficient of the Cosine term of the (k+1)-th term of the sum of the Cosine terms (i.e. b_k). An array where the k-th term is the constant shift in the x-axis of the Cosine term of the (k+1)-th term of the sum of Cosine terms (i.e. c_k). An array where the k-th term is the exponent of the Cosine term within the (k+1)-th term of the sum of the Cosine terms (i.e. n_k).

Adds a sum of exponential functions to be used as non-linear basis elements.

Adds a sum of (natural) log functions to be used as non-linear basis elements.

Adds a sum of Sine functions to the used as non-linear basis elements.

Please note that each term of the sum which makes up the basis function will take to form: sinCoeff * (sinn (coefficient * x + constant)), where the Sine function is in terms of radians. Notes on the Radian measure Radians are a means by which to describe the angle and are related to the more commonly used degrees as follows: 360 degrees = 2 * Pi * radians therefore, 1 radian = 180 / Pi degrees = 57.295... degrees. An array where the k-th term is the coefficient of the whole k-th cosine term within the sum. An array where the k-th term is the coefficient of the variable within the k-th sine term within the sum (i.e. coefficient as shown above). An array where the k-th term is the constant shift of the sine function of the k-th term within the sum (i.e. the constant term as shown above). An array where the k-th term is the exponent of the sine term within the k-th element of the sum (i.e. n as shown above).

Add a power term as an element of the function basis.

This elements will take the follow form: a_1 * x^n, where a_1, n are arbitrary real numbers. A double which is the coefficient of the term (i.e. a_1 above). A double which is the exponent of the variable of the term (i.e. n above).

Adds a rational expression where the numerator and denominator are both themselves a sum of power terms as defined within Double[]) to the function basis.

That is, the rational sum of the power terms takes the form: ( (a_1 * x^n_1) + ... + (a_p * x^n_p) ) / ( (b_1 * x^m_1) + ... + (b_q * x^m_q) ), where a_1,..., a_n, n_1,..., n_p, b_1,..., b_q are real numbers and x is the real variable. An array where the k-th term is the coefficient of the (k+1)-th term of the sum of power terms (i.e. a_k) which make up the numerator. An array where the k-th term is the exponent and the variable of the (k+1)-th power term (i.e. n_k) which make up the numerator. An array where the k-th term is the coefficient of the (k+1)-th term of the sum of power terms (i.e. b_k) which make up the denominator. An array where the k-th term is the exponent and the variable of the (k+1)-th power term (i.e. m_k) which make up the denominator.

Adds a sum of Sine functions to the used as basis elements.

Adds a sum of step functions to be used as a basis element.

Where each of the elements of the sum takes the following form: stepCoeff * Step(coefficient * x + constant), where the Step(x) is given by: Step(x) = 0, if x lequ; 0 Step(x) = 1, if x > 0 An array where the k-th term is the coefficient of the whole k-th step function term within the sum. An array where the k-th term is the coefficient of the variable within the k-th step function term within the sum (i.e. coefficient as shown above). An array where the k-th term is the constant shift of the step function of the k-th term within the sum (i.e. the constant term as shown above).

Adds a sum of power terms as an element of the function basis.

The sum of power terms will take the follow form: f(x, a0, a1, a2,..., a3n+2) = (r0 * a0 * (a1 * b0 * x + c0 + a2)p0) + ... + (rn * a3n * (a3n+1 * bb * x + cn + a3n+2)pn), where r0,..., rn, b0,..., bn, c0,..., cn, p0,..., pn are arbitrary real numbers, a0,..., a3n+2 are real numbers corresponding to values of the model parameters and x is a real variable. Remark: The sum of power terms for the non-linear factor model is a direct generalization of the sum of power terms contained within the General Linear Factor model (see GeneralLinearFactorModel). Example In order to clarify the use of this method we provide the following explicit example. In order to set the following term to an instance of the non-linear factor model: f(x, a0, a1, a2) = 2 * a0 * (a1 * 1 * x + a2 + 0)3, you must make a call to this method with the parameters: powerCoefficients = {2} coefficients = {1} constants = {0} exponents = {3} Using this method to represent a constant function term You are able to represent the constant function term: f(x, a0) = a0 * constant, by calling this method with the parameters constant, coefficients being an array of length 1, where the elements can take any (non-zero) value and powerCoefficients = {constant}, exponents = {0}. However in such an instance care must be taken to observe that in fact you are representing the constant functions using the sum of power terms convension in which: f(x, a0, a1, a2) = constant * a1 (a1 * x + a2)0 = constant * a1 In particular, you will need to keep track of the model parameters a1 and a2 above when calling methods such as GetValueAt, in which you will need to provide (in fact any) values for a1 and a2. Worked Example We considered the function: f(x, a0, a1,..., a8) = a0(a1x + a2) + a3(a4x + a5)2 + (2.5)a6(a7a0 + a8)0, which can be set to an instance of this class by calling this method with the parameters: logCoeffs = { 1.0, 1.0, 2.5 } coefficients = { 1.0, 1.0, 1.0 } constants = { 0.0, 0.0, 1.0 } exponents = { 1.0, 2.0, 0.0 } Therefore, for example when { a0, a1, ..., a8 } = { 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1 }, and evaluate the derivative and function itself using GetValueAt we find that: x = 0 x = 1 x = 2 ∂f/∂a0 = a0x + a1 1 2 3 ∂f/∂a1 = a0x 0 1 2 ∂f/∂a2 = a0 1 1 1 ∂f/∂a3 = (a4x + a5)2 1 4 9 ∂f/∂a4 = 2 a3(a4x + a5)x 0 4 12 ∂f/∂a5 = 2a3(a4x + a5) 2 4 6 ∂f/∂a6 = 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 ∂f/∂a7 = 0 0 0 0 ∂f/∂a8 = 0 0 0 0 f 4.5 8.5 14.5 Source Code Implementation: You can find the source code implementation of this example within the QAExample's within the Client/QAClients/ directory. In particular, this worked example corresponds to the example within the CurveFitting/NonLinearFunctionModel directory of the QAExamples. Note that within this implementation we construct the function described above by calling this method twice where the 1st method call defines to the sub-function which depends on (x, a0, ..., a5), and the 2-nd method call defines the constant function which depends on (x, a6, a7, a8). An array where the k-th term is the coefficient of the (k+1)-th term of the sum of power terms (i.e. rk+1). An array where the k-th term is the coefficient of the (space) variable of the argument of the power term (i.e. bk). An array where the k-th term is the constant shift in the x-axis of the power term of the (k+1)-th term of the sum of power terms (i.e. ck). An array where the k-th term is the exponent and the variable of the (k+1)-th power term (i.e. pk+1).

Adds a sum of power terms as an element of the function basis.

The sum of power terms will take the follow form: (a_1 * x^n_1) + ... + (a_m * x^n_p), where a_1,..., a_n, n_1,..., n_p are arbitrary real numbers. An array where the k-th term is the coefficient of the (k+1)-th term of the sum of power terms (i.e. a_k). An array where the k-th term is the exponent and the variable of the (k+1)-th power term (i.e. n_k).

Adds a sum of Tangent functions to the used as basis elements.

Please note that each term of the cum which makes up the basis function will take to form: tanCoeff * (tann (coefficient * x + constant)), where the Tangent function is in terms of radians. Notes on the Radian measure Radians are a means by which to describe the angle and are related to the more commonly used degrees as follows: 360 degrees = 2 * Pi * radians therefore, 1 radian = 180 / Pi degrees = 57.295... degrees. An array where the k-th term is the coefficient of the whole k-th tangent term within the sum. An array where the k-th term is the coefficient of the variable within the k-th tangent term within the sum (i.e. coefficient as shown above). An array where the k-th term is the constant shift of the tangent function of the k-th term within the sum (i.e. the constant term as shown above). An array where the k-th term is the exponent of the tangent term within the k-th element of the sum (i.e. n as shown above).

Resets the options to default settings.

This property sets and gets a format string used in the equation which is display on to the chart through a token.

This attribute allows the basis of functions which describes a factor model.

A factor model is a real vector space of functions from which a function will be selected in accordance with some criteria. That is, we allow the basis of functions f_1(x), f_2(x) , ..., f_n(x), which span the factor model, i.e. any element of the factor model can be represented as: a_1 * f_1(x) + a_2 * f_2(x) + ... + a_n * f_n(x) where a_1, ..., a_n are real numbers. Note that the above representation is unique.

This attribute holds the basis of functions which describes a factor model.

A factor model is a real vector space of functions from which a function will be selected in accordance with some criteria. That is, we allow the basis of functions f_1, f_2,..., f_n, which span the factor model, i.e. any element of the factor model can be represented as: f_1(x, a_1, ...., a_n) + f_2(x, a'_1,...., a'_n) + ... + f_n(x, a''_1, ....., a''_n) where x and a_1,..., a_n, a'_1,..., a'_n,..., a''_1,..., a''_n are real variables. For example the term f_1(x, a_1, a_2, a_3), could correspond to: f_1(x, a_1, a_2, a_3) = a_1 Sin(a_2 x + a_3) where a_1, a_2, a_3, are the variables which are to be fitted using the fitting algorithm. Ordering of the Variables Once the non-linear factor has been built (using this class) and fitted using the the non linear model algorithm, the values of the a_k which generate the best fitted curve in accordance with the least squares approach will be returned within an array.

This property sets and gets the number of decimal for the numbers used in the equations which can be display on to the chart through a token. [C#]ForecastEngine.Options.NumberPrecision = 2 ; [Visual Basic] ForecastEngine.Options.NumberPrecision = 2

Gets or sets a static value that determines whether elements derived from series will contain values of the original elements as dotnetCHARTING.SubValue objects.

Represents a hotspot on the image and provides events such as tool tips and redirect URL when clicked.

For more information, see tutorial: Getting Started > General Tutorials > Interactivity - Hotspots

Creates an instance of the HotSpot object.

Creates an instance of the HotSpot object with the specified url and tooltip.

The hotspot's url. The hotspot's tooltip.

Gets the HtmlAttributes of this Hotspot.

Gets or sets the tool tip text shown when mouse pointer is over the object this Hotspot represents. This property also supports label markup tags and microcharts.

Gets or sets the URL redirected to when the object this Hotspot represents is clicked.

Gets or sets the URL target of the URL property.

Encapsulates a number of pre-defined javascript actions and their values.

Creates an instance of the componentname object.

Gets or sets the text of a javascript alert pop-up.

Gets or sets the url the browser redirects to.

Gets or sets the url the current frame redirects to.

Gets or sets the status bar text message of the browser window.

Encapsulates a set of html event attributes and their values.

Creates an instance of the componentname object.

Gets or sets a ListCollection of custom html attributes.

Gets or sets the html OnClick attribute.

Gets or sets the html OnDoubleClick attribute.

Gets or sets the html OnMouseOver attribute.

Contains a collection of Hotspot objects.

Creates a new instance of HotspotCollection with the specified list of Hotspot objects.

Adds a specified HotspotCollection to this collection.

The HotspotCollection to add.

Adds the specified Hotspot objects to this collection.

A list of Hotspot objects to add.

Clears this collection.

Determines whether this collection contains a specified Hotspot.

true if the specified Hotspot belongs to this collection; otherwise, false. The Hotspot to find.

Determines index of a specified Hotspot in this collection.

The zero-based index of the specified Hotspot. The Hotspot to find.

Inserts a Hotspot into this collection at a specified index.

The zero-based index into the collection at which to insert the Hotspot. The Hotspot to insert into this collection.

Removes a specified Hotspot from this collection.

The Hotspot to remove.

Gets or sets the object at a specified index.

Represents a label containing text, a font, color, and other options.

Initializes a new instance of the Label class.

Initializes a new instance of the Label class with a font.

Font of this label.

Initializes a new instance of the Label class with text.

Text of this label.

Initializes a new instance of the Label class with text, and a font.

Text of this label. Font of this label.

Initializes a new instance of the Label class with text, font, and a color.

Text of this label. Font of this label. Color of this label.

Initializes a new instance of the Label class with text, font, color, and an outline color.

Text of this label. Font of this label. Color of this label. Outline Color of this label.

Gets or sets the alignment of this label.

Gets or sets a value that specifies whether this label will automatically wrap if it gets too long. This feature allows the chart to maintain the largest possible area for chart data.

This property does not affect AxisTick labels. Axis.TickLabelMode should be used instead in those cases.

Gets or sets the color of this label.

Gets or sets the font for this label.

Gets or sets a Color used to create a glow effect around the drawn text.

Gets or sets the Hotspot of this Label.

Gets or sets the line alignment of this label.

Gets or sets to color used to outline this label's text.

Gets or sets a Shadow object used to cast a shadow for this label's text.

Gets or sets the text for this label.

Gets or sets properties used to dynamically shorten this label when it reaches a maximum length.

Gets or sets a LabelType enumeration member which specifies the type of font used.

Contains a collection of LabelAlignment objects.

Creates an instance of the componentname object.

Adds a specified LabelAlignment enumeration to this collection.

The zero-based index of the added LabelAlignment. The LabelAlignment to add.

Determines whether this collection contains a specified LabelAlignment.

true if the specified LabelAlignment belongs to this collection; otherwise, false. The LabelAlignment to find.

Inserts a LabelAlignment enumeration into this collection at a specified index.

The zero-based index into the collection at which to insert the label alignment. The label alignment to insert into this collection.

Removes a specified label alignment from this collection.

The label alignment to remove.

Gets or sets the object at a specified index.

Contains a collection of LabelOverride objects.

Creates an instance of the componentname object.

Adds a specified LabelOverride class to this collection.

The zero-based index of the added LabelOverride. The LabelOverride to add.

Determines whether this collection contains a specified LabelOverride.

true if the specified LabelOverride belongs to this collection; otherwise, false. The LabelOverride to find.

Inserts a label override into this collection at a specified index.

The zero-based index into the collection at which to insert the label override. The label override to insert into this collection.

Removes a specified label override from this collection.

The label override marker to remove.

Gets or sets the object at a specified index.

Encapsulates a collection of LegendEntry objects.

The legend box has many options such as positioning, source of entries and more. See legend box tutorial for more info.

Initializes a new instance of the LegendBox class.

Gets or sets an array of StringAlignment enumeration members that specify the alignment of each column respectively. This setting applies for all legend entries in this legend box.

Source of objects to populate the legend with.

This DataSource is used with custom legend boxes added to Chart.ExtraLegendBoxes.

Gets or sets a LegendEntry that behaves as a vehicle for property settings that will propagate to all entries in this LegendBox.

The property settings of this object will not overwrite properties explicitly set for any given LegendEntry.

Gets a collection of additional LegendEntry objects that are added to this LegendBox.

Gets or sets a LegendEntry that is used as a header of this LegendBox.

This entry is not visible by default. To use it, set HeaderEntry.Visible = true. By default this object has different style settings that accentuate the fact that it is a header. Additional headers can be added to the ExtraEntries collection.

Obsolete, please use LegendBox.LabelStyle instead.

Gets or sets a Label object that encapsulates default label style properties applied to legend entries drawn in this LegendBox.

This property is the equivalent of LegendBox.DefaultEntry.LabelStyle.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether legend entries are listed top to bottom in multi-column legend boxes.

When false, entries are listed left to right across columns in multi-column legend boxes.

Gets or sets the legend entry column layout of this legend box.

Three tokens native to the legend box are: /Icon - Draws a LegendEntry object's icon (LegendEntry.Marker). /Name - Writes the legend entry's name (LegendEntry.Name). /Value - Writes the legend entry's value (LegendEntry.Value). NOTE: Legend entry properties like LegendEntry.Name can contain tokens used with the object the legend entry represents. Some examples of properly formed templates are: LegendBox.Template = "/Icon/Name/Value" LegendBox.Template = "/Name/Icon"

Contains a collection of LegendBox objects.

Creates a new instance of LegendBoxCollection with the specified list of LegendBox objects.

Adds a specified LegendBoxCollection to this collection.

The LegendBoxCollection to add.

Adds the specified LegendBox objects to this collection.

A list of LegendBox objects to add.

Determines whether this collection contains a specified LegendBox.

true if the specified LegendBox belongs to this collection; otherwise, false. The LegendBox to find.

Determines the index of a specified LegendBox in this collection.

The zero-based index of the specified LegendBox. The LegendBox to find.

Inserts a LegendBox into this collection at a specified index.

The zero-based index into the collection at which to insert the LegendBox. The LegendBox to insert into this collection.

Removes a specified LegendBox from this collection.

The LegendBox to remove.

Gets or sets the object at a specified index.

Represents an entry in the legend box.

Initializes a new instance of the LegendEntry class.

Initializes a new instance of the LegendEntry class with a Name and Value.

Sets the LegendEntry.Name property. Sets the LegendEntry.Value property.

Initializes a new instance of the LegendEntry class with a Name, Value and icon background.

Sets the LegendEntry.Name property. Sets the LegendEntry.Value property. Sets the LegendEntry.Background.Color property.

Initializes a new instance of the LegendEntry class with a Name, Value and icon color.

Sets the LegendEntry.Name property. Sets the LegendEntry.Value property. Sets the LegendEntry.Background.Color property.

Initializes a new instance of the LegendEntry class with a Name, Value and icon background.

Sets the LegendEntry.Name property. Sets the LegendEntry.Value property. Sets the string representation of the icon.

Gets or sets a Background object that influences how the entry's icon is drawn.

This object is used with the following settings LegendEntry.SeriesType = SeriesType.Column

Gets or sets a ListCollection that represents additional entry attributes.

In addition to name, value, and icon, the legend entry can contain further information such as descriptions or comments. These attributes will appear in a legend box when the LegendBox.Template string contains the custom attribute key prefixed with a ''.

Gets or sets a line DashStyle that influences how the entry's icon is drawn.

This object is used with the following settings LegendEntry.SeriesType = SeriesType.Marker LegendEntry.In3D = false

Gets or sets a DataSource object used to replace tokens.

Gets or sets a Line that is drawn under the LegendEntry.

This line doesn't appear automatically because it's color (LegendEntry.Line.Color) is Color.Empty. To activate it, specify a color for the line. When active, it will add more space between the this entry and the one below it.

Gets or sets an a LegendEntryHeaderMode enumeration that specifies a how this LegendEntry behaves.

Gets or sets the Hotspot of this LegendEntry.

Gets or sets a Label object that defines the font and color of this LegendEntry object's text.

Gets or sets an ElementMarker that influences how the entry's icon is drawn.

To draw only this marker as the icon, set LegendEntry.SeriesType = SeriesType.Marker.

Gets or sets the name of this legend entry.

Tokens may be used to describe the object represented by this legend entry.

Gets or sets a value (in pixels) that specifies additional padding above this LegendEntry object.

This property is useful when the LegendEntry is a header and starts a new group of entries. Additional spacing may be required between the groups to accentuate the separation between groups.

Gets or sets a SeriesType that influences how the entry's icon is drawn.

Gets or sets the shape type of this legend entry icon when LegendEntry.SeriesType = SeriesType.BubbleShape.

Gets or sets a value that represents the sort position of this LegenEntry when sorted with other entries in a LegendBox.

The default sort value of all legend entries is zero (0). To indicate that an entry is first in a legend box, set this property to -1.

Gets or sets this legend entry's tool tip.

Tokens may be used to describe the object represented by this legend entry.

Gets or sets the URL of this legend entry.

Tokens may be used to describe the object represented by this legend entry.

Gets or sets the URL target of this legend entry's link.

Gets or sets a value that specifies whether icons represent 2D or 3D series.

Gets or sets the value of this legend entry.

This string specified in the legend box column Template by the token 'Value'.

Gets or sets a value which specifies whether the legend entry is visible.

Contains a collection of LegendEntry objects.

Creates a new instance of LegendEntryCollection with the specified list of LegendEntry objects.

Adds a specified LegendEntry class to this collection.

The zero-based index of the added LegendEntry. The LegendEntry to add.

Adds a specified LegendEntryCollection to this collection.

The LegendEntryCollection to add.

Adds the specified LegendEntry objects to this collection.

A list of LegendEntry objects to add.

Determines whether this collection contains a specified LegendEntry.

true if the specified LegendEntry belongs to this collection; otherwise, false. The LegendEntry to find.

Determines the index of a specified LegendEntry in this collection.

The zero-based index of the specified LegendEntry. The LegendEntry to find.

Inserts a legend entry into this collection at a specified index.

The zero-based index into the collection at which to insert the legend entry. The legend entry to insert into this collection.

Removes a specified legend entry from this collection.

The legend element to remove.

Gets or sets the object at a specified index.

Defines styling used to draw a line or curve.

Initialize a new instance of the Line.

Initialize a new instance of the Line class with a color.

Color of the line.

Initialize a new instance of the Line class with a color and DashStyle.

Color of the line. DashStyle of this line.

Initialize a new instance of the Line class with a color and line width.

Color of the line. Width of the line.

Initialize a new instance of the Line class with a color, line width, and .

Gets or sets the amount by which to scale the line caps with respect to the width of the line. This feature only works with anchor LineCap members.

Gets or sets the color of this line.

Gets or sets the DashStyle of this line.

Gets or sets the LineCap that ends this line.

Gets or sets the length of this line.

Only used with the TickLine property and represents the tick line length.

Gets or sets the LineCap that starts this line.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether this line is visible.

Gets or sets the width of this line.

A list dictionary variation that allows adding items of the string type using a string.

Strings used to add items use the following syntax: "Key1=Value2,Key2=Value2"

Creates an instance of the componentname object.

Adds a single or multiple items using a string.

Creates a ListCollection object from a ListDictionary.

ListDictionary to instantiate with.

Contains the definition for options that control the navigator features and behavior.

Creates an instance of the componentname object.

Gets or sets the global animation duration in milliseconds. This applies to all animations between ranges on the x axis.

Gets or sets the ID of the silverlight plugin tag generated on the HTML page. Setting this property provides a reference to the silverlight plugin from within the page using JavaScript.

Redirect to the provided URL the end user does not have Silverlight installed. This property works with SilverlightInstall.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the status bar displays a help messages.

This may not work for some browsers by default. For example, to enable it in IE 8, choose Internet Options > Security tab > custom level > Under Scripting > Allow status bar updates via script, choose the Enable radio button. Using the SetHelpMessageHost javascript property of the client side chart, a text box or other element can be associated with this message.

Gets or sets a value that determines whether cells smaller than the axis ticks are used in the chart area axis.

Gets or sets a value that determines whether the navigator is enabled.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the mouse is tracked.

The chart can track the mouse position to determine the values of data at those positions. The mouse is tracked across the chart area and preview area and the values are reported in the respective chart area legends. When hovering cells on axes, the legends will reflect calculations based on the ranges of those cells.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether an image of the first chart area shown in the preview area.

Gets or sets a value that determines whether the Navigator displays as a windowless plug-in.

Gets or sets a value that determines if the horizontal scrollbar is enabled.

Gets or sets a value that determines whether an image of the chart is generated on the server to display while the Navigator chart is loading.

Generating the preview image may impact performance on the server side slightly. However, this may not be a problem for most cases unless the chart shows many elements in its initial view. Showing a preview chart while loading the Navigator will help provide a more seamless experience to the end user.

Gets or sets the LoadingAnimation type that displays while the client-side chart is loading.

Gets or sets the navigation bar settings and options.

Gets or sets a value that determines the height of the preview area in pixels.

Gets or sets the PreviewAreaNavigationOption enum flags that specify navigation options for the preview area.

Gets or sets the SilverlightInstall behavior when the end user does not have Silverlight installed.

Gets or sets a message used when suggesting the Silverlight plugin installation.

Gets or sets a message shown when the Silverlight plugin is not installed and a static chart image is used.

Gets or sets an object that determines the zoom limit. The object can be a TimeSpan, TimeInterval, or TimeIntervalAdvanced for time scales and Number for numeric and category scales.

Defines the navigation bar at the top of a navigator chart.

Creates an instance of the componentname object.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the history buttons are shown.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the range selectors are shown.

Gets or sets a string that determines the quick zoom intervals. A value of "Auto" will make the chart generate them automatically.

The Quick Zoom intervals are controled by a single string which can disable the buttons, make them determined automatically, specify what intervals to use, and optionally the label text of the buttons. The buttons support localization so users in different cultures will see the appropriate day/month abbreviations. The string takes a comma delimited list of intervals and supports custom label specification with an equal sign. Setting it to "Auto" will let the chart determine what the best buttons are. Syntax "[Multiplier][TimeInterval]=[Label],..." Intervals that are larger than the axis range or smaller than the zoomLimit will be omitted.

Represents an SQL parameter to use with a StoredProcedure.

Initializes a new instance of the Parameter class.

Initializes a new instance of the Parameter class with a name, value, and FieldType.

Name of the parameter. Value of the parameter. FieldType of the parameter.

Gets or sets the parameter name.

Gets or sets the parameter's FieldType.

Gets or sets the parameter's value.

Contains a collection of Parameter objects.

Creates an instance of the componentname object.

Adds a specified Parameter class to this collection.

The zero-based index of the added Parameter. The Parameter to add.

Adds a specified ParameterCollection to this collection.

ParameterCollection to add.

Determines whether this collection contains a specified Parameter.

true if the specified Parameter belongs to this collection; otherwise, false. The Parameter to find.

Inserts a Parameter into this collection at a specified index.

The zero-based index into the collection at which to insert the Parameter. The Parameter to insert into this collection.

Removes a specified Parameter from this collection.

The Parameter to remove.

Gets or sets the object at a specified index.

Represents a value or range of values on an axis scale. Values can be numeric, DateTime, and string types.

Instantiates a ScaleRange class with a low and high value.

Low value. High value.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether an AxisTick or AxisMarker object using this ScaleRange will force the axis to expand it's scale to show it.

When this option is used with a range instead of a single value. The axis maximum or minimum will snap to the outer edge of this range.

Gets or sets the numeric, DateTime, or text value of this ScaleRange.

Gets or sets the upper bounds of a numeric, DateTime, or text range.

When ValueLow and ValueHigh are equivalent, this AxisMarker is represented by the Line object, otherwise, Background fills the range between ValueLow and ValueHigh.

Gets or sets the lower bounds of a numeric, DateTime, or text range.

When ValueLow and ValueHigh are equivalent, this AxisMarker is represented by the Line object, otherwise, Background fills the range between ValueLow and ValueHigh.

Contains a collection of ScaleRange objects.

Creates a new instance of ScaleRangeCollection with the specified list of ScaleRange objects.

Adds a specified ScaleRangeCollection to this collection.

The ScaleRangeCollection to add.

Adds the specified ScaleRange objects to this collection.

A list of ScaleRange objects to add.

Adds a specified ScaleRange class to this collection.

The zero-based index of the added ScaleRange. The ScaleRange to add.

Determines whether this collection contains a specified ScaleRange.

true if the specified ScaleRange belongs to this collection; otherwise, false. The ScaleRange to find.

Inserts a ScaleRange into this collection at a specified index.

The zero-based index into the collection at which to insert the ScaleRange. The ScaleRange to insert into this collection.

Removes a specified ScaleRange from this collection.

The ScaleRange to remove.

Gets or sets the object at a specified index.

Encapsulates a group of elements.

The series represents a group of elements and also: Provides a mechanism for setting default properties of all elements within it. Controls all series specific properties such as it's LegendEntry or 2D line dash style (if applicable). Derives an element based on a Calculation performed on the elements within it. Provides data manipulation methods such as sorting and trimming of it's elements. See also:Data Model Tutorial

Initializes a new instance of the Series class with a name and the specified Elements.

Initializes a new instance of the Series class.

Initializes a new instance of the Series class with a name.

Name of the series.

Initializes a new instance of the Series class with a name and the specified Elements.

Name of the series. List of Element objects added to the series.

Initializes a new instance of the Series class with a name and the specified ElementCollection.

The ElementCollection object itself is not used by the series. The elements are copied to this series' ElementCollection. Name of the new series. Collection of elements assigned to this series.

Initializes a new instance of the Series class with a name and SeriesType.

Name of the series. Series type of the series.

Adds two Series objects together.

All element values such as YValue, XValue etc. are added based on element names. This means that only elements with the same name will be computed. Left hand side Series. Right hand side Series.

Adds a value to all elements in the rhs series.

A double value. A series.

Adds a value to all elements in the rhs series.

A series. A double value.

Adds the elements of the specified series to this series.

Series whose elements will be added.

Adds the specified elements to this series.

A list of elements to add

Adds a stored procedure when to use in conjunction with StoredProcedure.

Performs a Calculation on the current instance of this series.

Returns an Element object based on the specified Calculation. Name of the returned element. The calculation to perform. Name of the returned element. Calculation to perform. The ElementValue to store in the resulting element's SubValue collection.

Divides the element values of the series on the left by the element values of the series on the right.

All element values such as YValue, XValue etc. are divided based on element names. This means that only elements with the same name will be computed. Dividend series. Divisor series.

Divides the value on the left by the series on the right.

Dividend number. Divisor series.

Divides the series on the left by the value on the right.

Dividend series. Divisor number.

Creates a named series of element with the specified y values.

Name of resulting Series. YValues of resulting elements.

Creates a series of element with the specified y values.

YValues of resulting elements.

Gets a DataSource object representing this Series.

ID of the end node of the organizational chain. Template used for each element from the root to the element with with specified ID. Separator inserted into the resulting string between each element. ID of the end node of the organizational chain. Template used for each element from the root to the element with with specified ID. Template used for the last breadcrumb. This is provided so the last element doesnt have to be linked. Separator inserted into the resulting string between each element.

Calculates the interpolated X value of this series given the Y value.

Returns either a numeric or DateTime value when the provided y value is within the series range. Returns null otherwise. Specified Y value. This can be either a numeric or DateTime value.

Calculates the interpolated Y value of this series given the X value.

Returns either a numeric or DateTime value when the provided x value is within the series range. Returns null otherwise. Specified X value. This can be either a numeric or DateTime value.

Generates a SmartPalette object that contains the names of the elements in this Series matched with the specified Palette enumeration.

Generates a SmartPalette object that contains the names of the elements in this Series matched with the specified array of Color objects.

Gets a string containing a comma delimited list of the specified values for each element.

This method can be useful when constructing InfoGrids. A comma delimited list of the specified values for each element. The element value to get a list of.

Gets a string containing a comma delimited list of Y values.

This method can be useful when constructing InfoGrids. A comma delimited list of Y values.

Multiplies two Series objects together.

All element values such as YValue, XValue etc. are multiplied based on element names. This means that only elements with the same name will be computed. Left hand side Series. Right hand side Series.

Multiplies a series by a value.

Number multiplied by. Series multiplied by.

Multiplies a series by a value.

Series multiplied by. Series multiplied by.

Applies property settings of the specified default element to elements in this series that are outside a specified CalendarPattern and corresponding DateTime element property.

Applies property settings of the specified default element to elements in this series that are either outside or inside the specified CalendarPattern and corresponding DateTime element property.

CalendarPattern used to determine whether the default elements properties should be applied. DateTime Element value property to compare against the CalendarPattern. An Element object whose properties will be applied to elements in this series that meet the comparison criteria. Specifies whether to apply the provided element's properties to elements inside or outside the calendar pattern.

Applies property settings of the specified default element to elements in this series that are outside the specified DateTime range and corresponding DateTime element property.

Applies property settings of the specified default element to elements in this series that are either inside or outside the specified DateTime range and corresponding DateTime element property.

Low value of the DateTime range. High value of the DateTime range. A DateTime element value property. An Element object whose properties will be applied to elements in this series that meet the comparison criteria. Specifies whether to apply the provided element's properties to elements inside or outside the DateTime range.

Applies property settings of the specified default element to elements in this series that are either inside or outside the specified dotnetCHARTING.ScaleRange and corresponding DateTime element property.

Range of element values. Element value property. An Element object whose properties will be applied to elements in this series that meet the comparison criteria.

Applies property settings of the specified default element to elements in this series that are outside the specified dotnetCHARTING.ScaleRange and corresponding DateTime element property.

A scale range to compare ele An element value property. An Element object whose properties will be applied to elements in this series that meet the comparison criteria. Specifies whether to apply the provided element's properties to elements inside or outside the given range.

Applies property settings of the specified default element to elements in this series that are outside the specified numeric range and corresponding numeric element property.

Low value of the numeric range. High value of the numeric range. A numeric element value property. An Element object whose properties will be applied to elements in this series that meet the comparison criteria. Specifies whether to apply the provided element's properties to elements inside or outside the given range.

Sorts the Elements based on an element value property and sort order.

ElementValue to sort by. Takes "Desc" or "Asc" as inputs. If the string is not recognized "Asc" will be used.

Sorts the Elements based on an element property and order from the start index to the end index.

ElementValue to sort by. Takes "Desc" or "Asc" as inputs. If the string is not recognized "Asc" will be used. Index at which sorting starts. Index at which sorting stops.

Splits the elements into individual series per the specified TimeIntervalAdvanced.

The splitting is based on the element's XDateTime property. The TimeIntervalAdvanced that specifies the split intervals.

Splits a series to multiple series based on element subvalue's name.

Determine the number of series created.

Splits a series to multiple series based on element subvalue's name.

Determine the number of series created. Determine the type of limitation. Default is Top.

Splits a series to multiple series based on element subvalue's name.

Determine the number of series created. Determine the type of limitation. Default is Top. Determine whether the additional series are aggregated into a single series or not.

Splits a series to multiple series based on element subvalue's name.

Determine the number of series created. Determine the type of limitation. Default is Top. Determine whether the additional series are aggregated into a single series or not. Set the label used for the series created.

Splits a series to multiple series based on element subvalue's name.

Splits the elements based on the first split, then the resulting series are grouped based on the second split. A simple analogy is a stretch of measuring tape representing a timeline. The tape is cut into sections based on (first split), then the pieces are stacked on top of each other and cut again based on the second split. The resulting stacks are evaluated down to an element based on the specified calculation. As a real world example, consider you have a series with web site traffic represented by an element for each time the website was visited including a date and time. This method can parse the data in a way that allows determining the traffic for each day of the week throughout the entire span of time. This means all the traffic going through the website on any monday would be calculated down to a single element, same for tuesday and so on. This illustration shows how the data is arranged.

First split of the data. Second split used to group results from the first split. Calculation performed on elements when grouped by the second split into a single element.

First split of the data. Second split used to group results from the first split. Calculation performed on elements when grouped by the second split into a single element. Providing a format string will evaluate the grouped element's xDateTime based on this format string and it will become the resulting element's name. If true, the values from the elements that are grouped into a single element will propagate into the new element as subvalues. First split of the data. Second split used to group results from the first split. Calculation performed on elements when grouped by the second split into a single element. Providing a format string will evaluate the grouped element's xDateTime based on this format string and it will become the resulting element's name. The elements that are grouped to make up the resulting elements can be grouped by a time interval and added as subValues for each resulting element.

Subtracts the element values of series on the right from the series on the left.

All element values such as YValue, XValue etc. are subtracted based on element names. This means that only elements with the same name will be computed. Series subtracted from. Series subtracted by.

Subtracts all element values from the left hand side number.

Number subtracted from. Series subtracted by.

Subtracts the number on the right hand side from the element values of the series on the left.

Series subtracted from. Number subtracted by.

Trims elements out of this series either within or ourside the specified numeric range and element property.

The ElementValue specified must be a numeric value property. Numeric minimum of the range. Numeric maximum of the range. The ElementValue the range is compared to. Whether to trim elements within or outside the specified range. False by default (trims outside the range when calling the method without the inclusive parameter or when set to false.

Trims the elements ourside the specified numeric range and element property. dotnetCHARTING.ScaleRange.

The ElementValue specified must be a numeric value property. Numeric minimum of the range. Numeric maximum of the range. The ElementValue the range is compared to.

Trims the elements either within or ourside the specified values. dotnetCHARTING.ScaleRange.

Range of element values to trim. The ElementValue the range is compared to. Whether to trim elements within or outside the specified range. False by default (trims outside the range when calling the method without the inclusive parameter or when set to false.

Trims elements out of this series based on a specified dotnetCHARTING.CalendarPattern and element property.

Range of element values to trim. ElementValue to match against the calendar pattern.

Trims elements out of this series either within or ourside the specified time range and element property.

The ElementValue specified must be a DateTime property. DateTime minimum of the range. DateTime maximum of the range. The ElementValue the range is compared to. Whether to trim elements within or outside the specified range. False by default (trims outside the range when calling the method without the inclusive parameter or when set to false.

Trims elements out of this series based on a specified dotnetCHARTING.CalendarPattern and element property.

The ElementValue specified must be a DateTime value property. DateTime minimum of the range. DateTime maximum of the range. The ElementValue the date range is compared to.

Trims elements out of this series either within or ourside the specified dotnetCHARTING.CalendarPattern and element property.

The ElementValue specified must be a DateTime property. CalendarPattern used to trim the series. ElementValue to match against the calendar pattern. Whether to trim elements within or outside the specified range. False by default (trims outside the range when calling the method without the inclusive parameter or when set to false.

Trims elements out of this series outside a specified dotnetCHARTING.CalendarPattern and element property.

The ElementValue specified must be a DateTime property. CalendarPattern used to trim the series. ElementValue to match against the calendar pattern. A comma delimited list of node IDs that are expanded. A bool value indicating whether custom attributes are added to describe the nodes.

Trims this series of elements leaving only the specified number of levels from the root element.

Number of levels of children from the root element to return in the resulting series. ID of the root element in the resulting series. Number of levels of children from the root element to return in the resulting series. ID of the root element in the resulting series. Number of levels of children from the root element to return in the resulting series. A bool value indicating whether custom attributes are added to describe the nodes. The root element of the resulting series. Number of levels of children from the root element to return in the resulting series. The root element of the resulting series. Number of levels of children from the root element to return in the resulting series. A bool value indicating whether custom attributes are added to describe the nodes.

Adds a value to all elements in the rhs series.

A double value. A series.

Adds a value to all elements in the rhs series.

A series. A double value.

Adds two Series objects together.

All element values such as YValue, XValue etc. are added based on element names. This means that only elements with the same name will be computed. Left hand side Series. Right hand side Series.

Divides the value on the left by the series on the right.

Dividend number. Divisor series.

Divides the series on the left by the value on the right.

Dividend series. Divisor number.

Divides the element values of the series on the left by the element values of the series on the right.

All element values such as YValue, XValue etc. are divided based on element names. This means that only elements with the same name will be computed. Dividend series. Divisor series.

Multiplies a series by a value.

Number multiplied by. Series multiplied by.

Multiplies a series by a value.

Series multiplied by. Series multiplied by.

Multiplies two Series objects together.

All element values such as YValue, XValue etc. are multiplied based on element names. This means that only elements with the same name will be computed. Left hand side Series. Right hand side Series.

Subtracts all element values from the left hand side number.

Number subtracted from. Series subtracted by.

Subtracts the number on the right hand side from the element values of the series on the left.

Series subtracted from. Number subtracted by.

Subtracts the element values of series on the right from the series on the left.

All element values such as YValue, XValue etc. are subtracted based on element names. This means that only elements with the same name will be computed. Series subtracted from. Series subtracted by.

Gets or sets the background object used to fill a gauge face or radar associated with this series.

When using ChartType.Radar (single radar) use Chart.DefaultSeries.Background to control the radar background.

Gets or sets a box object that determines the box style and colors used with GaugeBorderShape.UseBox or ChartType.TreeMap.

Gets or sets the wait time before terminating the attempt to execute a command and generating an error.

Sets the database connection string used when dynamically obtaining charting data from a SQL statement.

This can be overridden or used in combination with the series level connectionstring. Access, Excel and SQL server are supported and automatically detected based on the connection string specified. See Getting Started > Tutorials > Connecting to data.

Gets or sets a DataTable, DataSet, DataView, XML file name, XML string, or an object that implement IEnumerable, ArrayList or HashTable used to generate a SeriesCollection.

When not connecting to a database directly using ConnectionString and SqlStatement, this property can be used to supply objects with data.

Gets or sets a value that specifies the 'database column' to 'chart data' relationship.

When programmatically setting a datatable or dataset, certain columns are expected with specific names. This property allows you to control the expected names. See Getting Started > Tutorials > Data Fields for more info.

Specifies a database type. Defaults to OleDb (Access database).

Gets or sets the an Element object whose properties will trickle to all elements within this series.

The properties of this element instance will trickle down to all elements within this series unless explicitly set for any particular element.

Gets or sets an Element object which facilitates a shortcut for adding elements to the chart.

Gets or sets a collection of Element objects associated with this series.

Gets or sets an EmptyElement object associated with this series.

The properties of this empty element apply to all elements in the Elements collection.

The ending date used with SqlStatement to query filtered data from a database.

This property affects the date listed in the title when Chart.ShowDateInTitle is used, it is also used for the SqlStatement property where the #EndDate# token is replaced with the value set to this property.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the element values of this series will affect the value axis they are plotted against.

Gets or sets a box object that determines the box style and colors used with GaugeBorderShape.UseBox.

Gets or sets the GaugeBorderShape of this series used with gauges.

Gets or sets the GaugeLinearStyle used with GaugeType.Horizontal and GaugeType.Vertical.

Get or sets the GaugeType used with ChartType.Gauges.

Gets or sets the hatch style palette used be the Elements of this series.

Gets or sets a Palette boolean which indicates which static palette will be used be the Elements of this series. Note If used, legend behavior will be different.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether repeating ImageBar templates will sync the number of times they repeat with the element's value.

Gets or sets the path and file name of the image bar template used when drawing elements of this series.

Gets or sets an Element of this Series at a specified index.

Gets or sets the legend entry properties of this series.

Gets or sets the limit number of elements returned for this series when data is generated.

This property determines the number of elements to include in the limited return in conjuction with LimitMode property. The limit string can be a number "3" or "2x3". In the second format, the first number determines the group positon and the second number is the limit. By setting "2x3" with top limit mode, it only return the second "3" maximum elements. Note: If DateGrouping is used limit has no effect, you can limit the return with the StartDate and EndDate in such a case. See also: Getting Started > Tutorials > Data Engine.

Determine the type of limitation for Limit and SplitByLimit properties. Default is Top.

This property works in conjunction with Limit or SplitByLimit to determine which elements or series should be included or excluded.

Gets or sets the line properties of this series.

This line object is used when the SeriesType of this series is Line, Spline, or AreaLine and Use3D is false.

Gets or sets the name of this series.

Controls the label used for the aggregated datapoint / series created when using Limit or SplitByLimit and setting ShowOther to true.

See Getting Started > Tutorials > Data Engine for more info.

Gets or sets the palette which will be used by the Elements of this series. Note If used, legend behavior will be different.

When setting this property, each element will get it's own color. Whereas by default, all elements within a series take their color from Series.DefaultElement.Color. When the chart detects that the elements have been individually colored, each element's LegendEntry will replace the single legend entry of the series in the legend box.

Gets or sets a Palette enumeration which indicates which static palette will be used by the Elements of this series. Note If used, legend behavior will be different.

Gets or sets a collection of Parameter objects used in conjunction with StoredProcedure

Gets or sets the position of this series in relation to other series when the chart is drawn.

Series with lower position values will be drawn closer to the front.

This property controls if the additional series not shown due to the use of SplitByLimit, or the additional elements not shown due to the use of Limit are aggregated into a single series / element and graphed alongside the top x series / elements.

See Gettings Started > Tutorials > Data Engine for more info. The default is false.

Gets or sets a value between 0 and 100 that specifies the tension of a spline curve.

Gets or sets the number of series created using SplitBy.

The SQL statement used to obtain the charting data.

The starting date used with SqlStatement to query filtered data from a database.

This property affects the date listed in the title when Chart.ShowDateInTitle is used, it is also used for the SqlStatement property where the #StartDate# token is replaced with the value set to this property.

This property accepts the name of a stored procedure to be used in place of the SqlStatement property in order to obtain data for the chart.

See the SqlStatement property for details on how the return columns are expected. Stored Procedures also work with parameters, see the FieldType) method.

Return the total number of elements in the elements collection. This property usually used in conjunction with Limit.

Gets or sets the type of this series.

This property accepts string, SeriesType, or dotnetCHARTING.SeriesTypeFinancial enumeration.

Gets or sets a value which indicates whether the series is visible.

This property is only valid when set through Chart.Series.Visible. Setting this property on a lone Series object would have no effect.

Gets or sets the x axis for this series.

Gets or sets the y axis for this series.

Contains a collection of Series objects.

This class can also perform calculations and data manipulation on the series it contains. See also:Data Model Tutorial

Initializes a new instance of the SeriesCollection class.

Initializes a new instance of the SeriesCollection class and adds the specified series to it.

List of Series to add to the collection.

Provided as a shortcut for adding elements, series, and series collections the chart SeriesCollection.

Adds a series to the collection based on the specified calculation.

Calculation to perform on the collection.

Adds a series calculated from a specified series.

Calculation to perform Name of the series to derrive a series from.

Adds a specified Series class to this collection.

The zero-based index of the added Series. The Series to add.

Adds a specified SeriesCollection to this collection.

The SeriesCollection to add.

Adds the specified Series objects to this collection.

A list of Series objects to add.

Adds Series of the specified SeriesCollection objects to this collection.

A list of SeriesCollection objects to add.

Performs a Calculation on this collection and stores the specified source element values in the resulting element's SubValue collections.

Returns a series based on the specified calculation. Name of the returned series. Calculation to perform on this collection. The ElementValue to store in the resulting element's SubValue collection.

Performs a calculation on this collection.

Returns a series based on the specified calculation. Name of the returned series. The calculation to perform on this collection.

Performs a Calculation on this collection with an extra parameter.

Calculation.TrendLineLinear and Calculation.TrendLineLinearScatter will yield a result with extra elements which simulate the continuance of a trend. Supplying the ExtraParam parameter denotes the number of extra elements to create. Returns a series based on the specified calculation. Name of the returned series. Calculation to perform on this collection. Extra parameter.

Performs a calculation on series in this collection that are bound to the specified axis.

Returns a series based on the specified calculation. Name of the returned series. Calculation to perform. The axis bound to data on which the calculation is performed.

Performs a calculation on this collection.

Returns an element based on the specified calculation. Name of the returned element. The calculation to perform on this collection.

Determines whether this collection contains a specified Series.

true if the specified Series belongs to this collection; otherwise, false. The Series to find.

Gets a collection of series associated with the specified axis.

Returns a series collection. The axis bound to data which will be returned in a series collection.

Gets a DataSource object representing this SeriesCollection.

Gets an Element at the specified series and element index.

Returns an Element at the specified series and element index. Index of the series. Indes of the element.

Gets an Element with the specified name from a named series.

Returns an Element with a specified name from a named series. Series name. Element name. ID of the end node of the organizational chain. Template used for each element from the root to the element with with specified ID. Separator inserted into the resulting string between each element. ID of the end node of the organizational chain. Template used for each element from the root to the element with with specified ID. Template used for the last breadcrumb. This is provided so the last element doesnt have to be linked. Separator inserted into the resulting string between each element.

Returns a DataTable of processed data.

Returns a data table of the processed data.Returns a data table of the processed data. This method usually called in PostDataProcessing event handler method when data generated dynamically from a database. Then, the datatable can be displayed with dataGrid or other controls.

Returns a DataTable of processed data.

Returns a data table of the processed data. This method usually called in PostDataProcessing event handler method when data generated dynamically from a database. Then, the datatable can be displayed with dataGrid or other controls.

Retrieves the named Series.

The named series. Name of the series to get

Generates a SmartPalette object that contains the names of series in this SeriesCollection matched with the specified Palette enumeration.

Palette used to generate the SmartPalette object.

Generates a SmartPalette object that contains the names of series in this SeriesCollection matched with the specified array of color objects.

Array of colors used to generate the SmartPalette.

Groups series into even element groups where every element will have a matching element in all other series.

The result will be series of even number of elements with the same names.

Determines the index of a specified Series in this collection.

Inserts a series into this collection at a specified index.

The zero-based index into the collection at which to insert the series. The series to insert into this collection.

Removes a specified series from this collection.

The series to remove.

Applies property settings of the specified default element to elements in this series collection that are outside a specified CalendarPattern and corresponding DateTime element property.

CalendarPatternused to determine whether the default elements properties should be applied. DateTime Element value property to compare against the CalendarPattern. An Element object whose properties will be applied to elements in this series collection that meet the comparison criteria.

Applies property settings of the specified default element to elements in this series collection that are either outside or inside the specified CalendarPattern and corresponding DateTime element property.

CalendarPattern used to determine whether the default elements properties should be applied. DateTime Element value property to compare against the CalendarPattern. An Element object whose properties will be applied to elements in this series collection that meet the comparison criteria. Specifies whether to apply the provided element's properties to elements inside or outside the calendar pattern.

Applies property settings of the specified default element to elements in this series collection that are outside the specified DateTime range and corresponding DateTime element property.

Applies property settings of the specified default element to elements in this series collection that are either inside or outside the specified DateTime range and corresponding DateTime element property.

Low value of the DateTime range. High value of the DateTime range. A DateTime element value property. An Element object whose properties will be applied to elements in this series collection that meet the comparison criteria. Specifies whether to apply the provided element's properties to elements inside or outside the DateTime range.

Applies property settings of the specified default element to elements in this series collection that are either inside or outside the specified dotnetCHARTING.ScaleRange and corresponding DateTime element property.

Range of element values. Element value property. An Element object whose properties will be applied to elements in this series collection that meet the comparison criteria.

Applies property settings of the specified default element to elements in this series collection that are outside the specified dotnetCHARTING.ScaleRange and corresponding DateTime element property.

A scale range to compare ele An element value property. An Element object whose properties will be applied to elements in this series collection that meet the comparison criteria. Specifies whether to apply the provided element's properties to elements inside or outside the given range.

Applies property settings of the specified default element to elements in this series collection that are outside the specified numeric range and corresponding numeric element property.

Low value of the numeric range. High value of the numeric range. A numeric element value property. An Element object whose properties will be applied to elements in this series collection that meet the comparison criteria. Specifies whether to apply the provided element's properties to elements inside or outside the given range.

Sorts the Series based on an element property and order.

ElementValue to sort by. Takes "Desc" or "Asc" as inputs. If the string is not recognized "Asc" will be used.

Sorts element groups by their cummulative values. Element groups are defined as elements in different series which share the same names.

Transposes the data of this series collection. Data is transposed by converting the series in this collection to elements and the element groups into series.

Transposes the data bound to a specified axis. Data is transposed by converting the series in this collection to elements and the element groups into series.

The axis bound to data that is to be transposed.

Trims this SeriesCollection of elements leaving only the specified number of levels from the root element.

A comma delimited list of node IDs that are expanded. A bool value indicating whether custom attributes are added to describe the nodes.

Trims this SeriesCollection of elements leaving only the specified number of levels from the root element.

Number of levels of children from the root element to return in the resulting SeriesCollection. ID of the root element in the resulting SeriesCollection. Number of levels of children from the root element to return in the resulting SeriesCollection. ID of the root element in the resulting SeriesCollection. Number of levels of children from the root element to return in the resulting SeriesCollection. A bool value indicating whether custom attributes are added to describe the nodes. The root element of the resulting SeriesCollection. Number of levels of children from the root element to return in the resulting SeriesCollection. The root element of the resulting series. Number of levels of children from the root element to return in the resulting series. A bool value indicating whether custom attributes are added to describe the nodes.

Gets or sets the Series at a specified index.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether smart element grouping is used or the traditional element name grouping is used where the elements of the first series determines the order.

Gets or sets a SmartPalette object that will determine the colors of series in this SeriesCollection.

Represents a shadow cast by chart objects such as a Box, Annotation, and others.

Creates an instance of the componentname object.

Gets or sets the color of this shadow.

Making this color partially transparent will give the shadow a more realistic look.

Gets or sets the shadow's depth.

Gets or sets a value which indicates whether this shadow is soft or solid.

Gets or sets a value indicating whether this shadow is visible.

Defines a SmartColor object that can be used applied to elements or series conditionally based on specific names or elements with values which fall within a specified range.

Initializes a new instance of the SmartColor object.

Initializes a new instance of the SmartColor object with a gradient consisting of two colors and scale range. By default this will check element's YValue to determine whether the element is colored based on this SmartColor.

SmartColor's main color. Secondary color. When used, this is a gradient SmartColor and elements are colored with colors ranging from the main to the secondary color depending on the element values. Value range criteria for elements matching the elementValue of each element.

Initializes a new instance of the SmartColor object with a color and scale range. By default this will check element's YValue to determine whether they inherit this color.

SmartColor's main color. Y value range criteria for elements.

Initializes a new instance of the SmartColor object with a color and scale range. This will check element's specified attribute to determine whether it inherits this color.

SmartColor's main color. Value range criteria for elements matching the elementValue of each element. Element value used to compare against the scale range to determine if an element uses this SmartColor.

Gets or sets the Color of this SmartColor object.

Gets or sets a secondary Color object. When set, it will represent the high range of the specified ScaleRange coloring elements based on a gradient from ScaleRange.Low/SmartColor.Color to ScaleRange.High/SmartColor.SecondaryColor.

Gets or sets the ElementValue that is used with this.ScaleRange to determine if elements use this color.

Gets or sets a LegendEntry that describes this object's color in the legend box.

Gets or sets the ScaleRange used with this.ElementValue to determine if elements use this color.

Encapsulates a Label object with advanced alignment and collision detection options.

Initializes a new instance of the SmartLabel class.

Gets or sets the absolute position of the smart label specified by a Point object.

Gets or sets the primary label alignment.

If the labels doesn't fit well given this alignment, alignments in the AlighmentSecondary collection are iterated (when DynamicDisplay is true) to find the first position that fits correctly.

Gets or sets a collection of secondary label alignment options.

When the primary Alignment option does not permit the room necessary to draw this label, the alignment options in this collection are iterated to find one that fits.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether smart labels are allowed to be positioned on top of element markers. This property should be set at the Chart.DefaultElement.SmartLabel property level.

Note: This feature incures a performance cost when many markers and labels are present. Setting this property to true may improve performance in some instances. When this feature is not used, the labels will still try to avoid markers, however, overlap may occur.

Gets or sets the maximum distance a label is allowed to be moved by DynaicPosition away from the element it is labeling.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the label is forced to be drawn even when there is no room. False means labels are always drawn.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the label will be positioned using collision detection.

This causes the labels to be conscious of each other and does not permit them to overlap. When a label is positioned away from the data point it represents, the SmartLabel.Line is drawn from the label's new position to the data point.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the label is forced to be drawn vertically.

When false, labels will be drawn vertically only on columns and cylinders that are not wide enough to fit the label horizontally. Otherwise, all labels will be vertical.

Gets or sets a Line object that facilitates the DynamicPosition functionality.

Lines are used to point to an element when a label can not be placed directly beside it.

Gets or sets the minimum amount of space between this label, other labels, and the element the label represents.

Gets or sets a PieLabelMode enumeration for pie and donut charts.

This setting will only apply when set through the Chart.DefaultSeries.DefaultElement.SmartLabel instance.

Gets or sets a RadarLabelMode enumeration for radar charts.

This setting will only apply when set through the Chart.DefaultSeries.DefaultElement.SmartLabel instance.

Contains collection of SmartPalette objects or dictionary like items of string and color pairs where strings refer to series or element names and colors that are assigned to series or elements with those names.

This object can be saved as XML and loaded for any other charts to use. To use a SmartPalette with a given chart, it to the Chart.SmartPalette property.

Initializes a new instance of the SmartPalette object.

Initializes a new instance of the SmartPalette object from xml data or filename.

Xml data or filename of the stored smart palette.

Adds the specified key and color item to this palette.

Name of series this palette will affect. A '*' wildcard can be used to affect all series regardless of their name. Color

Adds the specified key and smart color item to this palette.

Name of series this palette will affect. A '*' wildcard can be used to affect all series regardless of their name. Smart color used.

Adds the items in the specified palette to this palette.

Source palette.

Clears the SmartPalette.

Get a ScaleRange object representing the union of all value ranges defined by colors that match the specified key.

Get the thematic color based on the key and values of smartPalettes..

The name of a series or element, or "*" for all. Value to match with a scale range.

Imports a SmartPalette object from the specified xml file.

Path of XML file or XML data to load.

Removes an entry with the specified key from the collection.

Key of entry to remove.

Removes an item at the specified index from this collection.

The AxisTick to remove.

Saves the SmartPalette instance to an xml file.

Gets a String array containing all the keys (series or element names) in the SmartPalette.

Gets a Color array containing all the values (series / element colors) in the SmartPalette.

Gets a value indicating whether the SmartPalette has entries.

Gets or sets the value associated with the specified key.

Gets or sets the Color with the specified key.

Provides a set of methods that perform statistical analysis of series and series collections.

Creates an instance of the componentname object.

Within this class we offer procedures which evaluate the upper and lower Bollinger Bands.

Further Details Bollinger Bands are a type of envelope that are plotted at standard deviation levels above and below the corresponding (simple) moving average. This produces an effect of having the bands widen during periods of higher volatility and contract during less volatile periods. Bollinger Bands indicate the relative supply and demand for a given asset. If the asset to move close to the top of the envelope then it indicates that there is strong demand for the asset, conversely if the asset hugs the bottom of the trading range then it indicates that there is oversupply of the asset. Since the Bollinger Bands will nearly always be combined with other indicators when forming a trading system the number of periods used in the evaluation of the standard deviation of the stocks and the moving average will vary. For those without design restrictions a popular choice of the number of time periods is around 20-23. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. The (positive) number of standard deviations which the lower band in shifted from the moving average. The length of the moving average used within the evaluation of the Bollinger Bands. Note that this also corresponds to the length of the period over which the standard deviation is evaluated. The value of the cumulative frequency table values at a given point is the number of elements within the data set above the lowest value of that interval of the frequency table constructed in accordance with the open left boundary convention. Example Within this example we work through an illustration in which the cumulative frequency table from above using the open left boundary convention is evaluated. Consider the set of boundaries { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 }, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open left boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, 1], (1,2], (2,3], (3,4], (4,5], (5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. Therefore, if we consider the data set { 0.5, 1.4, 1.3, 2.0, 2.3, 4.5, 5.5}, if the assign this data set in accordance with the above the conventions then we will have: using Open Left Boundary (OLB) convention: Within the interval (-infinity, 1], we assign the data element 0.5; and hence the frequency of this interval is 1. Within the interval (1, 2], we assign the data element 1.4, 1.3, 2.0; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 3. Within the interval (2, 3], we assign the data element 2.3, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Within the interval (3, 4], we assign no data elements, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 0. Within the interval (4, 5], we assign the data element 4.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Within the interval (5, infinity), we assign the data element 5.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Now in follows that the associated values of the cumulative frequency table are given by: Cumulative frequency table above -infinity is: 1 + 1 + 0 + 1 + 3 + 1 = 7 Cumulative frequency table above 1is: 1 + 0 + 1 + 3 + 1 = 6 Cumulative frequency table above 2is: 0 + 1 + 3 + 1 = 5 Cumulative frequency table above 3is: 1 + 3 + 1 = 5 Cumulative frequency table above 4is: 3 + 1 = 4 Cumulative frequency table above 5is: 1 Hence, for this case the series returned by this methods to represent the cumulative frequency table would be: {7, 6, 5, 5, 4, 1}. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Calculates the cumulative frequency table from above for a discrete data set in accordance with the open left boundary (OLB) convention.

The value of the cumulative frequency table values at a given point is the number of elements within the data set above the lowest value of that interval of the frequency table constructed in accordance with the open left boundary convention. Example Within this example we work through an illustration in which the cumulative frequency table from above using the open left boundary convention is evaluated. Consider the set of boundaries { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 }, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open left boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, 1], (1,2], (2,3], (3,4], (4,5], (5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. Therefore, if we consider the data set { 0.5, 1.4, 1.3, 2.0, 2.3, 4.5, 5.5}, if the assign this data set in accordance with the above the conventions then we will have: using Open Left Boundary (OLB) convention: Within the interval (-infinity, 1], we assign the data element 0.5; and hence the frequency of this interval is 1. Within the interval (1, 2], we assign the data element 1.4, 1.3, 2.0; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 3. Within the interval (2, 3], we assign the data element 2.3, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Within the interval (3, 4], we assign no data elements, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 0. Within the interval (4, 5], we assign the data element 4.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Within the interval (5, infinity), we assign the data element 5.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Now in follows that the associated values of the cumulative frequency table are given by: Cumulative frequency table above -infinity is: 1 + 1 + 0 + 1 + 3 + 1 = 7 Cumulative frequency table above 1is: 1 + 0 + 1 + 3 + 1 = 6 Cumulative frequency table above 2is: 0 + 1 + 3 + 1 = 5 Cumulative frequency table above 3is: 1 + 3 + 1 = 5 Cumulative frequency table above 4is: 3 + 1 = 4 Cumulative frequency table above 5is: 1 Hence, for this case the series returned by this methods to represent the cumulative frequency table would be: {7, 6, 5, 5, 4, 1}. A statistical series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Calculates the cumulative frequency table from above for a discrete data set in accordance with the open left boundary (OLB) convention.

The value of the cumulative frequency table values at a given point is the number of elements within the data set above the lowest value of that interval of the frequency table constructed in accordance with the open left boundary convention. Example Within this example we work through an illustration in which the cumulative frequency table from above using the open left boundary convention is evaluated. Consider the set of boundaries { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 }, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open left boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, 1], (1,2], (2,3], (3,4], (4,5], (5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. Therefore, if we consider the data set { 0.5, 1.4, 1.3, 2.0, 2.3, 4.5, 5.5}, if the assign this data set in accordance with the above the conventions then we will have: using Open Left Boundary (OLB) convention: Within the interval (-infinity, 1], we assign the data element 0.5; and hence the frequency of this interval is 1. Within the interval (1, 2], we assign the data element 1.4, 1.3, 2.0; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 3. Within the interval (2, 3], we assign the data element 2.3, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Within the interval (3, 4], we assign no data elements, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 0. Within the interval (4, 5], we assign the data element 4.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Within the interval (5, infinity), we assign the data element 5.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Now in follows that the associated values of the cumulative frequency table are given by: Cumulative frequency table above -infinity is: 1 + 1 + 0 + 1 + 3 + 1 = 7 Cumulative frequency table above 1is: 1 + 0 + 1 + 3 + 1 = 6 Cumulative frequency table above 2is: 0 + 1 + 3 + 1 = 5 Cumulative frequency table above 3is: 1 + 3 + 1 = 5 Cumulative frequency table above 4is: 3 + 1 = 4 Cumulative frequency table above 5is: 1 Hence, for this case the series returned by this methods to represent the cumulative frequency table would be: {7, 6, 5, 5, 4, 1}. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Calculates the cumulative frequency table from above for a discrete data set in accordance with the open right boundary (ORB) convention.

The value of the cumulative frequency table values at a given point is the number of elements within the data set above the lowest value of that interval of the frequency table constructed in accordance with the open right boundary. Example Within this example we work through an illustration in which the cumulative frequency table from above using the open right boundary convention is evaluated. Consider the set of boundaries { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 }, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open right boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, 1), [1,2), [2,3), [3,4), [4,5), [5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. Therefore, if we consider the data set { 0.5, 1.4, 1.3, 2.0, 2.3, 4.5, 5.5}, and if we assign this data set in accordance with the Open Right Boundary (ORB) convention then we will have: Within the interval (-infinity, 1), we assign the data element 0.5; and hence the frequency of this interval is 1. Within the interval [1, 2), we assign the data element 1.4, 1.3; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 2. Within the interval [2, 3), we assign the data element 2.0, 2.3, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 2. Within the interval [3, 4), we assign no data elements, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 0. Within the interval [4, 5), we assign the data element 4.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 1. Within the interval [5, infinity), we assign the data element 5.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 1. Now in follows that the associated values of the cumulative frequency table are given by: Cumulative frequency table above -infinity is: 1 + 1 + 0 + 2 + 2 + 1 = 7 Cumulative frequency table above 1is: 1 + 0 + 2 + 2 + 1 = 6 Cumulative frequency table above 2is: 0 + 2 + 2 + 1 = 5 Cumulative frequency table above 3is: 2 + 2 + 1 = 5 Cumulative frequency table above 4is: 2 + 1 = 3 Cumulative frequency table above 5is: 1 Hence, for this case the series returned by this methods to represent the cumulative frequency table would be: {7, 6, 5, 5, 3, 1}. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Calculates the cumulative frequency table from above for a discrete data set in accordance with the open right boundary (ORB) convention.

The value of the cumulative frequency table values at a given point is the number of elements within the data set above the lowest value of that interval of the frequency table constructed in accordance with the open right boundary. Example Within this example we work through an illustration in which the cumulative frequency table from above using the open right boundary convention is evaluated. Consider the set of boundaries { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 }, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open right boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, 1), [1,2), [2,3), [3,4), [4,5), [5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. Therefore, if we consider the data set { 0.5, 1.4, 1.3, 2.0, 2.3, 4.5, 5.5}, and if we assign this data set in accordance with the Open Right Boundary (ORB) convention then we will have: Within the interval (-infinity, 1), we assign the data element 0.5; and hence the frequency of this interval is 1. Within the interval [1, 2), we assign the data element 1.4, 1.3; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 2. Within the interval [2, 3), we assign the data element 2.0, 2.3, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 2. Within the interval [3, 4), we assign no data elements, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 0. Within the interval [4, 5), we assign the data element 4.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 1. Within the interval [5, infinity), we assign the data element 5.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 1. Now in follows that the associated values of the cumulative frequency table are given by: Cumulative frequency table above -infinity is: 1 + 1 + 0 + 2 + 2 + 1 = 7 Cumulative frequency table above 1is: 1 + 0 + 2 + 2 + 1 = 6 Cumulative frequency table above 2is: 0 + 2 + 2 + 1 = 5 Cumulative frequency table above 3is: 2 + 2 + 1 = 5 Cumulative frequency table above 4is: 2 + 1 = 3 Cumulative frequency table above 5is: 1 Hence, for this case the series returned by this methods to represent the cumulative frequency table would be: {7, 6, 5, 5, 3, 1}. A statistical series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Calculates the cumulative frequency table from above for a discrete data set in accordance with the open right boundary (ORB) convention.

The value of the cumulative frequency table values at a given point is the number of elements within the data set above the lowest value of that interval of the frequency table constructed in accordance with the open right boundary. Example Within this example we work through an illustration in which the cumulative frequency table from above using the open right boundary convention is evaluated. Consider the set of boundaries { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 }, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open right boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, 1), [1,2), [2,3), [3,4), [4,5), [5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. Therefore, if we consider the data set { 0.5, 1.4, 1.3, 2.0, 2.3, 4.5, 5.5}, and if we assign this data set in accordance with the Open Right Boundary (ORB) convention then we will have: Within the interval (-infinity, 1), we assign the data element 0.5; and hence the frequency of this interval is 1. Within the interval [1, 2), we assign the data element 1.4, 1.3; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 2. Within the interval [2, 3), we assign the data element 2.0, 2.3, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 2. Within the interval [3, 4), we assign no data elements, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 0. Within the interval [4, 5), we assign the data element 4.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 1. Within the interval [5, infinity), we assign the data element 5.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 1. Now in follows that the associated values of the cumulative frequency table are given by: Cumulative frequency table above -infinity is: 1 + 1 + 0 + 2 + 2 + 1 = 7 Cumulative frequency table above 1is: 1 + 0 + 2 + 2 + 1 = 6 Cumulative frequency table above 2is: 0 + 2 + 2 + 1 = 5 Cumulative frequency table above 3is: 2 + 2 + 1 = 5 Cumulative frequency table above 4is: 2 + 1 = 3 Cumulative frequency table above 5is: 1 Hence, for this case the series returned by this methods to represent the cumulative frequency table would be: {7, 6, 5, 5, 3, 1}. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Calculates the cumulative frequency table from below for a discrete data set in accordance with the open left boundary (OLB) convention.

The value of the cumulative frequency table values at a given point is the number of elements within the data set below the highest value of that interval of the frequency table constructed in accordance with the open left boundary convention. Example Within this example we work through an illustration in which the cumulative frequency table from below using the open left boundary convention is evaluated. Consider the set of boundaries { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 }, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open left boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, 1], (1,2], (2,3], (3,4], (4,5], (5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. Therefore, if we consider the data set { 0.5, 1.4, 1.3, 2.0, 2.3, 4.5, 5.5}, if the assign this data set in accordance with the above the conventions then we will have: using Open Left Boundary (OLB) convention: Within the interval (-infinity, 1], we assign the data element 0.5; and hence the frequency of this interval is 1. Within the interval (1, 2], we assign the data element 1.4, 1.3, 2.0; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 3. Within the interval (2, 3], we assign the data element 2.3, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Within the interval (3, 4], we assign no data elements, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 0. Within the interval (4, 5], we assign the data element 4.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Within the interval (5, infinity), we assign the data element 5.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Now in follows that the associated values of the cumulative frequency table are given by: Cumulative frequency table up to 1 is: 1 Cumulative frequency table up to 2is: 4 Cumulative frequency table up to 3is: 5 Cumulative frequency table up to 4is: 5 Cumulative frequency table up to 5is: 6 Cumulative frequency table up to 5is: 7 Hence, for this case the series returned by this methods to represent the cumulative frequency table would be: {1, 4, 5, 5, 6, 7}. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Calculates the cumulative frequency table from below for a discrete data set in accordance with the open left boundary (OLB) convention.

The value of the cumulative frequency table values at a given point is the number of elements within the data set below the highest value of that interval of the frequency table constructed in accordance with the open left boundary convention. Example Within this example we work through an illustration in which the cumulative frequency table from below using the open left boundary convention is evaluated. Consider the set of boundaries { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 }, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open left boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, 1], (1,2], (2,3], (3,4], (4,5], (5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. Therefore, if we consider the data set { 0.5, 1.4, 1.3, 2.0, 2.3, 4.5, 5.5}, if the assign this data set in accordance with the above the conventions then we will have: using Open Left Boundary (OLB) convention: Within the interval (-infinity, 1], we assign the data element 0.5; and hence the frequency of this interval is 1. Within the interval (1, 2], we assign the data element 1.4, 1.3, 2.0; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 3. Within the interval (2, 3], we assign the data element 2.3, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Within the interval (3, 4], we assign no data elements, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 0. Within the interval (4, 5], we assign the data element 4.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Within the interval (5, infinity), we assign the data element 5.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Now in follows that the associated values of the cumulative frequency table are given by: Cumulative frequency table up to 1 is: 1 Cumulative frequency table up to 2is: 4 Cumulative frequency table up to 3is: 5 Cumulative frequency table up to 4is: 5 Cumulative frequency table up to 5is: 6 Cumulative frequency table up to 5is: 7 Hence, for this case the series returned by this methods to represent the cumulative frequency table would be: {1, 4, 5, 5, 6, 7}. A statistical series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Calculates the cumulative frequency table from below for a discrete data set in accordance with the open left boundary (OLB) convention.

The value of the cumulative frequency table values at a given point is the number of elements within the data set below the highest value of that interval of the frequency table constructed in accordance with the open left boundary convention. Example Within this example we work through an illustration in which the cumulative frequency table from below using the open left boundary convention is evaluated. Consider the set of boundaries { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 }, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open left boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, 1], (1,2], (2,3], (3,4], (4,5], (5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. Therefore, if we consider the data set { 0.5, 1.4, 1.3, 2.0, 2.3, 4.5, 5.5}, if the assign this data set in accordance with the above the conventions then we will have: using Open Left Boundary (OLB) convention: Within the interval (-infinity, 1], we assign the data element 0.5; and hence the frequency of this interval is 1. Within the interval (1, 2], we assign the data element 1.4, 1.3, 2.0; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 3. Within the interval (2, 3], we assign the data element 2.3, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Within the interval (3, 4], we assign no data elements, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 0. Within the interval (4, 5], we assign the data element 4.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Within the interval (5, infinity), we assign the data element 5.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Now in follows that the associated values of the cumulative frequency table are given by: Cumulative frequency table up to 1 is: 1 Cumulative frequency table up to 2is: 4 Cumulative frequency table up to 3is: 5 Cumulative frequency table up to 4is: 5 Cumulative frequency table up to 5is: 6 Cumulative frequency table up to 5is: 7 Hence, for this case the series returned by this methods to represent the cumulative frequency table would be: {1, 4, 5, 5, 6, 7}. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Calculates the cumulative frequency table from below for a discrete data set in accordance with the open right boundary (ORB) convention.

The value of the cumulative frequency table values at a given point is the number of elements within the data set below the highest value of that interval of the frequency table constructed in accordance with the open right boundary convention. Example Within this example we work through an illustration in which the cumulative frequency table from below using the open right boundary convention is evaluated. Consider the set of boundaries { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 }, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open right boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, 1), [1, 2), [2, 3), [3, 4), [4, 5), [5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. Therefore, if we consider the data set { 0.5, 1.4, 1.3, 2.0, 2.3, 4.5, 5.5}, if the assign this data set in accordance with the above the conventions then we will have using Open Right Boundary (ORB) convention: Within the interval (-infinity, 1], we assign the data element 0.5; and hence the frequency of this interval is 1. Within the interval [1, 2), we assign the data element 1.4, 1.3; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 2. Within the interval [2, 3), we assign the data element 2.0, 2.3; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 2. Within the interval [3, 4), we assign no data elements, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 0. Within the interval [4, 5), we assign the data element 4.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 1. Within the interval [5, infinity), we assign the data element 5.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 1. Now in follows that the associated values of the cumulative frequency table are given by: Cumulative frequency table up to 1 is: 1 Cumulative frequency table up to 2is: 3 Cumulative frequency table up to 3is: 5 Cumulative frequency table up to 4is: 5 Cumulative frequency table up to 5is: 6 Cumulative frequency table up to 5is: 7 Hence, for this case the series returned by this methods to represent the cumulative frequency table would be: {1, 3, 5, 5, 6, 7}. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Calculates the cumulative frequency table from below for a discrete data set in accordance with the open right boundary (ORB) convention.

The value of the cumulative frequency table values at a given point is the number of elements within the data set below the highest value of that interval of the frequency table constructed in accordance with the open right boundary convention. Example Within this example we work through an illustration in which the cumulative frequency table from below using the open right boundary convention is evaluated. Consider the set of boundaries { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 }, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open right boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, 1), [1, 2), [2, 3), [3, 4), [4, 5), [5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. Therefore, if we consider the data set { 0.5, 1.4, 1.3, 2.0, 2.3, 4.5, 5.5}, if the assign this data set in accordance with the above the conventions then we will have using Open Right Boundary (ORB) convention: Within the interval (-infinity, 1], we assign the data element 0.5; and hence the frequency of this interval is 1. Within the interval [1, 2), we assign the data element 1.4, 1.3; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 2. Within the interval [2, 3), we assign the data element 2.0, 2.3; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 2. Within the interval [3, 4), we assign no data elements, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 0. Within the interval [4, 5), we assign the data element 4.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 1. Within the interval [5, infinity), we assign the data element 5.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 1. Now in follows that the associated values of the cumulative frequency table are given by: Cumulative frequency table up to 1 is: 1 Cumulative frequency table up to 2is: 3 Cumulative frequency table up to 3is: 5 Cumulative frequency table up to 4is: 5 Cumulative frequency table up to 5is: 6 Cumulative frequency table up to 5is: 7 Hence, for this case the series returned by this methods to represent the cumulative frequency table would be: {1, 3, 5, 5, 6, 7}. A statistical series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Calculates the cumulative frequency table from below for a discrete data set in accordance with the open right boundary (ORB) convention.

The value of the cumulative frequency table values at a given point is the number of elements within the data set below the highest value of that interval of the frequency table constructed in accordance with the open right boundary convention. Example Within this example we work through an illustration in which the cumulative frequency table from below using the open right boundary convention is evaluated. Consider the set of boundaries { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 }, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open right boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, 1), [1, 2), [2, 3), [3, 4), [4, 5), [5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. Therefore, if we consider the data set { 0.5, 1.4, 1.3, 2.0, 2.3, 4.5, 5.5}, if the assign this data set in accordance with the above the conventions then we will have using Open Right Boundary (ORB) convention: Within the interval (-infinity, 1], we assign the data element 0.5; and hence the frequency of this interval is 1. Within the interval [1, 2), we assign the data element 1.4, 1.3; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 2. Within the interval [2, 3), we assign the data element 2.0, 2.3; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 2. Within the interval [3, 4), we assign no data elements, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 0. Within the interval [4, 5), we assign the data element 4.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 1. Within the interval [5, infinity), we assign the data element 5.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 1. Now in follows that the associated values of the cumulative frequency table are given by: Cumulative frequency table up to 1 is: 1 Cumulative frequency table up to 2is: 3 Cumulative frequency table up to 3is: 5 Cumulative frequency table up to 4is: 5 Cumulative frequency table up to 5is: 6 Cumulative frequency table up to 5is: 7 Hence, for this case the series returned by this methods to represent the cumulative frequency table would be: {1, 3, 5, 5, 6, 7}. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Calculates the coefficient of determination for the YValues of the series.

Explanation of the Coefficient of Determination The coefficient of determination is the amount of variation in the second variable (i.e. Y) which is explained by the regression line of the second variable Y on the first variable X (see Series)), divided by the total amount of variation of the second variable (i.e. Y). The coefficient of determination of the series The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series.

Calculates the coefficient of determination for the YValues of the series.

Explanation of the Coefficient of Determination The coefficient of determination is the amount of variation in the second variable (i.e. Y) which is explained by the regression line of the second variable Y on the first variable X (see Series)), divided by the total amount of variation of the second variable (i.e. Y). The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Calculates the coefficient of determination for the YValues of the series.

Explanation of the Coefficient of Determination The coefficient of determination is the amount of variation in the second variable (i.e. Y) which is explained by the regression line of the second variable Y on the first variable X (see Series)), divided by the total amount of variation of the second variable (i.e. Y). A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Calculates some quality control features like median, mean and percentile and integrate them within an element.

The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series.

Calculates some quality control features like median, mean and percentile and integrate them within an element.

A statistical series.

Calculates some quality control features like median, mean and percentile and integrate them within an element.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Calculates some quality control features like median, mean and percentile and integrate them within an element.

A statistical series.

Calculates some quality control features like median, mean and percentile and integrate them within an element.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Estimates the value of the X variable when the Y variable is known using the regression line of X on Y , which can be evaluated using Series).

The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series containing the elements for which the linear regression line is evaluated. the values of the Y coordinate for which the corresponding X coordinate in estimated in accordance with the linear regression line.

Estimates the value of the X variable when the Y variable is known using the regression line of X on Y , which can be evaluated using Series).

A statistical series containing the elements for which the linear regression line is evaluated. the values of the Y coordinate for which the corresponding X coordinate in estimated in accordance with the linear regression line.

Estimates the value of the X variable when the Y variable is known using the regression line of X on Y , which can be evaluated using Series).

The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. the values of the Y coordinate for which the corresponding X coordinate in estimated in accordance with the linear regression line.

Estimates the value of the X variable when the Y variable is known using the regression line of X on Y , which can be evaluated using Series).

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. the values of the Y coordinate for which the corresponding X coordinate in estimated in accordance with the linear regression line.

Estimates the value of the Y variable when the X variable is known using the regression line of Y on X , which can be evaluated using Series).

The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series containing the elements for which the linear regression line is evaluated. the values of the X coordinate for which the corresponding Y coordinate in estimated in accordance with the linear regression line.

Estimates the value of the Y variable when the X variable is known using the regression line of Y on X , which can be evaluated using Series).

A statistical series containing the elements for which the linear regression line is evaluated. the values of the X coordinate for which the corresponding Y coordinate in estimated in accordance with the linear regression line.

Estimates the value of the Y variable when the X variable is known using the regression line of Y on X , which can be evaluated using Series).

The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. the values of the X coordinate for which the corresponding Y coordinate in estimated in accordance with the linear regression line.

Estimates the value of the Y variable when the X variable is known using the regression line of Y on X , which can be evaluated using Series).

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. the values of the X coordinate for which the corresponding Y coordinate in estimated in accordance with the linear regression line.

Calculates the Exponential Probability Density function for a given series.

The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series containing the elements for which the normal probability distribution function is evaluated. The scale parameter value.

Calculates the Exponential Probability Density function for a given series.

A statistical series containing the elements for which the normal probability distribution function is evaluated. The scale parameter value.

Calculates the Exponential Probability Density function for a given collection of series.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. The scale parameter value.

Evaluates the (x-day) Exponentially Weighted Moving Average (EWMA) of a time series provided where x is the length of the time series array which is provided as a parameter, for all periods for which sufficient data is provided.

A series where the first term is the EWMA for the most recent period, the second term is the EWMA for the previous period and so on. A statistical series. The number between 0 and 1 which is known as a smoothing factor. The closer the value is to zero the more influence more resent measurements will have on the EWMA. The number of periods over which the moving average is evaluated for each period.

Evaluates the (x-day) Exponentially Weighted Moving Average (EWMA) of a time series provided where x is the length of the time series array which is provided as a parameter, for all periods for which sufficient data is provided.

A series where the first term is the EWMA for the most recent period, the second term is the EWMA for the previous period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. The number between 0 and 1 which is known as a smoothing factor. The closer the value is to zero the more influence more resent measurements will have on the EWMA. The number of periods over which the moving average is evaluated for each period.

Calculates the frequency table with respect to the open left boundary convention for YValues of the series.

Say for example the boundary points used are {b_1, b_2, ..., b_n}, now the first term of the array returned which represents the frequency table, is the number of elements from the data set within the interval (-infinity, b_1), the second term of the array returned is the number of elements from the data set within the interval [b_1, b_2), and so on... Example Consider the set of boundaries { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 }, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open left boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, 1], (1,2], (2,3], (3,4], (4,5], (5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. Therefore, if we consider the data set { 0.5, 1.4, 1.3, 2.0, 2.3, 4.5, 5.5}, if the assign this data set in accordance with the above the conventions then we will have: using Open Left Boundary (OLB) convention: Within the interval (-infinity, 1], we assign the data element 0.5; and hence the frequency of this interval is 1. Within the interval (1, 2], we assign the data element 1.4, 1.3, 2.0; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 3. Within the interval (2, 3], we assign the data element 2.3, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Within the interval (3, 4], we assign no data elements, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 0. Within the interval (4, 5], we assign the data element 4.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Within the interval (5, infinity), we assign the data element 5.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Hence, in this case the series returned corresponding to the frequency table will be {1, 3, 1, 0, 1, 1}. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Calculates the frequency table with respect to the open left boundary convention for YValues of the series.

Say for example the boundary points used are {b_1, b_2, ..., b_n}, now the first term of the array returned which represents the frequency table, is the number of elements from the data set within the interval (-infinity, b_1), the second term of the array returned is the number of elements from the data set within the interval [b_1, b_2), and so on... Example Consider the set of boundaries { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 }, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open left boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, 1], (1,2], (2,3], (3,4], (4,5], (5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. Therefore, if we consider the data set { 0.5, 1.4, 1.3, 2.0, 2.3, 4.5, 5.5}, if the assign this data set in accordance with the above the conventions then we will have: using Open Left Boundary (OLB) convention: Within the interval (-infinity, 1], we assign the data element 0.5; and hence the frequency of this interval is 1. Within the interval (1, 2], we assign the data element 1.4, 1.3, 2.0; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 3. Within the interval (2, 3], we assign the data element 2.3, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Within the interval (3, 4], we assign no data elements, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 0. Within the interval (4, 5], we assign the data element 4.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Within the interval (5, infinity), we assign the data element 5.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Hence, in this case the series returned corresponding to the frequency table will be {1, 3, 1, 0, 1, 1}. A statistical series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Calculates the frequency table with respect to the open left boundary convention for YValues of the series.

Say for example the boundary points used are {b_1, b_2, ..., b_n}, now the first term of the array returned which represents the frequency table, is the number of elements from the data set within the interval (-infinity, b_1), the second term of the array returned is the number of elements from the data set within the interval [b_1, b_2), and so on... Example Consider the set of boundaries { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 }, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open left boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, 1], (1,2], (2,3], (3,4], (4,5], (5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. Therefore, if we consider the data set { 0.5, 1.4, 1.3, 2.0, 2.3, 4.5, 5.5}, if the assign this data set in accordance with the above the conventions then we will have: using Open Left Boundary (OLB) convention: Within the interval (-infinity, 1], we assign the data element 0.5; and hence the frequency of this interval is 1. Within the interval (1, 2], we assign the data element 1.4, 1.3, 2.0; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 3. Within the interval (2, 3], we assign the data element 2.3, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Within the interval (3, 4], we assign no data elements, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 0. Within the interval (4, 5], we assign the data element 4.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Within the interval (5, infinity), we assign the data element 5.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt OLB convention) is 1. Hence, in this case the series returned corresponding to the frequency table will be {1, 3, 1, 0, 1, 1}. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Calculates the frequency table with respect to the open right boundary convention for a discrete data set.

Say for example the boundary points used are {b_1, b_2, ..., b_n}, now the first term of the array returned which represents the frequency table, is the number of elements from the data set within the interval (-infinity, b_1), the second term of the array returned is the number of elements from the data set within the interval [b_1, b_2), and so on... Example Consider the set of boundaries { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 }, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open right boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, 1), [1, 2), [2, 3), [3, 4), [4, 5), [5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. Therefore, if we consider the data set { 0.5, 1.4, 1.3, 2.0, 2.3, 4.5, 5.5}, if you assign this data set in accordance with the above the conventions then we will have using Open Right Boundary (ORB) convention: Within the interval (-infinity, 1], we assign the data element 0.5; and hence the frequency of this interval is 1. Within the interval [1, 2), we assign the data element 1.4, 1.3; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 2. Within the interval [2, 3), we assign the data element 2.0, 2.3; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 2. Within the interval [3, 4), we assign no data elements, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 0. Within the interval [4, 5), we assign the data element 4.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 1. Within the interval [5, infinity), we assign the data element 5.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 1. Hence, in this case the series returned corresponding to the frequency table will be {1, 2, 2, 0, 1, 1}. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Calculates the frequency table with respect to the open right boundary convention for a discrete data set.

Say for example the boundary points used are {b_1, b_2, ..., b_n}, now the first term of the array returned which represents the frequency table, is the number of elements from the data set within the interval (-infinity, b_1), the second term of the array returned is the number of elements from the data set within the interval [b_1, b_2), and so on... Example Consider the set of boundaries { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 }, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open right boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, 1), [1, 2), [2, 3), [3, 4), [4, 5), [5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. Therefore, if we consider the data set { 0.5, 1.4, 1.3, 2.0, 2.3, 4.5, 5.5}, if you assign this data set in accordance with the above the conventions then we will have using Open Right Boundary (ORB) convention: Within the interval (-infinity, 1], we assign the data element 0.5; and hence the frequency of this interval is 1. Within the interval [1, 2), we assign the data element 1.4, 1.3; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 2. Within the interval [2, 3), we assign the data element 2.0, 2.3; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 2. Within the interval [3, 4), we assign no data elements, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 0. Within the interval [4, 5), we assign the data element 4.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 1. Within the interval [5, infinity), we assign the data element 5.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 1. Hence, in this case the series returned corresponding to the frequency table will be {1, 2, 2, 0, 1, 1}. A statistical series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Calculates the frequency table with respect to the open right boundary convention for a discrete data set.

Say for example the boundary points used are {b_1, b_2, ..., b_n}, now the first term of the array returned which represents the frequency table, is the number of elements from the data set within the interval (-infinity, b_1), the second term of the array returned is the number of elements from the data set within the interval [b_1, b_2), and so on... Example Consider the set of boundaries { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 }, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open right boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, 1), [1, 2), [2, 3), [3, 4), [4, 5), [5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. Therefore, if we consider the data set { 0.5, 1.4, 1.3, 2.0, 2.3, 4.5, 5.5}, if you assign this data set in accordance with the above the conventions then we will have using Open Right Boundary (ORB) convention: Within the interval (-infinity, 1], we assign the data element 0.5; and hence the frequency of this interval is 1. Within the interval [1, 2), we assign the data element 1.4, 1.3; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 2. Within the interval [2, 3), we assign the data element 2.0, 2.3; and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 2. Within the interval [3, 4), we assign no data elements, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 0. Within the interval [4, 5), we assign the data element 4.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 1. Within the interval [5, infinity), we assign the data element 5.5, and hence the frequency of this interval (wrt ORB convention) is 1. Hence, in this case the series returned corresponding to the frequency table will be {1, 2, 2, 0, 1, 1}. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Calculates the geometric mean of the series's elements YValues.

The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series.

Calculates the geometric mean of the series's elements YValues.

A statistical series.

Calculates the geometric mean of the series's elements YValues.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Calculates the Geometric Moving Average (GMA) for a given period for all possible data points (i.e. periods) for which there is sufficient historical data provided.

A series where the first term corresponds to the Moving Average on the last period and the previous value is the value of the Moving average on the previous period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. The number of periods over which the moving average is evaluated for each period.

Calculates the Geometric Moving Average (GMA) for a given period for all possible data points (i.e. periods) for which there is sufficient historical data provided.

A series where the first term corresponds to the Moving Average on the last period and the previous value is the value of the Moving average on the previous period and so on. A statistical series. The number of periods over which the moving average is evaluated for each period.

Calculates the Geometric Moving Average (GMA) for a given period for all possible data points (i.e. periods) for which there is sufficient historical data provided.

A series where the first term corresponds to the Moving Average on the last period and the previous value is the value of the Moving average on the previous period and so on. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. The number of periods over which the moving average is evaluated for each period.

Calculates the Inter-Quartile Range(IQR) of the currently registered data set.

Recall that the IQR is the difference between the 1-st quartile (i.e. 25-th percentile) and the 2-nd quartile (i.e. the 75-th percentile). A statistical series.

Calculates the Inter-Quartile Range(IQR) of the currently registered data set.

Calculates the Kairi Indicator measure as a percentage of the element value, the divergence between the a moving average (generally the simple moving average) of the value and the value itself for each period for which there is sufficient historical values.

Calculates Kendall's correlation coefficient for the YValues of the series.

The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series.

Calculates Kendall's correlation coefficient for the YValues of the series.

A statistical series.

Calculates Kendall's correlation coefficient for the YValues of the series.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Calculates the kurtosis of the currently registered data set.

The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series.

Calculates the kurtosis of the currently registered data set.

A statistical series.

Calculates the kurtosis of the currently registered data set.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Constructs the regression line of X on Y using the method of least squares.

That is, the regression line using the least squares method is constructed when the first element of the pairs from which the data set of constructed is plot against the second elements of the pairs. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series.

Constructs the regression line of X on Y using the method of least squares.

That is, the regression line using the least squares method is constructed when the first element of the pairs from which the data set of constructed is plot against the second elements of the pairs. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Constructs the regression line of Y on X using the method of least squares.

That is, the regression line using the least squares method is constructed when the second element of the pairs from which the data set of constructed is plot against the first elements of the pairs. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series.

Constructs the regression line of Y on X using the method of least squares.

That is, the regression line using the least squares method is constructed when the second element of the pairs from which the data set of constructed is plot against the first elements of the pairs. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Returns the value of the Linearly Weighted Moving Average (LWMA) for all periods for which sufficient historical data is provided.

Calculates the Lognormal Probability Density function for a given series.

A statistical series containing the elements for which the normal probability distribution function is evaluated. The standard deviation of the distribution.

Calculates the Lognormal Probability Density function for a given collection of series.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. The standard deviation of the distribution.

Evaluates the position of the Lower Bollinger Band for a given standard deviation level.

Please note that by standard deviation level we not only refer to the number of standard deviations shifts away from the moving average at which the Lower Bollinger Band is drawn but also the number of time series points which are used in the evaluation of the standard deviation and the moving average. A series where the first term corresponds to the value of the Upper Bollinger Band for the latest periods, the second terms to the previous period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A series where the first term correspond the latest periods values and the previous element is the value of the element before that and so on... The length of this series is equal to the number of periods used in the evaluation of the standard deviation and the moving average. The number of standard deviation which the lower band in shifted from the moving average. The length of the moving average used within the evaluation of the Bollinger Bands. Note that this also corresponds to the length of the period over which the standard deviation is evaluated.

Evaluates the position of the Lower Bollinger Band for a given standard deviation level.

Calculates the arithmetic mean of the elements YValues of the series.

An element with his YValue representing the arithmetic mean of the elements YValues of the series The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series.

Calculates the arithmetic mean of the elements YValues of the series.

A statistical series.

Calculates the arithmetic mean of the elements YValues of each of the series within the collection of series.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Calculates the mean deviation of the series's element YValues.

The mean deviation is exactly what the name implies, that is, it is the arithmetic average of the differences from each of the elements of the series to the mean of the series. A statistical series.

Calculates the mean deviation of the series's element YValues.

Calculates the median of the series's elements YValues.

The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series.

Calculates the median of the series's elements YValues.

A statistical series.

Calculates the median of the series's elements YValues.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Returns the Median Moving Average of a given period of the data series provided for all possible periods for the data given.

A series where the first term is the value of the Median Moving Average for the most recent period, the second term is the value of the Median Moving Average for the previous period and so on. The name of the series. A series where the elements corresponds to the highest recorded values. A series where the elements corresponds to the lowest recorded values. The number of periods considered within the evaluation of the moving average of each of the days on which it can be evaluated.

Returns the Median Moving Average of a given period of the data series provided for all possible periods for the data given.

A series where the first term is the value of the Median Moving Average for the most recent period, the second term is the value of the Median Moving Average for the previous period and so on. A series where the elements corresponds to the highest recorded values. A series where the elements corresponds to the lowest recorded values. The number of periods considered within the evaluation of the moving average of each of the days on which it can be evaluated.

Returns the Median Moving Average of a given period of the data series provided for all possible periods for the data given.

A series where the first term is the value of the Median Moving Average for the most recent period, the second term is the value of the Median Moving Average for the previous period and so on. A colection of two series: a series where the elements corresponds to the highest recorded values and a series where the elements corresponds to the lowest recorded values. The number of periods considered within the evaluation of the moving average of each of the days on which it can be evaluated.

Calculates the Normal Probability Density function for a given series.

A statistical series containing the elements for which the normal probability distribution function is evaluated. The standard deviation of the distribution.

Calculates the Normal Probability Density function for a given collection of series.

Calculates the Pareto Probability Density function for a given series.

The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series containing the elements for which the normal probability distribution function is evaluated.

Calculates the Pareto Probability Density function for a given series.

A statistical series containing the elements for which the normal probability distribution function is evaluated.

Calculates the Pareto Probability Density function for a given collection of series.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Calculates Pearson's correlation coefficient for the YValues of the series.

Pearson's correlation coefficient of the series The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series.

Calculates Pearson's correlation coefficient for the YValues of the series.

Pearson's correlation coefficient of the series A statistical series.

Calculates Pearson's correlation coefficient for the YValues of the series.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Calculates the n-th percentile of the series's elements YValues.

Recall that the percentile is the value such that at least interest-percent of the data set items are less than or equal to this value, or equivalently if at least (100-interest) percent of the items are greater than or equal to this value. Remarks: The 50-th percentile is the measure of centrality of a data set known as the median. The median can also be evaluated using FinancialMedian. The 25-th, 50-th, 75-th percentiles are often referred to as the 1-st, 2-nd (median) and 3-rd quartile respectively. The term quartile refers to the fact that these three values will roughly divide the data set considered into four equal parts. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. A value between 1 and 100 which reprezent the value of the percetile.

Calculates the n-th percentile of the series's elements YValues.

Calculates the first percentile of the series's elements YValues.

Calculates the second percentile of the series's elements YValues.

Calculates the third percentile of the series's elements YValues.

Calculates the range of the series's elements YValues.

The range is the difference of a discrete data set is the difference between the largest and smallest members of the data set considered. A statistical series.

Calculates the range of the series's elements YValues.

Create the R Chart chart for a given SeriesCollection object.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Determines the residual for the current statistical series in accordance with the regression line constructed using LeastSquaresRegressionLineX.

The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series.

Determines the residual for the current statistical series in accordance with the regression line constructed using LeastSquaresRegressionLineX.

A statistical series.

Determines the residual for the current statistical series in accordance with the regression line constructed using LeastSquaresRegressionLineX.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Determines the arithmetic average of the residuals for all pairs of points within the current statistical series in accordance with the regression line constructed using LeastSquaresRegressionLineX.

The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series.

Determines the arithmetic average of the residuals for all pairs of points within the current statistical series in accordance with the regression line constructed using LeastSquaresRegressionLineX.

A statistical series.

Determines the arithmetic average of the residuals for all pairs of points within the current statistical series in accordance with the regression line constructed using LeastSquaresRegressionLineX.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Calculates the relative frequency table for a discrete data set in accordance with the open left boundary (OLB) convention.

The relative frequency table normalized the data with regard to the size of the data set before evaluating the frequency table is exactly the same fashion as StatisticalFrequencyTableOL. Further Explanation If we are comparing two or more data sets then the frequencies should be normalized to reflect the possible different sizes of the data sets themselves. To normalize a data set we much first divide the data set into a collection of classes into which the elements are assigned. Here we assign the data set in accordance with the open left boundary convention where the class frequencies are just the number of elements within each of the sub-intervals of the real line in accordance with the open left boundary convention (see example below). To evaluate the relative frequency we apply the following formula to each class: Relative frequency = (class frequency) / (total frequency) where the class frequency is the number of data points within a given sub-interval of the real line, and the total frequency is the total number of elements within the data set considered. Example Illustration the Open Left Boundary Convention Consider the set of boundaries { b_1, b_2, b_3, b_4, b_5 }, where b_1 < b_2 < b_3 < b_4 < b_5, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open left boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, b_1], (b_1,b_2], (b_2,b_3], (b_3,b_4], (b_4,b_5], (5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Calculates the relative frequency table for a discrete data set in accordance with the open left boundary (OLB) convention.

The relative frequency table normalized the data with regard to the size of the data set before evaluating the frequency table is exactly the same fashion as StatisticalFrequencyTableOL. Further Explanation If we are comparing two or more data sets then the frequencies should be normalized to reflect the possible different sizes of the data sets themselves. To normalize a data set we much first divide the data set into a collection of classes into which the elements are assigned. Here we assign the data set in accordance with the open left boundary convention where the class frequencies are just the number of elements within each of the sub-intervals of the real line in accordance with the open left boundary convention (see example below). To evaluate the relative frequency we apply the following formula to each class: Relative frequency = (class frequency) / (total frequency) where the class frequency is the number of data points within a given sub-interval of the real line, and the total frequency is the total number of elements within the data set considered. Example Illustration the Open Left Boundary Convention Consider the set of boundaries { b_1, b_2, b_3, b_4, b_5 }, where b_1 < b_2 < b_3 < b_4 < b_5, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open left boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, b_1], (b_1,b_2], (b_2,b_3], (b_3,b_4], (b_4,b_5], (5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. A statistical series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Calculates the relative frequency table for a discrete data set in accordance with the open left boundary (OLB) convention.

The relative frequency table normalized the data with regard to the size of the data set before evaluating the frequency table is exactly the same fashion as StatisticalFrequencyTableOL. Further Explanation If we are comparing two or more data sets then the frequencies should be normalized to reflect the possible different sizes of the data sets themselves. To normalize a data set we much first divide the data set into a collection of classes into which the elements are assigned. Here we assign the data set in accordance with the open left boundary convention where the class frequencies are just the number of elements within each of the sub-intervals of the real line in accordance with the open left boundary convention (see example below). To evaluate the relative frequency we apply the following formula to each class: Relative frequency = (class frequency) / (total frequency) where the class frequency is the number of data points within a given sub-interval of the real line, and the total frequency is the total number of elements within the data set considered. Example Illustration the Open Left Boundary Convention Consider the set of boundaries { b_1, b_2, b_3, b_4, b_5 }, where b_1 < b_2 < b_3 < b_4 < b_5, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open left boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, b_1], (b_1,b_2], (b_2,b_3], (b_3,b_4], (b_4,b_5], (5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Calculates the relative frequency table for a discrete data set in accordance with the open right boundary (ORB) convention.

The relative frequency table normalized the data with regard to the size of the data set before evaluating the frequency table is exactly the same fashion as StatisticalFrequencyTableOL. Further Explanation If we are comparing two or more data sets then the frequencies should be normalized to reflect the possible different sizes of the data sets themselves. To normalize a data set we much first divide the data set into a collection of classes into which the elements are assigned. Here we assign the data set in accordance with the open right boundary convention where the class frequencies are just the number of elements within each of the sub-intervals of the real line in accordance with the open right boundary convention (see example below). To evaluate the relative frequency we apply the following formula to each class: Relative frequency = (class frequency) / (total frequency) where the class frequency is the number of data points within a given sub-interval of the real line, and the total frequency is the total number of elements within the data set considered. Example Illustration the Open Right Boundary Convention Consider the set of boundaries { b_1, b_2, b_3, b_4, b_5 }, where b_1 < b_2 < b_3 < b_4 < b_5, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open right boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, b_1), [b_1,b_2), [b_2,b_3), [b_3,b_4), [b_4,b_5), [b_5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Calculates the relative frequency table for a discrete data set in accordance with the open right boundary (ORB) convention.

The relative frequency table normalized the data with regard to the size of the data set before evaluating the frequency table is exactly the same fashion as StatisticalFrequencyTableOL. Further Explanation If we are comparing two or more data sets then the frequencies should be normalized to reflect the possible different sizes of the data sets themselves. To normalize a data set we much first divide the data set into a collection of classes into which the elements are assigned. Here we assign the data set in accordance with the open right boundary convention where the class frequencies are just the number of elements within each of the sub-intervals of the real line in accordance with the open right boundary convention (see example below). To evaluate the relative frequency we apply the following formula to each class: Relative frequency = (class frequency) / (total frequency) where the class frequency is the number of data points within a given sub-interval of the real line, and the total frequency is the total number of elements within the data set considered. Example Illustration the Open Right Boundary Convention Consider the set of boundaries { b_1, b_2, b_3, b_4, b_5 }, where b_1 < b_2 < b_3 < b_4 < b_5, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open right boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, b_1), [b_1,b_2), [b_2,b_3), [b_3,b_4), [b_4,b_5), [b_5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Calculates the relative frequency table for a discrete data set in accordance with the open right boundary (ORB) convention.

The relative frequency table normalized the data with regard to the size of the data set before evaluating the frequency table is exactly the same fashion as StatisticalFrequencyTableOL. Further Explanation If we are comparing two or more data sets then the frequencies should be normalized to reflect the possible different sizes of the data sets themselves. To normalize a data set we much first divide the data set into a collection of classes into which the elements are assigned. Here we assign the data set in accordance with the open right boundary convention where the class frequencies are just the number of elements within each of the sub-intervals of the real line in accordance with the open right boundary convention (see example below). To evaluate the relative frequency we apply the following formula to each class: Relative frequency = (class frequency) / (total frequency) where the class frequency is the number of data points within a given sub-interval of the real line, and the total frequency is the total number of elements within the data set considered. Example Illustration the Open Right Boundary Convention Consider the set of boundaries { b_1, b_2, b_3, b_4, b_5 }, where b_1 < b_2 < b_3 < b_4 < b_5, which divide the real line into six sub-intervals. Now if we use the open right boundary convention then the real line will be divided into the sub-intervals: (-infinity, b_1), [b_1,b_2), [b_2,b_3), [b_3,b_4), [b_4,b_5), [b_5, infinity) Note that, each point on the real line can be assigned to one of these sub-intervals and therefore when assigning a data point to one of these intervals there will only be one sub-interval in which it belongs. A statistical series. A strictly increasing sequence of boundaries of the intervals over the real line in which the data sets point will be assigned.

Create the run chart for a given series.

An element with his YValue representing the arithmetic mean of the elements YValues of the series The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series.

Create the run chart for a given series.

A statistical series.

Create the run chart for a given SeriesCollection object.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Create the XBAR Chart based on R Chart results for a given SeriesCollection object.

Create the XBAR Chart based on R Chart for a given SeriesCollection object.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Create the S Chart chart for a given SeriesCollection object.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Calculates the arithmetic(or simple) Moving Average (MA) of a given period for all possible data points (i.e. periods) for which there is sufficient historical data provided.

A series where the first term corresponds to the Moving Average on the last period and the previous value is the value of the Moving average on the previous period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. The number of periods considered within the evaluation of the moving average for each of the periods on which it can be evaluated.

Calculates the arithmetic(or simple) Moving Average (MA) of a given period for all possible data points (i.e. periods) for which there is sufficient historical data provided.

A series where the first term corresponds to the Moving Average on the last period and the previous value is the value of the Moving average on the previous period and so on. A statistical series. The number of periods considered within the evaluation of the moving average for each of the periods on which it can be evaluated.

Calculates the arithmetic(or simple) Moving Average (MA) of a given period for all possible data points (i.e. periods) for which there is sufficient historical data provided.

A series where the first term corresponds to the Moving Average on the last period and the previous value is the value of the Moving average on the previous period and so on. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. The number of periods considered within the evaluation of the moving average for each of the periods on which it can be evaluated.

Calculates the skewness of the currently registered data set.

The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series.

Calculates the skewness of the currently registered data set.

A statistical series.

Calculates the skewness of the currently registered data set.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Calculates Spearson's Rank correlation coefficient for the current data set.

The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series.

Calculates Spearson's Rank correlation coefficient for the current data set.

A statistical series.

Calculates Spearson's Rank correlation coefficient for the current data set.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Calculates the sample standard variance of the series's elements YValues.

Create the XBAR Chart based on S Chart results for a given SeriesCollection object.

Create the XBAR Chart based on S Chart for a given SeriesCollection object.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

Evaluates the x-period Triangular Moving Average (TMA) where x corresponds to the length of the time series array given as a parameter, for all periods for which sufficient data is provided.

The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series. The number of periods over which the moving average is evaluated for each period.

Evaluates the x-period Triangular Moving Average (TMA) where x corresponds to the length of the time series array given as a parameter, for all periods for which sufficient data is provided.

A statistical series. The number of periods over which the moving average is evaluated for each period.

Evaluates the x-period Triangular Moving Average (TMA) where x corresponds to the length of the time series array given as a parameter, for all periods for which sufficient data is provided.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. The number of periods over which the moving average is evaluated for each period.

Evaluates the position of the Upper Bollinger Band for a given standard deviation level.

Please note that by standard deviation level we not only refer to the number of standard deviations shifts away from the moving average at which the Higher Bollinger Band is drawn but also the number of time series points which are used in the evaluation of the standard deviation and the moving average. A series where the first term corresponds to the value of the Upper Bollinger Band for the latest periods, the second terms to the previous period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An series where the first term correspond the latest periods value and the previous element is the value of the element before that and so on... The length of this series is equal to the number of periods used in the evaluation of the standard deviation. The (positive) number of standard deviations which the lower band in shifted from the moving average. The length of the moving average used within the evaluation of the Bollinger Bands. Note that this also corresponds to the length of the period over which the standard deviation is evaluated.

Evaluates the position of the Upper Bollinger Band for a given standard deviation level.

Calculates the sample variance of the series's elements YValues.

The name of the element which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. A statistical series.

Calculates the sample variance of the series's elements YValues.

A statistical series.

Calculates the sample variance of the series's elements YValues.

A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series.

That is, the weights are fixed for all given historical values and the window of length lengthOfMA over which the GMA is evaluated is shifted along the series. Application Generally speaking the WMA where the weights are all set and the window over which GMA is evaluated is shifted is used when you wish to give emphasis to particular dates. Note: The length of the weights array must equal or be greater than the length of the historicalPrices series. If it's greater than we ignore the supplementary values. A series where the first term is the value of the moving average corresponding of the latest period, the second term is the value for the previous period and so on. A collection of series objects. For example, to evaluate this indicator for two series you will need to pass a series collection containing this two series. A series of doubles which assigns weights to the k-th previous historical values for the given period on which the moving average is being evaluated. Here k is just the length of the weights array given. The number of periods over which the weighted moving average is evaluated.

Here we evaluate the Weighted Moving Average(WMA) where for each period for which the WMA is evaluated the historical terms are weighted in accordance with the same set of weights.

I.e. The weights shift with the window of the historical values. Application Generally speaking the WMA is used in order to allow more weight to be assigned to more resent price dynamics. Here the length of the weights array is used as the length of the period over which the moving average is calculated. If you wish to control the number of periods used within the moving average then we refer you to (historicalPrices, weights, lengthOfMovingAverage). A series where the first term is the value of the moving average corresponding of the latest period, the second term is the value for the previous period and so on. The name of the series which will be displayed on the chart, i.e. its label. An series of historical values, where the first element corresponds to the market on the last period, the second term to the value on previous period and so on. Array of doubles which assigns weights to the k-th previous historical values for the given period on which the moving average is being evaluated. Here k is just the length of the weights array given.

Here we evaluate the Weighted Moving Average(WMA) where for each period for which the WMA is evaluated the historical terms are weighted in accordance with the same set of weights.

Evaluates the z-score (often referred to as the standardized value) of an element series's element values.

The z-score denotes the number of standard deviations of a given element of the data set is from the mean of the data set. A statistical series.

Evaluates the z-score (often referred to as the standardized value) of an element series's element values.

Defines a set of static options used with StatisticalEngine calculations.

Creates an instance of the componentname object.

Resets the options to default settings.

Gets or sets a static value that determines whether elements derived from series will contain values of the original elements as dotnetCHARTING.SubValue objects.

Represents a value relative to or independent of the parent element's value.

Creates an instance of the componentname object.

Creates a new instance of a SubValue object with an independent range based on the specified low and high values.

Creates a new instance of a SubValue class with a single value offset from an element's Yvalue.

Creates a new instance of a SubValue class with a single value based on the specified percentage of the related element's Yvalue.

Creates a new instance of a SubValue class with a different range offset from an element's Yvalue in both directions. Hence, the resulting range will be the sum of the high and low offset values.

Creates a new instance of a SubValue class with a range offset from an element's Yvalue in both directions. Hence, the resulting range will be twice the specified offset value.

Creates a new instance of a SubValue class with a range based on the specified percentage of the related element's Yvalue in both directions. Hence, the resulting range will be twice the specified percentage.

Creates a new instance of a SubValue class with a single independent value.

Creates a new instance of a SubValue class with a single independent value and of the specified type.

Returns a SubValueCollection with a SubValue object for each of the specified values.

A comma delimited list of values.

Gets or sets a Line object used to draw the lines of this SubValue.

Gets or sets an ElementMarker object drawn when the SubValue's type is set to SubValueType.Marker..

Gets or sets a SubValueType that determines how this sub value is drawn.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether this sub value is visible.

Contains a collection of SubValue objects.

Creates a new instance of SubValueCollection with the specified list of SubValue objects.

Adds a specified SubValue class to this collection.

The zero-based index of the added SubValue. The SubValue to add.

Adds a specified SubValueCollection to this collection.

The SubValueCollection to add.

Adds the specified SubValue objects to this collection.

A list of SubValue objects to add.

Determines whether this collection contains a specified SubValue.

true if the specified SubValue belongs to this collection; otherwise, false. The SubValue to find.

Gets a comma delimited list of values in this SubValueCollection.

Determines index of a specified SubValue in this collection.

The zero-based index of the specified SubValue. The SubValue to find.

Inserts a SubValue into this collection at a specified index.

The zero-based index into the collection at which to insert the SubValue. The SubValue to insert into this collection.

Removes a specified SubValue from this collection.

The SubValue to remove.

Gets or sets the object at a specified index.

Represents a time interval and instant at which it occurs.

This time is specific down to the millisecond.

Creates a new instance of TimeIntervalAdvanced with a custom time span.

Creates a new instance of TimeIntervalAdvanced with a TimeInterval and a factor by which the interval is multiplied.

A base TimeInterval enumeration. Factor by which the to multiple the TimeInterval.

Creates a new instance of TimeIntervalAdvanced with a custom time span.

Adds a TimeInterval to the specified DateTime.

The date to add to. The TimeInterval to add.

Subtracts a TimeInterval from the specified DateTime.

The date to subtract from. The TimeInterval to add.

Adds a TimeIntervalAdvanced to a DateTime object.

Added to DateTime. TimeIntervalAdvanced to add.

Adds a TimeIntervalAdvanced to a DateTime object.

TimeIntervalAdvanced to add. Added to DateTime.

Indicates whether a specified TimeIntervalAdvanced is equal to another TimeIntervalAdvanced.

Indicates whether a specified TimeIntervalAdvanced is equal to a specified TimeInterval enumeration.

TimeIntervalAdvanced to compare. TimeInterval to compare.

Indicates whether a specified TimeIntervalAdvanced is equal to another TimeIntervalAdvanced.

left TimeIntervalAdvanced right TimeIntervalAdvanced

Indicates whether a TimeInterval and TimeIntervalAdvanced are not equal.

Indicates whether two TimeIntervalAdvanced instances are not equal.

Subtracts a TimeIntervalAdvanced from a DateTime object.

DateTime to subtract from. TimeIntervalAdvanced to subtract.

Gets a system-defined TimeIntervalAdvanced object.

Gets or sets the factor by which this time interval is multiplied.

If TimeSpan is specified, this property will not have any effect.

Gets a system-defined TimeIntervalAdvanced object.

Gets or sets a DateTime object representing the time instant at which this interval initially occurs.

Gets or sets the day of the week at which this interval initially occurs. Value ranges from zero indicating Sunday, to six, indicating Saturday.

Gets or sets the month of year at which this interval initially occurs. Value ranges from zero indicating January, to eleven, indicating December.

Gets or sets a custom time span between each time instant occurrence.

Gets a system-defined TimeIntervalAdvanced object.

Contains a collection of TimeInterval objects.

Creates a new instance of TimeIntervalCollection with the specified list of TimeInterval objects.

Adds a specified TimeIntervalCollection to this collection.

The TimeIntervalCollection to add.

Adds the specified TimeInterval objects to this collection.

A list of TimeInterval objects to add.

Determines whether this collection contains a specified TimeInterval.

true if the specified TimeInterval belongs to this collection; otherwise, false. The TimeInterval to find.

Determines index of a specified TimeInterval in this collection.

The zero-based index of the specified TimeInterval. The TimeInterval to find.

Inserts a TimeInterval into this collection at a specified index.

The zero-based index into the collection at which to insert the TimeInterval. The TimeInterval to insert into this collection.

Removes a specified TimeInterval from this collection.

The TimeInterval to remove.

Gets or sets the object at a specified index.

Defines properties used to shorten long labels.

Initializes a new instance of the Truncation class.

Gets or sets the maximum number of characters a label is shortened to.

Gets or sets the TruncationMode used to shorten this label.

Gets or sets a string that defines text inserted into a string at the position it was trimmed. Default is '...'

An extension to the Axis.ViewRange property. Defines the visible scale range or zoom range when using AJAX scrolling. Setting the properties of this class allows zooming the chart programatically.

Gets or sets the number of element groups visible within the chart area. Element groups can be synonymous with a category axis tick count.

To specify a starting position with a category axis, use the ScaleRange Property property with indexes of each element group.

Gets or sets the visible numeric range of a numeric axis.

Gets or sets a scale range that indicates the range of an axis to show at a time as well as a starting position.

When the viewport is used with a category axis (string values like element names), the min and max values of the scale range must be integers and they refer to the index of the axis ticks.

Gets or sets the a time span of an axis that is visible in the chart area.

Defines a type of projection used for rendering maps.

Specifies an unprojected map view.

Specified the Mercator projection type.

Specified the Lambert Conic projection type.

Represents a single or multiple conditions that are used to group shapes within a map layer. This object is used with MapLayer.Groups.

Initializes a new instance of the Group object with the specified name.

Initializes a new instance of the Group object.

Initializes a new instance of the Group object with a specified label.

Initializes a new instance of the Group object with the specified name.

Name of this group

Initializes a new instance of the Group object with a specified condition.

Attribute to compare Value that must me matched.

Gets a collection of conditions that shapes within this group must meet.

Gets or sets a shape object that holds the default settings for shapes in this group.

Gets or sets a single Label object used for this entire group of shapes.

Gets or sets the name of this group.

Contains a collection of Group objects.

Creates a new instance of GropuCollection with the specified list of Group objects.

Adds a specified GroupCollection to this collection.

The GropuCollection to add.

Adds the specified Group objects to this collection.

A list of Group objects to add.

Determines whether this collection contains a Group with the specified name.

true if the specified Group belongs to this collection; otherwise, false. Name of the Group to find.

Determines whether this collection contains a specified Group.

true if the specified Group belongs to this collection; otherwise, false. The Group to find.

Determines index of a specified Group in this collection.

The zero-based index of the specified Group. The Group to find.

Inserts a Group into this collection at a specified index.

The zero-based index into the collection at which to insert the Group. The Group to insert into this collection.

Removes a specified Group from this collection.

The Group to remove.

Removes a Group with the specified name from this collection.

Gets or sets the object with the specified name.

Gets or sets the object at a specified index.

Contains a collection of conditions.

Initializes a new instance of the GroupConditionCollection object.

Adds a condition to this collection.

Name of the attribute. Value the attribute must have in order to meet this condition.

Acquires a MapLayer from a file.

Supported file types include ShapeFile (.shp) Ecw File (.ecw).

Creates an instance of the componentname object.

Extracts data into a MapLayer from the specified file.

Filename of the file used to populate the MapLayer.

Extracts map data from the specified ecw file into a MapLayer and caches the generated image. Caching ecw files is recommended when used with projections.

Path and file name of the ecw file. Path and file name of the cached jpg file.

Represents a layer on the map. Either an ecw file (.ecw) image, or a shape file (.shp) collection of shapes including data the shape file contains.

Initializes a new instance of the MapLayer object.

First coordinate in Latitude, Longitude format. Second coordinate in Latitude, Longitude format. The line style used to draw this line.

Adds a point to this map layer.

The coordinates in Latitude, Longitude format. A marker drawn in place of this point. A PointF in the form of (latitude,longitude) A marker drawn in place of this point. If null, a default marker is drawn. The hotspot info like URL and tooltip for this point. Use null if no hotspot is needed. An annotation for this point. Use null if no annotation is needed. First coordinate in Longitude, Latitude format. Second coordinate in Longitude, Latitude format. The line style used to draw this line. The coordinates in Longitude, Latitude format. A marker drawn in place of this point. The coordinates in Longitude, Latitude format. A marker drawn in place of this point. The hotspot info like URL and tooltip for this point. Use null if no hotspot is needed. An annotation for this point. Use null if no annotation is needed.

Imports and merges a DataTable with this MapLayer.

Gets a string array of attribute names associated with the loaded shape file.

When ImportData() is used, the newly added columns will be in this array.

Gets or sets a Shape object that specifies the default properties of all subsequent shapes in this MapLayer.

Gets a GroupCollection object which holds Group objects used to modify similar shapes automatically.

Gets or sets a boolean value that indicates whether single shapes with multiple parts are labeled only once. An example is a multiple island country which would use only one label provided this property is set to true, otherwise each island may be labeled.

Gets or sets an array of colors that defines the colors that will be used by the shapes of this MapLayer.

When setting this property, each shape will get it's own color. Whereas by default, all shapes within a mapLayer take their color from MapLayer.DefaultShape.Background.Color.

Gets or sets a Palette enumeration that indicates which static palette will be used by the shapes of this MapLayer.

When setting this property, each shape will get it's own color. Whereas by default, all shapes within a mapLayer take their color from MapLayer.DefaultShape.Background.Color.

Gets a collection of Shape objects generated by the source shape file (.shp).

Gets or sets the name of the file used to populate this MapLayer.

Contains a collection of MapLayer objects.

Adds a specified MapLayer class to this collection.

The zero-based index of the added MapLayer. Name of the file containing the map data to add.

Adds a specified LayerCollection to this collection.

The LayerCollection to add.

Adds the specified MapLayer objects to this collection.

A list of MapLayer objects to add.

Determines whether this collection contains a specified MapLayer.

true if the specified MapLayer belongs to this collection; otherwise, false. The MapLayer to find.

Determines index of a specified MapLayer in this collection.

The zero-based index of the specified MapLayer. The MapLayer to find.

Inserts a MapLayer into this collection at a specified index.

The zero-based index into the collection at which to insert the MapLayer. The MapLayer to insert into this collection.

Removes a specified MapLayer from this collection.

The MapLayer to remove.

Gets or sets the object at a specified index.

Encapsulates properties associated with mapping. These properties are used only when using a map chart: (Chart.Type = ChartType.Map).

Initializes a new instance of the Mapping class.

Computes the Latitude, Longitude coordinates based on the specified pixel coordinates of the chart image.

Pixel coordinates in the form of: "x,y".

Computes the Latitude, Longitude coordinates based on the specified pixel coordinates of the chart image.

Pixel position to convert.

Gets an arraylist of shapes beneath the specified pixel coorinates.

Pixel coordinates.

Gets an arraylist of shapes beneath the specified pixel coorinates.

Pixel coordinates in the form of: "x,y".

Gets or sets the chart area on which the map is drawn. It accesses the same chart area instance as Chart.ChartArea

This property is equivalent to Chart.ChartArea

Gets or sets a shape object that contains default properties for all shapes on this map.

Gets a collection of MapLayer objects used to render the map.

Gets or sets an advanced projection the map rendering will be based on. This includes either LambertConicProjection() or MercatorProjection() methods.

Gets or sets a point that anchors the map to center when used with ZoomPercentage.

Gets or sets a percent value that indicates the new zoomed size of the map.

Represents a Projection type used for projected rendering of maps.

Initializes a new instance of the Projection object.

Gets or sets the projection parameters as a comma delimited string.

The following table defines the projection parameters based on the specific projection type. Projection Type Parameters Example Mercator Latitude in degrees "-50" Lambert Conic Azimuthal coordinate on the surface of a sphere, The latitude (projection latitude) in degrees, The projection standard first parallel in degrees, The projection standard second parallel in degrees. "-96, 38, 32, 42" Unprojected N/A ""

Gets or sets the projection type.

Represents a shape within a MapLayer. Shapes are automatically generated using shapefiles.

Gets the bounding box for this shape.

Gets or sets an annotation for this shape.

Gets or sets the Background object for this shape.

Gets or sets the Hotspot of this shape.

Gets a shape file attribute with the specified name.

Gets a shape file attribute at the specified index.

Gets or sets the Label for this shape.

Gets or sets the LegendEntry of this Shape.

Gets or sets the Line object used to outline this shape.

Gets or sets the Marker object drawn on this shape.

Contains a collection of Shape objects.

Initializes a new instance of ShapeCollection

Returns an IEnumerator for the collection.

Gets the object at a specified index.

Specifies the axes to zoom.

Can select any arbitrary bounding box to zoom to.

Select a specific x axis region only, y axis is fixed to the maximum extent

Select a specific y axis region only, x axis is fixed to the maximum extent

Specifies the scrolling type.

The chart area can be dragged.

Only scrolling is enabled.

Scrolling and Drag are enabled.

Specifies the selection style.

Cross hair is more accurate and shows the cross hair lines extending ot the axis to select a more accurate region for the zoom.

Box is more aesthetically pleasing and allows for rough selections.

Provides AJAX zooming and scrolling feature settings.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the charts handle all ajax calls. If this boolean is true, a dedicated handler (ashx) page is used instead of the calling page.

This option would typically only be used if the application was very performance sensitive and is disabled by default.

Controls whether the ASP.net AJAX is used or not.

It should be set to true when using the chart control inside the asp UpdatePanel.

Gets or sets a value that indicates the zooming direction. Options include Both (can select any arbitrary bounding box to zoom to), XAxis (select a specific x axis region only, y axis is fixed to the maximum extent) , YAxis (select a specific y axis region only, x axis is fixed to the maximum extent)

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the default operation after zooming is reset to drag. This allows the user to to drag or navigate the newly zoomed view before zooming again.

Gets or sets a value that indicates whether the Ajax zooming interface is activated.

Controls the position of the ? icon on the chart when there is no scroll bar.

If there is a scroll bar on the chart, the ? icon is displayed before or between the scroll bars.

Gets or sets a value that determines if the help button is enabled. This button displays in between the scroll bars and pops up a window showing the help text when pressed.

Gets or sets a string that overrides the default help text which displays when hitting the help icon.

Gets or sets a language file name that overrides the default en.xml file.

Gets or sets a value that determines the number of sections (rows / columns) outside of the viewing portal to render in advance. This can provide a better experience for the user at the cost of performance and bandwidth (loading images that may never be viewed).

Gets or sets the update interval for the chart in seconds. If data is changing on the server side this interval will refresh the chart image seamlessly based on this time period.

This operation is resource intensive and should only be used if it the data for the chart is frequently changing and it is important that the viewer have the latest result immediately.

Gets or sets a value that determines the scrolling type with options including drag (click / drag), scroll (using scroll bars / arrows) or both.

Determines the visual style when selecting a zoomed region. Options include box and cross hair. Box is more aesthetically pleasing and allows for rough selections. Cross hair is more accurate and shows the cross hair lines extending ot the axis to select a more accurate region for the zoom.

Gets or sets a value that determines the amount time in seconds before the tooltip displays (if a tooltip exists for the area hovered over).

Controls whether the context menu is displayed is displayed or not.

Gets or sets a value that determines if the chart image is rendered as a single image or in sections.

This event is very useful for updating chart data.